MS Bidding Document WB Final Ver 18-02-22

i
UGANDA ELECTRICITY TRANSMISSION COMPANY

LIMITED
GRID EXPANSION AND REINFORCEMENT

PROJECT (CREDIT NO: IDA 58080)
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
SUPPLY, DELIVERY, TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING OF TWO (2) MOBILE
SUBSTATIONS 25MVA – 132/33-11 kV AND
RELATED ACCESSORIES (RETENDER)
ISSUED: AUGUST 2022

ICB NO: UETCL/SUPLS/2020-2021/00036/1
ii Section I. Instructions to Bidders
SPECIFIC PROCUREMENT NOTICE
REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
UGANDA ELECTRICITY TRANSMISSION COMPANY LIMITED
(UETCL)
Project: GRID EXPANSION AND REINFORCEMENT PROJECT (CREDIT NO:

IDA 58080)
Contract Title: Supply, Delivery, Testing and Commissioning of two (2) Mobile
Substations 25MVA - 132/33&11 kV and related accessories (Retender)
PROCUREMENT REFERENCE NO: UETCL/SUPLS/2020-2021/00036/1
1. The Government of Uganda has received financing from the World Bank toward the cost
of the Grid Expansion and Reinforcement Project (GERP), and intends to apply part of the
proceeds toward payments under the contract for Supply, Delivery, Testing and
Commissioning of two (2) Mobile Substations 25MVA – 132/33-11 kV and related
accessories.
2. The Uganda Electricity Transmission Company (UETCL) now invites sealed bids from
eligible bidders for the Supply, Delivery, Testing and Commissioning of two (2)
Mobile Substations together with tools, spares and accessories. This briefly includes:
a) 25MVA multi-ratio mobile substations (Qty 2 complete units- 2x25MVA

132/33-11kV, with Mobile I & II configured at delivery to 132/33kV and
132/11kV configurations, respectively) to be delivered at Gulu Substation,
b) Robust Plant Maintenance Laptop with software for Protection Relays,

RTU, AVR, Energy Meters, Onboard permanent impact recorder
(accelerometer), test sets etc (Qty: 1 complete unit with backup media) to
be delivered at Lugogo stores, Kampala
c) Multifunctional diagnostic testing solution for Power Transformers and

Switchgear for the Mobile Plants IN and OUT of service testing
(compatible with existing STS5000 and TDX5000 platforms), together
Section I. Instructions to Bidders iii
with Cable Sets, Software, Heavy Duty Transport Cases and Trolley (Qty:
1 complete set), to be delivered at Lugogo stores, Kampala
d) Testing solution for Surge Arrestors (compatible with existing SCAR-10
platform) with Current Clip-on Transformers, Cable Sets and Carrying Bag
(Qty: 1 complete set), to be delivered at Lugogo stores, Kampala
e) Standalone Power Transformer Online Drying System (compatible with
existing ATMoS platforms - 1 complete set), to be delivered at Lugogo stores,
Kampala
f) Multi-Mode Optical Fiber Cable for The Mobile Station (Qty; 50meter roll),
to be delivered at Lugogo stores, Kampala
3. Bidding will be conducted through the International Competitive Bidding procedures as

specified in the World Bank’s Guidelines: Procurement of Goods, Works and Non-
consulting Services under IBRD Loans and IDA Credits and Grants by World Bank
Borrowers dated January 2011 and revised in July 2014 (“Procurement Guidelines”), and is
open to all eligible bidders as defined in the Procurement Guidelines. In addition, please
refer to paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 setting forth the World Bank’s policy on conflict of interest.
4. Interested eligible bidders may obtain further information from Uganda Electricity
Transmission Company, Manager Procurement, Plot No. 12 Hannington Rd, UETCL
Annex Building, procurement@uetcl.com and inspect the bidding documents during office
hours 0900 to 1700 hours at the same address given at the end of this invitation.
5. The bidding document in English may be purchased by interested Bidders upon the
submission of a written application to the address below and upon payment of a
nonrefundable fee of UGX 370,000 (Uganda Shillings Three hundred and Seventy
thousand) or USD 100 (One Hundred US Dollars). The method of payment shall be
Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) to UETCL’s B a n k Account below:
Bank Branch Account Number Currency

ABSA Corporate 6002166559 UGX
Standard Chartered Speke Road 8705610780000 USD
Bank
6. Bids must be delivered to the address indicated in 8 below on or before 19th October, 2022
at 11:00 Hrs. Electronic bidding will be permitted. Late bids will be rejected. Bids will be
publicly opened in the presence of the bidders’ designated representatives and anyone who
choose to attend at the address in 8 below on 19th October, 2022 at 11:15 Hrs.
7. All bids must be accompanied by a Bid Security of USD 54,000 (Untied States Dollars,
Fifty-Four Thousand) in form of a Bank guarantee.
8. The addresses referred to above are:
Attn : Managing Director/CEO

iv Section I. Instructions to Bidders
Copy: Manager Procurement and Disposal Department,

Address : Uganda Electricity Transmission Company Ltd
Street : Plot No. 12 Hannington Rd, UETCL Annex Building, Floor No. 2
City : Kampala
Country : Uganda
9. The planned procurement schedule (subject to changes) is as follows:
Activity Date
a. Publish bid notice 18th August, 2022
b. Pre-Bid Meeting 2nd September, 2022
c. Bid closing date 19th October, 2022
d. Evaluation process 20th October to 22nd November, 2022
e. Display and communication of best 29th November, 2022 to 7th December, 2022
evaluated bidder notice
f. Contract Award and Signature December, 2022
UETCL IS NOT BOUND TO ACCEPT THE LOWEST BID OR ANY BID
MANAGING DIRECTOR/CEO
Section I. Instructions to Bidders v
Table of Contents
PART 1 – Bidding Procedures ............................................................................................... 1

Section I. Instructions to Bidders ..............................................................................................3
Section II. Bid Data Sheet (BDS) ...........................................................................................29
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria ..................................................................35
Section IV. Bidding Forms .....................................................................................................41
Section V. Eligible Countries .................................................................................................55
Section VI. Bank Policy - Corrupt and Fraudulent Practices ..................................................57
PART 2 – Supply Requirements ........................................................................................ 614

Section VII. Schedule of Requirements ..................................................................................64
PART 3 - Contract .............................................................................................................. 219

Section VIII. General Conditions of Contract ......................................................................221
Section IX. Special Conditions of Contract ..........................................................................245
Section X. Contract Forms ....................................................................................................250
1
PART 1 – Bidding Procedures

3
Section I. Instructions to Bidders
Table of Clauses
A. General ............................................................................................................................... 5
1. Scope of Bid .........................................................................................................................5
2. Source of Funds ...................................................................................................................5
3. Corrupt and Fraudulent Practices.........................................................................................5
4. Eligible Bidders ...................................................................................................................6
5. Eligible Goods and Related Services ...................................................................................8
B. Contents of Bidding Document ......................................................................................... 9

6. Sections of Bidding Document ............................................................................................9
7. Clarification of Bidding Documents ..................................................................................10
8. Amendment of Bidding Document ....................................................................................10
C. Preparation of Bids .......................................................................................................... 10

9. Cost of Bidding ..................................................................................................................10
10. Language of Bid .................................................................................................................10
11. Documents Comprising the Bid .........................................................................................11
12. Letter of Bid and Price Schedules ......................................................................................11
13. Alternative Bids .................................................................................................................12
14. Bid Prices and Discounts ...................................................................................................12
15. Currencies of Bid and Payment .........................................................................................14
16. Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Conformity of the Goods and Related
Services ..............................................................................................................................14
17. Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Qualifications of the Bidder ........................15
18. Period of Validity of Bids ..................................................................................................16
19. Bid Security .......................................................................................................................16
20. Format and Signing of Bid .................................................................................................18
D. Submission and Opening of Bids .................................................................................... 18

21. Sealing and Marking of Bids .............................................................................................18
22. Deadline for Submission of Bids .......................................................................................19
23. Late Bids ............................................................................................................................19
24. Withdrawal, Substitution, and Modification of Bids .........................................................19
25. Bid Opening .......................................................................................................................20
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ............................................................................... 21

26. Confidentiality ...................................................................................................................21
27. Clarification of Bids ...........................................................................................................22
4 Section I Instructions to Bidders
28. Deviations, Reservations, and Omissions ..........................................................................22

29. Determination of Responsiveness ......................................................................................22
30. Nonconformities, Errors and Omissions ..............................................................................23
31. Correction of Arithmetical Errors ......................................................................................23
32. Conversion to Single Currency ..........................................................................................24
33. Margin of Preference ........................................................................................................24
34. Evaluation of Bids..............................................................................................................24
35. Comparison of Bids ...........................................................................................................25
36. Qualification of the Bidder ................................................................................................25
37. Purchaser’s Right to Accept Any Bid, and to Reject Any or All Bids ..............................26
F. Award of Contract ............................................................................................................ 26

38. Award Criteria ...................................................................................................................26
39. Purchaser’s Right to Vary Quantities at Time of Award ...................................................26
40. Notification of Award ........................................................................................................26
41. Signing of Contract ............................................................................................................27
42. Performance Security .........................................................................................................27
Section I Instructions to Bidders 5
Section I. Instructions to Bidders

A. General
1. Scope of Bid 1.1 In connection with the Invitation for Bids, specified in the Bid
Data Sheet (BDS), the Purchaser, as specified in the BDS,
issues these Bidding Documents for the supply of Goods and
Related Services incidental thereto as specified in Section VII,
Schedule of Requirements. The name, identification and number
of lots (contracts) of this International Competitive Bidding
(ICB) procurement are specified in the BDS.
1.2 Throughout these Bidding Documents:
(a) the term “in writing” means communicated in written form
(e.g. by mail, e-mail, fax, telex) with proof of receipt;
(b) if the context so requires, “singular” means “plural” and
vice versa; and
(c) “day” means calendar day.
2. Source of Funds 2.1 The Borrower or Recipient (hereinafter called “Borrower”)
specified in the BDS has applied for or received financing
(hereinafter called “funds”) from the International Bank for
Reconstruction and Development or the International
Development Association (hereinafter called “the Bank”)in an
amount specified in BDS, toward the project named in BDS The
Borrower intends to apply a portion of the funds to eligible
payments under the contract for which these Bidding Documents
are issued.
2.2 Payment by the Bank will be made only at the request of the
Borrower and upon approval by the Bank in accordance with the
terms and conditions of the Loan (or other financing)
Agreement. The Loan (or other financing) Agreement prohibits a
withdrawal from the Loan (or other financing) account for the
purpose of any payment to persons or entities, or for any import
of goods, if such payment or import, to the knowledge of the
Bank, is prohibited by decision of the United Nations Security
Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United
Nations. No party other than the Borrower shall derive any rights
from the Loan (or other financing) Agreement or have any claim
to the proceeds of the Loan (or other financing).
3. Corrupt and 3.1 The Bank requires compliance with its policy in regard to
Fraudulent
Practices corrupt and fraudulent practices as set forth in Section VI.

3.2 In further pursuance of this policy, Bidders shall permit and shall
cause its agents (where declared or not), sub-contractors, sub-
consultants, service providers or suppliers and to permit the
Bank to inspect all accounts, records and other documents
relating to the submission of the application, bid submission (in
case prequalified), and contract performance (in the case of
award), and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the
Bank.
4. Eligible Bidders 4.1 A Bidder may be a firm that is a private entity, a government-
owned entity—subject to ITB 4.5—or any combination of such
entities in the form of a joint venture (JV) under an existing
agreement or with the intent to enter into such an agreement
supported by a letter of intent. In the case of a joint venture, all
members shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of
the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms. The JV shall
nominate a Representative who shall have the authority to conduct
all business for and on behalf of any and all the members of the JV
during the bidding process and, in the event the JV is awarded the
Contract, during contract execution. Unless specified in the BDS,
there is no limit on the number of members in a JV.
4.2 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. Any Bidder found to
have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A Bidder may be
considered to have a conflict of interest for the purpose of this
bidding process, if the Bidder:
(a) directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by or is under

common control with another Bidder; or
(b) receives or has received any direct or indirect subsidy from
another Bidder; or
(c) has the same legal representative as another Bidder; or
(d) has a relationship with another Bidder, directly or through
common third parties, that puts it in a position to influence
the bid of another Bidder, or influence the decisions of the
Purchaser regarding this bidding process; or
(e) participates in more than one bid in this bidding process.
Participation by a Bidder in more than one Bid will result
in the disqualification of all Bids in which such Bidder is
involved. However, this does not limit the inclusion of the
same subcontractor in more than one bid; or
(f) any of its affiliates participated as a consultant in the
preparation of the design or technical specifications of the

works that are the subject of the bid; or
(g) any of its affiliates has been hired (or is proposed to be
hired) by the Purchaser or Borrower for the Contract
implementation; or
(h) would be providing goods, works, or non-consulting
services resulting from or directly related to consulting
services for the preparation or implementation of the
project specified in the BDS ITB 2.1 that it provided or
were provided by any affiliate that directly or indirectly
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with
that firm; or
(i) has a close business or family relationship with a
professional staff of the Borrower (or of the project
implementing agency, or of a recipient of a part of the
loan) who: (i) are directly or indirectly involved in the
preparation of the bidding documents or specifications of
the contract, and/or the bid evaluation process of such
contract; or (ii) would be involved in the implementation or
supervision of such contract unless the conflict stemming
from such relationship has been resolved in a manner
acceptable to the Bank throughout the procurement process
and execution of the contract
4.3 A Bidder may have the nationality of any country, subject to the
restrictions pursuant to ITB 4.7. A Bidder shall be deemed to have
the nationality of a country if the Bidder is constituted, incorporated
or registered in and operates in conformity with the provisions of
the laws of that country, as evidenced by its articles of incorporation
(or equivalent documents of constitution or association) and its
registration documents, as the case may be. This criterion also shall
apply to the determination of the nationality of proposed sub-
contractors or sub-consultants for any part of the Contract including
related Services.
4.4 A Bidder that has been sanctioned by the Bank in accordance with
the above ITB 3.1, including in accordance with the Bank’s
Guidelines on Preventing and Combating Corruption in Projects
Financed by IBRD Loans and IDA Credits and Grants (“Anti-
Corruption Guidelines”), shall be ineligible to be prequalified for,
bid for, or be awarded a Bank-financed contract or benefit from a
Bank-financed contract, financially or otherwise, during such period
of time as the Bank shall have determined. The list of debarred
firms and individuals is available at the electronic address specified
in the BDS.
4.5 Bidders that are Government-owned enterprises or institutions in

the Purchaser’s Country may participate only if they can establish
that they (i) are legally and financially autonomous (ii) operate
under commercial law, and (iii) are not dependent agencies of the
Purchaser. To be eligible, a government-owned enterprise or
institution shall establish to the Bank’s satisfaction, through all
relevant documents, including its Charter and other information the
Bank may request, that it: (i) is a legal entity separate from the
government (ii) does not currently receive substantial subsidies or
budget support; (iii) operates like any commercial enterprise, and,
inter alia, is not obliged to pass on its surplus to the government, can
acquire rights and liabilities, borrow funds and be liable for
repayment of its debts, and can be declared bankrupt; and (iv) is not
bidding for a contract to be awarded by the department or agency of
the government which under their applicable laws or regulations is
the reporting or supervisory authority of the enterprise or has the
ability to exercise influence or control over the enterprise or
institution.
4.6 A Bidder shall not be under suspension from bidding by the

Purchaser as the result of the operation of a Bid–Securing
Declaration.
4.7 Firms and individuals may be ineligible if so indicated in Section V

and (a) as a matter of law or official regulations, the Borrower’s
country prohibits commercial relations with that country, provided
that the Bank is satisfied that such exclusion does not preclude
effective competition for the supply of goods or the contracting of
works or services required; or (b) by an act of compliance with a
decision of the United Nations Security Council taken under
Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations, the Borrower’s
country prohibits any import of goods or contracting of works or
services from that country, or any payments to any country, person,
or entity in that country.
4.8 A Bidder shall provide such evidence of eligibility satisfactory to

the Purchaser, as the Purchaser shall reasonably request.
5. Eligible Goods 5.1 All the Goods and Related Services to be supplied under the
and Related Contract and financed by the Bank may have their origin in any
Services country in accordance with Section V, Eligible Countries.
5.2 For purposes of this Clause, the term “goods” includes
commodities, raw material, machinery, equipment, and industrial
plants; and “related services” includes services such as
insurance, installation, training, and initial maintenance.

5.3 The term “origin” means the country where the goods have been
mined, grown, cultivated, produced, manufactured or processed;
or, through manufacture, processing, or assembly, another
commercially recognized article results that differs substantially
in its basic characteristics from its components.
B. Contents of Bidding Document

6. Sections of 6.1 The Bidding Documents consist of Parts 1, 2, and 3, which
Bidding include all the Sections indicated below, and should be read in
Document conjunction with any Addenda issued in accordance with ITB 8.
PART 1 Bidding Procedures
 Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

 Section II. Bidding Data Sheet (BDS)
 Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
 Section IV. Bidding Forms
 Section V. Eligible Countries
 Section VI. Bank Policy-Corrupt and Fraudulent
Practices
PART 2 Supply Requirements
 Section VII. Schedule of Requirements
PART 3 Contract
 Section VIII. General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

 Section IX. Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
 Section X. Contract Forms
6.2 The Invitation for Bids issued by the Purchaser is not part of the
Bidding Document.
6.3 Unless obtained directly from the Purchaser, the Purchaser is not
responsible for the completeness of the document, responses to
requests for clarification, the Minutes of the pre-Bid meeting (if
any), or Addenda to the Bidding Document in accordance with
ITB 8. In case of any contradiction, documents obtained directly
from the Purchaser shall prevail.
6.4 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms,
and specifications in the Bidding Documents and to furnish with
its Bid all information or documentation as is required by the

Bidding Documents.
7. Clarification of 7.1 A Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Document
Bidding shall contact the Purchaser in writing at the Purchaser’s address
Documents specified in the BDS. The Purchaser will respond in writing to
any request for clarification, provided that such request is
received prior to the deadline for submission of bids within a
period specified in the BDS. The Purchaser shall forward copies
of its response to all Bidders who have acquired the Bidding
Documents in accordance with ITB 6.3, including a description of
the inquiry but without identifying its source. If so specified in
the BDS, the Purchaser shall also promptly publish its response
at the web page identified in the BDS. Should the clarification
result in changes to the essential elements of the Bidding
Documents, the Purchaser shall amend the Bidding Documents
following the procedure under ITB 8 and ITB 22.2.
8. Amendment of 8.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the
Bidding Purchaser may amend the Bidding Documents by issuing
Document addenda.
8.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Bidding Documents
and shall be communicated in writing to all who have obtained
the Bidding Documents from the Purchaser in accordance with
ITB 6.3. The Purchaser shall also promptly publish the
addendum on the Purchaser’s web page in accordance with ITB
7.1.
8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take an
addendum into account in preparing their bids, the Purchaser
may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of
bids, pursuant to ITB 22.2.
C. Preparation of Bids
9. Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation
and submission of its bid, and the Purchaser shall not be
responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or
outcome of the bidding process.
10. Language of 10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to
Bid the bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Purchaser, shall be
written in the language specified in the BDS. Supporting
documents and printed literature that are part of the Bid may be
in another language provided they are accompanied by an
accurate translation of the relevant passages into the language
specified in the BDS, in which case, for purposes of
interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall govern.

11. Documents 11.1 The Bid shall comprise the following:
Comprising the
Bid (a) Letter of Bid in accordance with ITB 12;
(b) completed schedules, in accordance with ITB 12 and 14
(c) Bid Security or Bid-Securing Declaration, in accordance
with ITB 19.1;
(d) alternative bids, if permissible, in accordance with ITB 13;
(e) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid to
commit the Bidder, in accordance with ITB 20.2;
(f) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 17
establishing the Bidder’s qualifications to perform the
contract if its bid is accepted;
(g) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 17
establishing the Bidder’s eligibility to bid;
(h) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 16, that the
Goods and Related Services to be supplied by the Bidder
are of eligible origin;
(i) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 16 and 30,
that the Goods and Related Services conform to the
Bidding Documents;
(j) any other document required in the BDS.
11.2 In addition to the requirements under ITB 11.1, bids submitted
by a JV shall include a copy of the Joint Venture Agreement
entered into by all members. Alternatively, a letter of intent to
execute a Joint Venture Agreement in the event of a successful
bid shall be signed by all members and submitted with the bid,
together with a copy of the proposed Agreement.
11.3 The Bidder shall furnish in the Letter of Bid information on
commissions and gratuities, if any, paid or to be paid to agents or
any other party relating to this Bid.
12. Letter of Bid 12.1. The Letter of Bid and Price Schedules shall be prepared using
and Price the relevant forms furnished in Section IV, Bidding Forms. The
Schedules forms must be completed without any alterations to the text, and
no substitutes shall be accepted except as provided under ITB
20.2. All blank spaces shall be filled in with the information
requested.
13. Alternative Bids 13.1. Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, alternative bids shall not
be considered.
14. Bid Prices and 14.1 The prices and discounts quoted by the Bidder in the Letter of
Discounts Bid and in the Price Schedules shall conform to the requirements
specified below.
14.2 All lots (contracts) and items must be listed and priced separately
in the Price Schedules.
14.3 The price to be quoted in the Letter of Bid in accordance with
ITB 12.1 shall be the total price of the bid, excluding any
discounts offered.
14.4 The Bidder shall quote any discounts and indicate the
methodology for their application in the Letter of Bid, in
accordance with ITB 12.1.
14.5 Prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed during the Bidder’s
performance of the Contract and not subject to variation on any
account, unless otherwise specified in the BDS A bid submitted
with an adjustable price quotation shall be treated as
nonresponsive and shall be rejected, pursuant to ITB 29.
However, if in accordance with the BDS, prices quoted by the
Bidder shall be subject to adjustment during the performance of
the Contract, a bid submitted with a fixed price quotation shall
not be rejected, but the price adjustment shall be treated as zero.
14.6 If so specified in ITB 1.1, bids are being invited for individual
lots (contracts) or for any combination of lots (packages).
Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, prices quoted shall
correspond to 100 % of the items specified for each lot and to
100% of the quantities specified for each item of a lot. Bidders
wishing to offer discounts for the award of more than one
Contract shall specify in their bid the price reductions applicable
to each package, or alternatively, to individual Contracts within
the package. Discounts shall be submitted in accordance with
ITB 14.4 provided the bids for all lots (contracts) are opened at
the same time.
14.7 The terms EXW, CIP, and other similar terms shall be governed
by the rules prescribed in the current edition of Incoterms,
published by The International Chamber of Commerce, as
specified in the BDS.
14.8 Prices shall be quoted as specified in each Price Schedule
included in Section IV, Bidding Forms. The dis-aggregation of
price components is required solely for the purpose of facilitating
the comparison of bids by the Purchaser. This shall not in any
way limit the Purchaser’s right to contract on any of the terms

offered. In quoting prices, the Bidder shall be free to use
transportation through carriers registered in any eligible country,
in accordance with Section V, Eligible Countries. Similarly, the
Bidder may obtain insurance services from any eligible country
in accordance with Section V, Eligible Countries. Prices shall be
entered in the following manner:
(a) For Goods manufactured in the Purchaser’s Country:
(i) the price of the Goods quoted EXW (ex-works, ex-
factory, ex warehouse, ex showroom, or off-the-
shelf, as applicable), including all customs duties
and sales and other taxes already paid or payable on
the components and raw material used in the
manufacture or assembly of the Goods;
(ii) any Purchaser’s Country sales tax and other taxes
which will be payable on the Goods if the contract is
awarded to the Bidder; and
(iii) the price for inland transportation, insurance, and other
local services required to convey the Goods to their
final destination (Project Site) specified in the BDS.
(b) For Goods manufactured outside the Purchaser’s
Country, to be imported:
(i) the price of the Goods, quoted CIP named place of
destination, in the Purchaser’s Country, as
specified in the BDS;
(ii) the price for inland transportation, insurance, and
other local services required to convey the Goods
from the named place of destination to their final
destination (Project Site) specified in the BDS;
(c) For Goods manufactured outside the Purchaser’s
Country, already imported:
(i) the price of the Goods, including the original
import value of the Goods; plus, any mark-up (or
rebate); plus, any other related local cost, and
custom duties and other import taxes already paid
or to be paid on the Goods already imported.
(ii) the custom duties and other import taxes already
paid (need to be supported with documentary
evidence) or to be paid on the Goods already
imported;
(iii) the price of the Goods, obtained as the difference
between (i) and (ii) above;
(iv) any Purchaser’s Country sales and other taxes
which will be payable on the Goods if the contract
is awarded to the Bidder; and
(v) the price for inland transportation, insurance, and
other local services required to convey the Goods
from the named place of destination to their final
destination (Project Site) specified in the BDS.
(d) for Related Services, other than inland transportation
and other services required to convey the Goods to their
final destination, whenever such Related Services are
specified in the Schedule of Requirements:
(i) the price of each item comprising the Related
Services (inclusive of any applicable taxes).
15. Currencies of 15.1 The currency(ies) of the bid and the currency(ies) of payments shall
Bid and be as specified in the BDS.The Bidder shall quote in the currency
Payment of the Purchaser’s Country the portion of the bid price that
corresponds to expenditures incurred in the currency of the
Purchaser’s country, unless otherwise specified in the BDS.
15.2 The Bidder may express the bid price in any currency. If the
Bidder wishes to be paid in a combination of amounts in
different currencies, it may quote its price accordingly but shall
use no more than three foreign currencies in addition to the
currency of the Purchaser’s Country.
16. Documents 16.1 To establish the eligibility of the Goods and Related Services in
Establishing the accordance with ITB 5, Bidders shall complete the country of
Eligibility and origin declarations in the Price Schedule Forms, included in
Conformity of Section IV, Bidding Forms.
the Goods and
Related 16.2 To establish the conformity of the Goods and Related Services to
Services the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish as part of its
Bid the documentary evidence that the Goods conform to the
technical specifications and standards specified in Section VII,
Schedule of Requirements.
16.3 The documentary evidence may be in the form of literature,
drawings or data, and shall consist of a detailed item by item
description of the essential technical and performance
characteristics of the Goods and Related Services, demonstrating
substantial responsiveness of the Goods and Related Services to
the technical specification, and if applicable, a statement of

deviations and exceptions to the provisions of the Section VII,
16.4 The Bidder shall also furnish a list giving full particulars,
including available sources and current prices of spare parts,
special tools, etc., necessary for the proper and continuing
functioning of the Goods during the period specified in the BDS
following commencement of the use of the goods by the
Purchaser.
16.5 Standards for workmanship, process, material, and equipment, as
well as references to brand names or catalogue numbers
specified by the Purchaser in the Schedule of Requirements, are
intended to be descriptive only and not restrictive. The Bidder
may offer other standards of quality, brand names, and/or
catalogue numbers, provided that it demonstrates, to the
Purchaser’s satisfaction, that the substitutions ensure substantial
equivalence or are superior to those specified in the Section VII,
17. Documents 17.1 To establish Bidder’s their eligibility in accordance with ITB 4,
Establishing the Bidders shall complete the Letter of Bid, included in Section IV,
Eligibility and Bidding Forms.
Qualifications
of the Bidder 17.2 The documentary evidence of the Bidder’s qualifications to
perform the contract if its bid is accepted shall establish to the
Purchaser’s satisfaction:
(a) that, if required in the BDS, a Bidder that does not
manufacture or produce the Goods it offers to supply shall
submit the Manufacturer’s Authorization using the form
included in Section IV, Bidding Forms to demonstrate that it
has been duly authorized by the manufacturer or producer of
the Goods to supply these Goods in the Purchaser’s Country;
(b) that, if required in the BDS, in case of a Bidder not doing
business within the Purchaser’s Country, the Bidder is or
will be (if awarded the contract) represented by an Agent in
the country equipped and able to carry out the Supplier’s
maintenance, repair and spare parts-stocking obligations
prescribed in the Conditions of Contract and/or Technical
Specifications; and
(c) that the Bidder meets each of the qualification criterion
specified in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria.
18. Period of 18.1. Bids shall remain valid for the period specified in the BDS after
Validity of Bids the bid submission deadline date prescribed by the Purchaser in
accordance with ITB 22.1. A bid valid for a shorter period shall
be rejected by the Purchaser as nonresponsive.
18.2. In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid

validity period, the Purchaser may request bidders to extend the
period of validity of their bids. The request and the responses
shall be made in writing. If a Bid Security is requested in
accordance with ITB Clause 19, it shall also be extended for a
corresponding period. A Bidder may refuse the request without
forfeiting its Bid Security. A Bidder granting the request shall
not be required or permitted to modify its bid, except as provided
in ITB 18.3.
18.3. If the award is delayed by a period exceeding fifty-six (56) days

beyond the expiry of the initial bid validity, the Contract price shall
be determined as follows:
(a) In the case of fixed price contracts, the Contract price shall
be the bid price adjusted by the factor specified in the BDS.
(b) In the case of adjustable price contracts, no adjustment shall
be made.
(c) In any case, bid evaluation shall be based on the bid price
without taking into consideration the applicable correction
from those indicated above.
19. Bid Security 19.1. The Bidder shall furnish as part of its bid, either a Bid-Securing
Declaration or a bid security, as specified in the BDS, in original
form and, in the case of a bid security. In the amount and
currency specified in the BDS.
19.2. A Bid Securing Declaration shall use the form included in
Section IV, Bidding Forms.
19.3. If a bid security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the bid
security shall be a demand guarantee in any of the following
forms at the Bidder’s option:
(a) an unconditional guarantee issued by a bank or financial
institution (such as an insurance, bonding or surety
company);
(b) an irrevocable letter of credit;
(c) a cashier’s or certified check; or

(d) another security specified in the BDS,
from a reputable source from an eligible country. If the

unconditional guarantee is issued by a financial institution located
outside the Purchaser’s Country, the issuing financial institution
shall have a correspondent financial institution located in the
Purchaser’s Country to make it enforceable. In the case of a bank
guarantee, the bid security shall be submitted either using the Bid
Security Form included in Section IV, Bidding Forms, or in another
substantially similar format approved by the Purchaser prior to bid
submission. The bid security shall be valid for twenty-eight (28)
days beyond the original validity period of the bid, or beyond any
period of extension if requested under ITB 18.2.
19.4. If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, any bid not
accompanied by a substantially responsive Bid Security shall be
rejected by the Purchaser as non-responsive.
19.5. If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the Bid

Security of unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned as promptly as
possible upon the successful Bidder’s signing the contract and
furnishing the Performance Security pursuant to ITB 42.
19.6. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder shall be returned as

promptly as possible once the successful Bidder has signed the
contract and furnished the required performance security.
19.7. The Bid Security may be forfeited or the Bid Securing

Declaration executed:
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid

validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid, or any
extension thereto provided by the Bidder; or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to:
(i) sign the Contract in accordance with ITB41; or
(ii) furnish a performance security in accordance with

ITB 42.
19.8. The bid security or Bid- Securing Declaration of a JV must be in

the name of the JV that submits the bid. If the JV has not been
legally constituted into a legally enforceable JV at the time of
bidding, the bid security or Bid-Securing Declaration shall be in
the names of all future members as named in the letter of intent
referred to in ITB 4.1 and ITB 11.2.
19.9. If a bid security is not required in the BDS, pursuant to ITB 19.1,
and
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid
validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid, or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to: sign the Contract in
accordance with ITB 41; or furnish a performance security
in accordance with ITB 42;
the Borrower may, if provided for in the BDS, declare the
Bidder ineligible to be awarded a contract by the Purchaser for a
period of time as stated in the BDS.
20. Format and 20.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents
Signing of Bid comprising the bid as described in ITB 11 and clearly mark it
“ORIGINAL.” Alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB
13, shall be clearly marked “ALTERNATIVE.” In addition, the Bidder
shall submit copies of the bid, in the number specified in the BDS
and clearly mark them “COPY.” In the event of any discrepancy
between the original and the copies, the original shall prevail.
20.2 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or written in
indelible ink and shall be signed by a person duly authorized to
sign on behalf of the Bidder. This authorization shall consist of a
written confirmation as specified in the BDS and shall be attached
to the bid. The name and position held by each person signing the
authorization must be typed or printed below the signature. All
pages of the bid where entries or amendments have been made shall
be signed or initialed by the person signing the bid.
20.3 In case the Bidder is a JV, the Bid shall be signed by an authorized
representative of the JV on behalf of the JV, and so as to be legally
binding on all the members as evidenced by a power of attorney
signed by their legally authorized representatives.
20.4 Any inter-lineation, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if
they are signed or initialed by the person signing the bid.
D. Submission and Opening of Bids

21. Sealing and 21.1. The Bidder shall enclose the original and all copies of the bid,
Marking of including alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13,
Bids in separate sealed envelopes, duly marking the envelopes as
“ORIGINAL”, “ALTERNATIVE” and “COPY.” These envelopes
containing the original and the copies shall then be enclosed in one
single envelope.
21.2. The inner and outer envelopes shall:
(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder;

(b) be addressed to the Purchaser in accordance with ITB 24.1;
(c) bear the specific identification of this bidding process
indicated in ITB 1.1; and
(d) bear a warning not to open before the time and date for bid
opening.
21.3. If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required, the
Purchaser will assume no responsibility for the misplacement or
premature opening of the bid.
22. Deadline for 22.1. Bids must be received by the Purchaser at the address and no
Submission of later than the date and time specified in the BDS. When so
Bids specified in the BDS, bidders shall have the option of submitting
their bids electronically. Bidders submitting bids electronically shall
follow the electronic bid submission procedures specified in the
BDS.
22.2. The Purchaser may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the
submission of bids by amending the Bidding Documents in
accordance with ITB 8, in which case all rights and obligations
of the Purchaser and Bidders previously subject to the deadline
shall thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended.
23. Late Bids 23.1. The Purchaser shall not consider any bid that arrives after the
deadline for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 22. Any
bid received by the Purchaser after the deadline for submission
of bids shall be declared late, rejected, and returned unopened to
the Bidder.
24. Withdrawal, 24.1. A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its Bid after it has
Substitution, been submitted by sending a written notice, duly signed by an
and authorized representative, and shall include a copy of the
Modification of authorization (the power of attorney) in accordance with ITB
Bids 20.2, (except that withdrawal notices do not require copies ). The
corresponding substitution or modification of the bid must
accompany the respective written notice. All notices must be:
(a) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 20 and 21
(except that withdrawal notices do not require copies), and
in addition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly
marked “WITHDRAWAL,” “SUBSTITUTION,” or
“MODIFICATION;” and
(b) received by the Purchaser prior to the deadline prescribed
for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 22.
24.2. Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB 24.1

shall be returned unopened to the Bidders.
24.3. No bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in the
interval between the deadline for submission of bids and the
expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on
the Letter of Bid or any extension thereof.
25. Bid Opening 25.1. Except as in the cases specified in ITB 23 and 24, the Purchaser
shall publicly open and read out in accordance with ITB 25.3 all
bids received by the deadline at the date, time and place
specified in the BDS in the presence of Bidders’ designated
representatives and anyone who choose to attend. Any specific
electronic bid opening procedures required if electronic bidding
is permitted in accordance with ITB 22.1, shall be as specified in
the BDS.
25.2. First, envelopes marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be opened and
read out and the envelope with the corresponding bid shall not be
opened, but returned to the Bidder. If the withdrawal envelope
does not contain a copy of the “power of attorney” confirming
the signature as a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the
Bidder, the corresponding bid will be opened. No bid withdrawal
shall be permitted unless the corresponding withdrawal notice
contains a valid authorization to request the withdrawal and is
read out at bid opening. Next, envelopes marked
“SUBSTITUTION” shall be opened and read out and exchanged
with the corresponding Bid being substituted, and the substituted
Bid shall not be opened, but returned to the Bidder. No Bid
substitution shall be permitted unless the corresponding
substitution notice contains a valid authorization to request the
substitution and is read out at bid opening. Envelopes marked
“MODIFICATION” shall be opened and read out with the
corresponding Bid. No Bid modification shall be permitted
unless the corresponding modification notice contains a valid
authorization to request the modification and is read out at Bid
opening. Only bids that are opened and read out at Bid opening
shall be considered further.
25.3. All other envelopes shall be opened one at a time, reading out:
the name of the Bidder and whether there is a modification; the
total Bid Prices, per lot (contract) if applicable, including any
discounts and alternative bids; the presence or absence of a Bid
Security, if required; and any other details as the Purchaser may
consider appropriate. Only discounts and alternative bids read
out at Bid opening shall be considered for evaluation. The Letter
of Bid and the Price Schedules are to be initialed by
representatives of the Purchaser attending bid opening in the
manner specified in the BDS. The Purchaser shall neither

discuss the merits of any bid nor reject any bid (except for late
bids, in accordance with ITB 25.1).
25.4. The Purchaser shall prepare a record of the bid opening that shall
include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder and whether there
is a withdrawal, substitution, or modification; the Bid Price, per
lot (contract) if applicable, including any discounts, and
alternative bids; and the presence or absence of a Bid Security, if
one was required. The Bidders’ representatives who are present
shall be requested to sign the record. The omission of a Bidder’s
signature on the record shall not invalidate the contents and
effect of the record. A copy of the record shall be distributed to
all Bidders.
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

26. Confidentiality 26.1 Information relating to the evaluation of bids and
recommendation of contract award, shall not be disclosed to
bidders or any other persons not officially concerned with the
bidding process until information on Contract Award is
communication to all Bidders in accordance with ITB 40.
26.2 Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Purchaser in the
evaluation or contract award decisions may result in the rejection
of its Bid.
26.3 Notwithstanding ITB 26.2, from the time of bid opening to the
time of Contract Award, if any Bidder wishes to contact the
Purchaser on any matter related to the bidding process, it should
do so in writing.
27. Clarification of 27.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, comparison of the bids,
Bids and qualification of the Bidders, the Purchaser may, at its
discretion, ask any Bidder for a clarification of its Bid. Any
clarification submitted by a Bidder in respect to its Bid and that
is not in response to a request by the Purchaser shall not be
considered. The Purchaser’s request for clarification and the
response shall be in writing. No change, including any voluntary
increase or decrease, in the prices or substance of the Bid shall
be sought, offered, or permitted, except to confirm the correction
of arithmetic errors discovered by the Purchaser in the
Evaluation of the bids, in accordance with ITB 31.
27.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its bid by the date
and time set in the Purchaser’s request for clarification, its bid
may be rejected.
28. Deviations, 28.1 During the evaluation of bids, the following definitions apply:
Reservations,
and Omissions (a) “Deviation” is a departure from the requirements specified in
the Bidding Documents;
(b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or
withholding from complete acceptance of the requirements
specified in the Bidding Documents; and
(c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the
information or documentation required in the Bidding
Documents
29. Determination 29.1 The Purchaser’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness is to be

of based on the contents of the bid itself, as defined in ITB 11.
Responsiveness
29.2 A substantially responsive Bid is one that meets the requirements
of the Bidding Documents without material deviation,
reservation, or omission. A material deviation, reservation, or
omission is one that:
(a) if accepted, would
(i) affect in any substantial way the scope, quality, or
performance of the Goods and Related Services
specified in the Contract; or
(ii) limit in any substantial way, inconsistent with the
Bidding Documents, the Purchaser’s rights or the
Bidder’s obligations under the Contract; or

(b) if rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive position
of other bidders presenting substantially responsive bids.
29.3 The Purchaser shall examine the technical aspects of the bid
submitted in accordance with ITB 16 and ITB 17, in particular, to
confirm that all requirements of Section VII, Schedule of
Requirements have been met without any material deviation or
reservation, or omission.
29.4 If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of
Bidding Documents, it shall be rejected by the Purchaser and
may not subsequently be made responsive by correction of the
material deviation, reservation, or omission.
30. Nonconformi- 30.1 Provided that a Bid is substantially responsive, the Purchaser
ties, Errors and may waive any nonconformities in the Bid.
Omissions
30.2 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Purchaser may
request that the Bidder submit the necessary information or
documentation, within a reasonable period of time, to rectify
nonmaterial nonconformities or omissions in the bid related to
documentation requirements. Such omission shall not be related
to any aspect of the price of the Bid. Failure of the Bidder to
comply with the request may result in the rejection of its Bid.
30.3 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Purchaser shall
rectify quantifiable nonmaterial nonconformities related to the Bid
Price. To this effect, the Bid Price shall be adjusted, for comparison
purposes only, to reflect the price of a missing or non-conforming
item or component.
31. Correction of 31.1 Provided that the Bid is substantially responsive, the Purchaser
Arithmetical shall correct arithmetical errors on the following basis:
Errors
(a) if there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the line
item total that is obtained by multiplying the unit price by
the quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the line item
total shall be corrected, unless in the opinion of the
Purchaser there is an obvious misplacement of the decimal
point in the unit price, in which case the line item total as
quoted shall govern and the unit price shall be corrected;
(b) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition
or subtraction of subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and
the total shall be corrected; and
(c) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the
amount in words shall prevail, unless the amount expressed
in words is related to an arithmetic error, in which case the

amount in figures shall prevail subject to (a) and (b) above.
31.2 Bidders shall be requested to accept correction of arithmetical
errors. Failure to accept the correction in accordance with ITB 31.1,
shall result in the rejection of the Bid.
32. Conversion to 32.1 For evaluation and comparison purposes, the currency(ies) of the
Single Currency Bid shall be converted in a single currency as specified in the
BDS.
33. Margin of 33.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, a margin of preference
Preference shall not apply.
34. Evaluation of 34.1 The Purchaser shall use the criteria and methodologies listed in
Bids this Clause. No other evaluation criteria or methodologies shall
be permitted.
34.2 To evaluate a Bid, the Purchaser shall consider the following:
(a) evaluation will be done for Items or Lots (contracts), as
specified in the BDS; and the Bid Price as quoted in
accordance with clause 14;
(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetic errors in
accordance with ITB 31.1;
(c) price adjustment due to discounts offered in accordance
with ITB 14.3;
(d) converting the amount resulting from applying (a) to (c)
above, if relevant, to a single currency in accordance with
ITB 32;
(e) price adjustment due to quantifiable nonmaterial
nonconformities in accordance with ITB 30.3;
(f) the additional evaluation factors are specified in Section
III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria;
34.3 The estimated effect of the price adjustment provisions of the
Conditions of Contract, applied over the period of execution of the
Contract, shall not be taken into account in bid evaluation.
34.4 If these Bidding Documents allows Bidders to quote separate prices
for different lots (contracts), the methodology to determine the
lowest evaluated price of the lot (contract) combinations, including
any discounts offered in the Letter of Bid Form, is specified in
Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
34.5 The Purchaser’s evaluation of a bid will exclude and not take
into account:
(a) in the case of Goods manufactured in the Purchaser’s
Country, sales and other similar taxes, which will be
payable on the goods if a contract is awarded to the Bidder;
(b) in the case of Goods manufactured outside the Purchaser’s
Country, already imported or to be imported, customs
duties and other import taxes levied on the imported Good,
sales and other similar taxes, which will be payable on the
Goods if the contract is awarded to the Bidder;
(c) any allowance for price adjustment during the period of
execution of the contract, if provided in the bid.
34.6 The Purchaser’s evaluation of a bid may require the
consideration of other factors, in addition to the Bid Price quoted
in accordance with ITB 14. These factors may be related to the
characteristics, performance, and terms and conditions of
purchase of the Goods and Related Services. The effect of the
factors selected, if any, shall be expressed in monetary terms to
facilitate comparison of bids, unless otherwise specified in the
BDS from amongst those set out in Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria. The criteria and methodologies to be used
shall be as specified in ITB 34.2 (f).
35. Comparison of 35.1 The Purchaser shall compare the evaluated prices of all
Bids substantially responsive bids established in accordance with ITB
34.2 to determine the lowest evaluated bid. The comparison shall
be on the basis of CIP (place of final destination) prices for
imported goods and EXW prices, plus cost of inland
transportation and insurance to place of destination, for goods
manufactured within the Borrower’s country, together with
prices for any required installation, training, commissioning and
other services. The evaluation of prices shall not take into
account custom duties and other taxes levied on imported goods
quoted CIP and sales and similar taxes levied in connection with
the sale or delivery of goods.
36. Qualification of 36.1 The Purchaser shall determine to its satisfaction whether the
the Bidder Bidder that is selected as having submitted the lowest evaluated
and substantially responsive bid meets the qualifying criteria
specified in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria.
36.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the
documentary evidence of the Bidder’s qualifications submitted
by the Bidder, pursuant to ITB 17.
36.3 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for award of

the Contract to the Bidder. A negative determination shall result
in disqualification of the bid, in which event the Purchaser shall
proceed to the next lowest evaluated bid to make a similar
determination of that Bidder’s qualifications to perform
satisfactorily.
37. Purchaser’s 37.1 The Purchaser reserves the right to accept or reject any bid, and
Right to Accept to annul the bidding process and reject all bids at any time prior
Any Bid, and to to contract award, without thereby incurring any liability to
Reject Any or Bidders. In case of annulment, all bids submitted and specifically,
All Bids bid securities, shall be promptly returned to the Bidders.
F. Award of Contract
38. Award Criteria 38.1 Subject to ITB 37.1, the Purchaser shall award the Contract to
the Bidder whose bid has been determined to be the lowest
evaluated bid and is substantially responsive to the Bidding
Documents, provided further that the Bidder is determined to be
qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
39. Purchaser’s 39.1 At the time the Contract is awarded, the Purchaser reserves the
Right to Vary right to increase or decrease the quantity of Goods and Related
Quantities at Services originally specified in Section VII, Schedule of
Time of Award Requirements, provided this does not exceed the percentages
specified in the BDS, and without any change in the unit prices
or other terms and conditions of the bid and the Bidding
Documents.
40. Notification of 40.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the Purchaser
Award shall notify the successful Bidder, in writing, that its Bid has
been accepted. The notification letter (hereinafter and in the
Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms called the “Letter of
Acceptance”) shall specify the sum that the Purchaser will pay the
Supplier in consideration of the supply of Goods (hereinafter and in
the Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms called “the Contract
Price”). At the same time, the Purchaser shall also notify all other
Bidders of the results of the bidding and shall publish in UNDB
online the results identifying the bid and lot (contract) numbers and
the following information:
(i) name of each Bidder who submitted a Bid;
(ii) bid prices as read out at Bid Opening;
(iii) name and evaluated prices of each Bid that was evaluated;
(iv) name of bidders whose bids were rejected and the reasons for
their rejection; and
(v) name of the successful Bidder, and the Price it offered, as well
as the duration and summary scope of the contract awarded.
40.2 Until a formal Contract is prepared and executed, the notification

of award shall constitute a binding Contract.
40.3 The Purchaser shall promptly respond in writing to any
unsuccessful Bidder who, after notification of award in
accordance with ITB 40.1, requests in writing the grounds on
which its bid was not selected.
41. Signing of 41.1 Promptly after notification, the Purchaser shall send the
Contract successful Bidder the Contract Agreement.
41.2 Within twenty-eight (28) days of receipt of the Contract
Agreement, the successful Bidder shall sign, date, and return it to
the Purchaser.
41.3 Notwithstanding ITB 41.2 above, in case signing of the Contract
Agreement is prevented by any export restrictions attributable to the
Purchaser, to the country of the Purchaser, or to the use of the
products/goods, systems or services to be supplied, where such
export restrictions arise from trade regulations from a country
supplying those products/goods, systems or services, the Bidder
shall not be bound by its bid, always provided however, that the
Bidder can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Purchaser and of
the Bank that signing of the Contact Agreement has not been
prevented by any lack of diligence on the part of the Bidder in
completing any formalities, including applying for permits,
authorizations and licenses necessary for the export of the
products/goods, systems or services under the terms of the Contract.
42. Performance 42.1 Within twenty-eight (28) days of the receipt of notification of
Security award from the Purchaser, the successful Bidder, if required,
shall furnish the Performance Security in accordance with the
GCC, subject to ITB 34.5, using for that purpose the
Performance Security Form included in Section X, Contract
Forms, or another Form acceptable to the Purchaser. If the
Performance Security furnished by the successful Bidder is in the
form of a bond, it shall be issued by a bonding or insurance
company that has been determined by the successful Bidder to be
acceptable to the Purchaser. A foreign institution providing a bond
shall have a correspondent financial institution located in the
Purchaser’s Country.
42.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above-mentioned
Performance Security or sign the Contract shall constitute
sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture

of the Bid Security. In that event the Purchaser may award the
Contract to the next lowest evaluated Bidder, whose bid is
substantially responsive and is determined by the Purchaser to be
qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
29
Section II. Bid Data Sheet (BDS)

The following specific data for the goods to be procured shall complement, supplement, or
amend the provisions in the Instructions to Bidders (ITB). Whenever there is a conflict, the
provisions herein shall prevail over those in ITB.
ITB Clause A. General

Reference
ITB 1.1 The reference number of the Invitation for Bids is : UETCL/SUPLS/20-
21/00036/1
ITB 1.1 The Purchaser is: Uganda Electricity Transmission Company Limited
(UETCL)
ITB 1.1 The name of the ICB is: Supply, Delivery, Testing and Commissioning
of two (2) Mobile Substations 25MVA-132/33&11 kV and related
accessories (Retender).
The identification number of the ICB is: UETCL/SUPLS/20-21/00036/1
The number and identification of lots (contracts) comprising this RFB
Open International is: One (1) Contract.
ITB 2.1 The Borrower is: The Government of Uganda (GoU)
ITB 2.1 Loan or Financing Agreement amount: US$ 100,000,000

ITB 2.1 The name of the Project is: Grid Expansion and Reinforcement Project
(GERP)
IITB 4.4 A list of debarred firms and individuals is available on the Bank’s external
website: http://www.worldbank.org/debarr.
B. Contents of Bidding Documents
ITB 7.1 For Clarification of Bid purposes only, the Purchaser’s address is:
Attention: Manager, Procurement and Disposal

Address: Uganda Electricity Transmission Company Ltd
Street : Plot No. 12 Hannington Rd, UETCL Annex Building, Floor
No.2
City : Kampala
Country: Uganda
Telephone: +256-41233433/4
Facsimile number: +256-41-341789
Electronic mail address: procurement@uetcl.com
Requests for clarification should be received by the Purchaser no later
30 Section II Bid Data Sheet
than: 14 days, prior to the deadline for submission of Bids.

Responses to any request for clarification, if any, will be published on
UETCL website: www.uetcl.co.ug
ITB 7.1 A Pre-Bid meeting shall take place at the following date, time and
place:
Date: 2nd September, 2022
Time: 10:00hrs
Place: Board Room (5th Level), Plot No. 12 Hannington Rd,
Kampala.
Bidders will have an option to join the meeting virtually. A meeting
link shall be shared with all the bidders that will have been issued
with the bidding document at the time of the pre-bid meeting
C. Preparation of Bids
ITB 10.1 The language of the bid is: English

All correspondence exchange shall be in English language.
Language for translation of supporting documents and printed literature is
English.
The Bidder shall submit the following additional documents in its bid:
ITB 11.1 (j)
1. Certificate of Incorporation or equivalent
2. Copy of valid Income Tax Clearance Certificate or equivalent
3. Copy of Form for the list of directors of the company
4. Copy of Trading License valid for year 2022 or equivalent
5. Manufacturers Authorization Letters for all major items of supply
that the Bidder did not manufacture
6. A copy of type test reports for the power transformer and
switchgear. The type tests shall have been carried out by an
internationally accredited testing laboratory independent from the
manufacturer or with the witness of independent laboratory. The
type tests shall have been carried out within the last 5 years.
7. All Technical Schedules with detailed information of offered
materials and equipment, which is required in terms of the
Purchaser’s Requirements.
8. Documentary evidence showing that the Bidder meets all the
requirements specified in Section III of the Evaluation Criteria
9. Documentary evidence showing that the manufacturers of the main
equipment have an ISO 9001 Certification or Equivalent quality
assurance certificate issued by an internationally recognized
certification agency.
10. Copies of Audited Books of Accounts for the last three financial
Section II Bid Data Sheet 31
years (2019, 2020 & 2021) in proof of turnover.

11. For contracts cited as specific experience, the Bidder shall include
in its bid completion certificates/letters and the contact information
including telephone No. email address and physical location of
previous employers. All the contact details provided must be
reachable. Failure to reach any previous employer may result in
non-responsive bid.
12. Copy of Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Power Transformer
and switchgear.
13. General design drawings of the entire substation and other technical
documents such as catalogues, brochures of each major substation
equipment.
ITB 13.1 Alternative Bids shall not be considered.
ITB 14.5 The prices quoted by the Bidder shall not be subject to adjustment during
the performance of the Contract.
ITB 14.6 Prices quoted shall correspond to 100% of the items and quantities
specified in this bidding document.
ITB 14.7 The Incoterms edition is: “Incoterms 2000 — ICC Official Rules for the
Interpretation of Trade Terms” published in September 1999 by the
International Chamber of Commerce, 38 Cours Albert 1er, 75008
Paris, France”.
ITB 14.8 (b) Place of Destination: Gulu Substation , & UETCL Stores Lugogo
(i) and (c) (v) Uganda as specified in the list of goods and delivery schedule.
ITB 14.8 (a) Final destination (Project Site): Gulu Substation , & UETCL Stores
(iii);(b)(ii) Lugogo Uganda as specified in the list of goods and delivery schedule.
and (c)(v)
ITB 15.1 The prices shall be quoted by the bidder in: United States Dollars
The Bidder is required to quote in the currency of the Purchaser’s Country
the portion of the bid price that corresponds to expenditures incurred in
that currency.
ITB 16.4 Period of time the Goods are expected to be functioning for the purpose of
spare parts: Five (05) years.
Manufacturer’s authorization is: Required for all major items of supply
ITB 17.2 (a)
that the Bidder did not manufacture.
ITB 17.2 (b) After sales service is: required
ITB 18.1 The bid validity period: 120 calendar days from the bid submission
deadline.
ITB 18.3 (a) The bid price shall be adjusted by the following factor(s): NONE
ITB 19.1 A Bid Security shall be required.

Bid shall include a bid security issued by a reputable bank in the form
provided in this bidding document. The amount of the bid security shall
be for: USD 54,000.
The bid security shall be valid for a period of: 28 days beyond the
original date of expiry of Bid validity period.
ITB 19.3 (d) Other types of acceptable securities: NONE
Section II Bid Data Sheet 33
TB 19.9 NOT APPLICABLE

ITB 20.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: THREE and
one electronic copy of price schedule and technical data sheets in
editable EXCEL 2003 or 2007 format on CD or flash disk (the
technical data sheet may be in MS word or pdf format). However, in
case of discrepancies, the “ORIGINAL” hardcopy shall take
precedence over the electronic copy.
ITB 20.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder
shall consist of: A Duly commissioned and Registered Power of
Attorney for local bidders and a Notarized Power of Attorney for
international bidders
D. Submission and Opening of Bids
ITB 22.1 For Bid submission purposes only, the Purchaser’s address is:
Attention: Manager, Procurement and Disposal Department
Uganda Electricity Transmission Company Ltd
Street Address: Plot No. 12 Hannington Road, UETCL Annex
Building, Floor No 2. Committee Room
City: Kampala,
Country: Uganda
The deadline for bid submission is:
Date: 19th October, 2022
Time: 11:00 Hrs.
Bidders shall have the option of submitting their bids electronically.

Bidders that wish to use this option should inform UETCL and provide an
email on which a link will be sent. UETCL shall provide a link to these
bidders to upload their Bids. All uploaded bids MUST be password
protected. The bidder shall disclose the password to the UETCL’s Head
PDU on the date and time of deadline for bid submission. The email for
this purpose shall also be availed to these Bidders at the time when UETCL
is sending the link.
Important Note:
If the Bidder uses the electronic option, the bidder shall send the
original bid as per ITB 22 for purchaser’s record as per address
given in above
ITB 25.1 The bid opening shall take place at:

Street Address: UETCL Office, Plot No. 12 Hannington Rd, UETCL
Annex Building
City: Kampala
Country: Uganda
Date: 19th October, 2022
Time: 11:15 Hrs.
The electronic bidding opening procedures shall be:

Bids will be opened virtually on the date and time for bid opening
specified above. The virtual address and password will be provided to the
bidders that will have submitted their bids.
ITB 25.3 The Letter of Bid and Price Schedules shall be initialed by the
representatives of the Purchaser conducting Bid opening.
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
ITB 32.1 The currency that shall be used for bid evaluation and comparison
purposes to convert all bid prices expressed in various currencies into a
single currency is: United States Dollars (USD).
The source of exchange rate shall be: Bank of Uganda, Kampala,
and information available on website: www.bou.or.ug.
The date for the exchange rate shall be: the deadline for Bid
Submissions.
ITB 33.1 The Purchaser’s evaluation of responsive Bids will not take into account
scored technical factors, in addition to cost factors. Margin of Preference
shall not apply.
TB 34.2(a) Bids will be evaluated for each item and the Contract will comprise the
item(s) awarded to the successful Bidder
ITB 34.6 The adjustments shall be determined using the following criteria, from
amongst those set out in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria:
Not Applicable.
F. Award of Contract
ITB 39.1 The maximum percentage by which quantities of equipment accessories
may be increased is: 15%
35
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification

Criteria
Contents
1. Margin of Preference (ITB 33) ........................................................................................ 36
2. Evaluation (ITB 34) .......................................................................................................... 36
3. Qualification (ITB 36)....................................................................................................... 37

36 Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
1. Margin of Preference (ITB 33): Not Applicable
2. Evaluation (ITB 34)
2.1. Evaluation Criteria (ITB 34.6)

The Purchaser’s evaluation of a bid may take into account, in addition to the Bid Price quoted
in accordance with ITB Clause 14.8, one or more of the following factors as specified in ITB
34.2(f) and in BDS referring to ITB 34.6, using the following criteria and methodologies.
(a) Delivery schedule.
The Goods specified in the List of Goods are required to be delivered within the
acceptable time range specified in Section VII, Schedule of Requirements. No credit
will be given to deliveries before the earliest date, and Bids offering delivery after the
12 months shall be treated as nonresponsive.
(b) Deviation in payment schedule. Deviations from the Payment Schedule as
specified in SCC 16.1 are not permitted
(c) Cost of major replacement components, mandatory spare parts, and service. Not
Applicable
(d) Availability in the Purchaser’s Country of spare parts and after sales services for
equipment offered in the bid. Not Applicable
(e) Projected operating costs.
Since the operating costs of the facilities being procured form a major part
of the life cycle cost of the facilities, these costs will be evaluated according
to the principles given hereafter, and based on prices furnished by each
Bidder in Price Schedule.
The operating cost shall be in relation to the Power Transformer losses. For
the purpose of tender evaluation, the transformer losses shall be capitalized
in the following manner. Bids with losses higher than those specified
under functional guarantees shall be treated as Non-responsive.
TC = CK +NLL +LL
TC Evaluated Bid Price
CK Bid Price
NLL Cost of No Load Losses = (CFE* Total No Load Losses)
CFE 7,040 USD/KW
LL Cost of Load Losses = (CCU* Total Load Losses)
CCU 3,050 USD/kW
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria 37
Functional Guarantees of the facilities

The maximum requirements stated in the Specification for functional guarantees
required in the Specification are: (i) Functional Guarantees shall be for
transformer losses stated in the Technical Data Sheet and in the form FUNC by
the bidder.
The maximum allowable losses for the transformers are specified in the technical
specifications and tabulated below. Bids with loses higher than those specified in
the table would be treated as Non-responsive.
No Load Losses Load Losses Auxiliary

Description
(kW) (kW) Losses (kW)
132/33-11 kV (25 MVA) 25 300 10
 Penalties. The tolerance permitted is +10% of the total guaranteed losses; being the
total of the load and no load losses excluding cooling system consumption. Any
transformer with losses more than +10% of the total guaranteed losses will be
rejected. For transformers where the total losses up to 110% of the total guaranteed
losses, the contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the difference between the
total losses and the 100% of the total guaranteed losses according to the following
calculation:
 Total penalty (USD) = [(Measured NLL– Guaranteed NNL) KW x CFE + (Measured

LL – Guaranteed LL) kW x CCU]
(f) Performance and productivity of the equipment. Not Applicable
3. Qualification (ITB 36)
3.1 Post qualification Requirements (ITB 36.1)

After determining the lowest-evaluated bid in accordance with ITB 35.1, the Purchaser shall
carry out the post qualification of the Bidder in accordance with ITB 36, using only the
requirements specified. Requirements not included in the text below shall not be used in the
evaluation of the Bidder’s qualifications.
(a) If Bidder is Manufacturer:
(i) Financial Capability
The Bidder shall furnish documentary evidence that it meets the following
financial requirements.
Historical Financial Performance

Criteria Compliance Requirements Documents
Joint Venture
Submission
Requirement Single Entity All Partners Each One Requirements
Combined Partner Partner
Submission of audited financial must meet not must meet not  Audited
statements or, if not required by requirement applicable requirement applicable Financial
the law of the Bidder’s country, Accounts for
other financial statements the last three
acceptable to the Purchaser, for the years (2021,
last 3 years to demonstrate the 2020 and
current soundness of the Bidder’s 2019)
financial position. As a minimum,
the Bidder’s net worth for the last
year calculated as the difference
between total assets and total
liabilities should be positive.
Average Annual Turnover

Joint Venture
Submission
Minimum average annual must meet must meet must meet must meet  Audited
turnover of $ 10,000,000 requirement requirement at least 40% Financial
calculated as total sales received 25% Accounts for
of the
by the Bidder for contracts the last three
of the requirement
completed or under execution years (2021,
requirement
over the last 3 years. 2020, &
2019)
(ii) Experience and Technical Capacity

The Bidder shall furnish documentary evidence to demonstrate that it meets the following
experience requirement(s)
Joint Venture
Submission
Successful completion as must meet must meet not must meet  Extract of contract
main supplier within the last requirement requirement applicable the executed
Ten (10) years, of at least two requirement  Certificate of
(2) contracts each valued at completion/Operat
USD 2,800,000 with nature, ional Acceptance
and complexity similar to the issued by client
scope of supply described in
Section VII (Schedule of
Requirements).
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria 39
For all contracts listed under experience, the Bidder shall indicate the final beneficiary and
location of the supplied mobile substation to enable physical inspection and verification.
(iii) Documentary Evidence

Joint Venture
Submission
The Bidder shall demonstrate that: must meet must meet not must meet Technical
(a) the goods offered have requirement requirement applicable requirement Manuals
been in production for at Customer
least 5 years references
(b) The Bidder has
Certificates
successfully completed as
of completion
main supplier of goods at
least two (2) contracts of at
least the scope of supply
and complexity comparable
to the proposed contract,
over a Ten-year period
ending on the deadline for
this bid submission”
(c) The goods have been in
operation for a minimum of
5 years from the date of
commissioning.
Documentary Evidence to confirm experience and technical capability
(i) Has a valid ISO 9001 Certificate or equivalent Quality Assurance Certification.
(ii) The Bidder must include in its bid names and contact numbers of previous clients and
an official letter from each client certifying that the sold goods similar to the goods
object of this bidding process are still in good operating conditions (at least one).
(iii) Copies of Type Test Reports and technical documents (catalogues, brochures,
drawings) of each major item offered shall form part of the bid. Copies of Type Test
Reports shall meet the following requirements:
• Type Test Reports shall be carried out by a laboratory independent from the
manufacturer or with the witness of independent laboratory. Accreditation
certificate for the testing laboratory shall also be submitted with the bid.
• Results of type test shall have been conducted at least five (5) years prior to the
date of tender submission. The bidder shall submit contact details (Title, email,
and fax) of the testing laboratory.
• Testing materials and equipment in Type Test Reports shall have the same code/
country / manufacturer and technical parameters as offered materials and
equipment. Type tests of non-conforming materials/equipment shall not be
accepted.
• Type Test Reports shall include all items tested and results confirming that they
meet the requirements of applied standards as stipulated in Tender Documents.
(b) If Bidder is not manufacturer:
If a Bidder is not a manufacturer, but is offering the Goods on behalf of the

Manufacturer under Manufacturer's Authorization Form (Section IV, Bidding
Forms), the Manufacturer shall demonstrate the above qualifications (i), (ii), (iii)
and the Bidder shall demonstrate that it has successfully completed at least 2
contracts in the past Seven (7) years. It is the Bidder’s responsibility to ensure
that these requirements are met & demonstrated.
41
Section IV. Bidding Forms

Table of Forms
Letter of Bid ............................................................................................................................ 42
Bidder Information Form ........................................................................................................ 45
Bidder’s JV Members Information Form ............................................................................... 46
Price Schedule: Goods Manufactured Outside the Purchaser’s Country, to be Imported ...... 48
Price Schedule: Goods Manufactured Outside the Purchaser’s Country, already imported .. 49
Price Schedule: Goods Manufactured in the Purchaser’s Country ......................................... 50
Price and Completion Schedule - Related Services ................................................................ 51
Form of Bid Security .............................................................................................................. 52
Manufacturer’s Authorization ................................................................................................. 54

42 Section IV Bidding Forms
Letter of Bid
The Bidder must prepare the Letter of Bid on stationery with its letterhead clearly showing the
Bidder’s complete name and address.
Note: All italicized text is for use in preparing these form and shall be deleted from the final
products.
Date: [insert date (as day, month and year) of Bid Submission]
ICB No.: [insert number of bidding process]
Invitation for Bid No.: [insert identification]
Alternative No.: [insert identification No if this is a Bid for an alternative]
To: [insert complete name of Purchaser]
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including
Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB 8) ;
(b) We meet the eligibility requirements and have no conflict of interest in accordance with
ITB 4;
(c) We have not been suspended nor declared ineligible by the Purchaser based on execution
of a Bid Securing Declaration in the Purchaser’s country in accordance with ITB 4.6
(d) We offer to supply in conformity with the Bidding Documents and in accordance with the
Delivery Schedules specified in the Schedule of Requirements the following Goods:
[insert a brief description of the Goods and Related Services];
(e) The total price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (f) below is:
In case of only one lot, total price of the Bid [insert the total price of the bid in words
and figures, indicating the various amounts and the respective currencies];
In case of multiple lots, total price of each lot [insert the total price of each lot in words
and figures, indicating the various amounts and the respective currencies];
In case of multiple lots, total price of all lots (sum of all lots) [insert the total price of all
lots in words and figures, indicating the various amounts and the respective
currencies];
(f) The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are:
(i) The discounts offered are: [Specify in detail each discount offered.]
Section IV Bidding Forms 43 43
(ii) The exact method of calculations to determine the net price after application of
discounts is shown below: [Specify in detail the method that shall be used to
apply the discounts];
(g) Our bid shall be valid for a period of [specify the number of calendar days] days from the date
fixed for the bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall
remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;
(h) If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with the
Bidding Documents;
(i) We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a subcontractor, in more than one bid in this bidding
process in accordance with ITB 4.2(e), other than alternative bids submitted in accordance with
ITB 13;
(j) We, along with any of our subcontractors, suppliers, consultants, manufacturers, or service
providers for any part of the contract, are not subject to, and not controlled by any entity or
individual that is subject to, a temporary suspension or a debarment imposed by a member of the
World Bank Group or a debarment imposed by the World Bank Group in accordance with the
Agreement for Mutual Enforcement of Debarment Decisions between the World Bank and other
development banks. Further, we are not ineligible under the Purchaser’s country laws or official
regulations or pursuant to a decision of the United Nations Security Council;
(k) We are not a government owned entity/ We are a government owned entity but meet the
requirements of ITB 4.5;1
(l) We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to the
bidding process or execution of the Contract: [insert complete name of each Recipient, its full
address, the reason for which each commission or gratuity was paid and the amount and
currency of each such commission or gratuity]
Name of Recipient Address Reason Amount
(If none has been paid or is to be paid, indicate “none.”)
(m) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in your
notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal contract is
prepared and executed; and
1
Bidder to use as appropriate
(n) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid that
you may receive.
(o) We hereby certify that we have taken steps to ensure that no person acting for us or on our
behalf will engage in any type of fraud and corruption
Name of the Bidder* [insert complete name of person signing the Bid]
Name of the person duly authorized to sign the Bid on behalf of the Bidder** [insert
complete name of person duly authorized to sign the Bid]
Title of the person signing the Bid [insert complete title of the person signing the
Bid]
Signature of the person named above [insert signature of person whose name and
capacity are shown above]
Date signed [insert date of signing] day of [insert month], [insert year]
*: In the case of the Bid submitted by joint venture specify the name of the Joint
Venture as Bidder
**: Person signing the Bid shall have the power of attorney given by the Bidder to be
attached with the Bid Schedules.
Bidder Information Form

[The Bidder shall fill in this Form in accordance with the instructions indicated below. No alterations
to its format shall be permitted and no substitutions shall be accepted.]
Page ________ of_ ______ pages
1. Bidder’s Name [insert Bidder’s legal name]
2. In case of JV, legal name of each member : [insert legal name of each member in JV]
3. Bidder’s actual or intended country of registration: [insert actual or intended country of

registration]
4. Bidder’s year of registration: [insert Bidder’s year of registration]
5. Bidder’s Address in country of registration: [insert Bidder’s legal address in country of

registration]
6. Bidder’s Authorized Representative Information

Name: [insert Authorized Representative’s name]
Address: [insert Authorized Representative’s Address]
Telephone/Fax numbers: [insert Authorized Representative’s telephone/fax numbers]
Email Address: [insert Authorized Representative’s email address]
7. Attached are copies of original documents of [check the box(es) of the attached
original documents]
 Articles of Incorporation (or equivalent documents of constitution or association), and/or
documents of registration of the legal entity named above, in accordance with ITB 4.3.
 In case of JV, letter of intent to form JV or JV agreement, in accordance with ITB 4.1.
 In case of Government-owned enterprise or institution, in accordance with ITB 4.5
documents establishing:
 Legal and financial autonomy
 Operation under commercial law
 Establishing that the Bidder is not dependent agency of the Purchaser
8. Included are the organizational chart, a list of Board of Directors, and the beneficial
ownership.
Bidder’s JV Members Information Form
[The Bidder shall fill in this Form in accordance with the instructions indicated below. The following
table shall be filled in for the Bidder and for each member of a Joint Venture]].
Page ________ of_ ______ pages
1. Bidder’s Name: [insert Bidder’s legal name]
2. Bidder’s JV Member’s name: [insert JV’s Member legal name]
3. Bidder’s JV Member’s country of registration: [insert JV’s Member country of

registration]
4. Bidder’s JV Member’s year of registration: [insert JV’s Member year of registration]
5. Bidder’s JV Member’s legal address in country of registration: [insert JV’s Member

legal address in country of registration]
6. Bidder’s JV Member’s authorized representative information

Name: [insert name of JV’s Member authorized representative]
Address: [insert address of JV’s Member authorized representative]
Telephone/Fax numbers: [insert telephone/fax numbers of JV’s Member authorized
representative]
Email Address: [insert email address of JV’s Member authorized representative]
7. Attached are copies of original documents of [check the box(es) of the attached original
documents]
 Articles of Incorporation (or equivalent documents of constitution or association), and/or
registration documents of the legal entity named above, in accordance with ITB 4.3.
 In case of a Government-owned enterprise or institution, documents establishing legal and
financial autonomy, operation in accordance with commercial law, and absence of dependent
status, in accordance with ITB 4.5.
8. Included are the organizational chart, a list of Board of Directors, and the beneficial ownership.
Price Schedule Forms

[The Bidder shall fill in these Price Schedule Forms in accordance with the instructions indicated.
The list of line items in column 1 of the Price Schedules shall coincide with the List of Goods and
Related Services specified by the Purchaser in the Schedule of Requirements.]
Section IV Bidding Forms 48
Price Schedule: Goods Manufactured Outside the Purchaser’s Country, to be

Imported
Date: _________________________
(Group C bids, goods to be imported) ICB No: _____________________
Alternative No: ________________

Currencies in accordance with ITB 15
Page N ______ of ______
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Line Description of Goods Country of Delivery Quantity and Unit price CIP Price per line Price per line item for Total Price per Line item
Item Origin Date as physical unit CIP [insert place of item inland transportation and (Col. 7+8)
N defined by destination] (Col. 5x6) other services required in
Incoterms in accordance with ITB the Purchaser’s country to
14.8(b)(i) convey the Goods to their
final destination specified
in BDS
[insert [insert name of good] [insert [insert [insert number [insert unit price CIP [insert total CIP [insert the corresponding [insert total price of the line item]
number country of quoted of units to be per unit] price per line item] price per line item]
of the origin of the Delivery supplied and
item] Good] Date] name of the
physical unit]
Total Price
Name of Bidder [insert complete name of Bidder] Signature of Bidder [signature of person signing the Bid] Date [Insert Date]
Price Schedule: Goods Manufactured Outside the Purchaser’s Country, already imported
Date: _________________________
(Group C bids, Goods already imported) ICB No: _____________________
Currencies in accordance with ITB 15 Page N ______ of ______
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Line Item Description of Goods Country of Delivery Quantity Unit price Custom Duties Unit Price net Price per line Price per line item Sales and other Total Price per line
N Origin Date as and including and Import Taxes of custom item net of for inland taxes paid or item
defined by physical Custom Duties paid per unit in duties and Custom Duties transportation and payable per item (Col. 9+10)
Incoterms unit and Import accordance with import taxes, in and Import other services if Contract is
Taxes paid, in ITB 14.8(c)(ii) , accordance Taxes paid, in required in the awarded (in
accordance [to be supported with ITB 148 accordance with Purchaser’s country accordance with
with ITB by documents] (c) (iii) ITB 14.8(c)(i) to convey the goods ITB 14.8(c)(iv)
14.8(c)(i) (Col. 6 minus (Col. 58) to their final
Col.7) destination, as
specified in BDS in
accordance with
ITB 14.8 (c)(v)
[insert [insert name of [insert [insert [insert [insert unit [insert custom [insert unit [ insert price [insert price per [insert sales and [insert total price per
number of Goods] country of quoted number of price per unit] duties and taxes price net of per line item net line item for inland other taxes line item]
the item] origin of Delivery units to be paid per unit] custom duties of custom duties transportation and payable per item
the Good] Date] supplied and import and import other services if Contract is
and name taxes] taxes] required in the awarded]
of the Purchaser’s
physical country]
unit]
Total Bid Price
Name of Bidder [insert complete name of Bidder] Signature of Bidder [signature of person signing the Bid] Date [insert date]
* [For previously imported Goods, the quoted price shall be distinguishable from the original import value of these Goods declared to customs and shall include
any rebate or mark-up of the local agent or representative and all local costs except import duties and taxes, which have been and/or have to be paid by the
Purchaser. For clarity the bidders are asked to quote the price including import duties, and additionally to provide the import duties and the price net of import
duties which is the difference of those values.]
Price Schedule: Goods Manufactured in the Purchaser’s Country

Date: _________________________
Purchaser’s Country (Group A and B bids) ICB No: _____________________
______________________ Page N ______ of ______
Currencies in accordance with ITB 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Line Description of Goods Delivery Date Quantity Unit price Total EXW Price per line item for Cost of local labor, Sales and other taxes payable Total Price per
Item as defined by and EXW price per line inland transportation and raw materials and per line item if Contract is line item
N Incoterms physical item other services required in components from awarded (in accordance with (Col. 6+7)
unit (Col. 45) the Purchaser’s Country to with origin in the ITB 14.8(a)(ii)
convey the Goods to their Purchaser’s Country
final destination % of Col. 5
[insert [insert name of Good] [insert quoted [insert [insert EXW [insert total [insert the corresponding [Insert cost of local [insert sales and other taxes [insert total
number Delivery number of unit price] EXW price per price per line item] labor, raw material payable per line item if price per item]
of the Date] units to line item] and components Contract is awarded]
item] be from within the
supplied Purchase’s country
and name as a % of the EXW
of the price per line item]
physical
unit]
Total Price
Price and Completion Schedule - Related Services

Date: _________________________
Currencies in accordance with ITB 15 ICB No: _____________________
Page N ______ of ______
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Service Description of Services (excludes inland transportation Country of Delivery Date at place Quantity and physical unit Unit price Total Price per Service
N and other services required in the Purchaser’s country Origin of Final destination (Col. 5*6 or estimate)
to convey the goods to their final destination)
[insert [insert name of Services] [insert country [insert delivery date at [insert number of units to be supplied and [insert unit price per [insert total price per
number of of origin of the place of final name of the physical unit] item] item]
the Services] destination per Service]
Service ]
Total Bid Price

Form of Bid Security

(Bank Guarantee)
[The bank shall fill in this Bank Guarantee Form in accordance with the instructions
indicated.]
[Guarantor letterhead or SWIFT identifier code]
Beneficiary: [Purchaser to insert its name and address]
IFB No.: [Purchaser to insert reference number for the Invitation for Bids]
Alternative No.: [Insert identification No if this is a Bid for an alternative]
Date: [Insert date of issue]
BID GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
Guarantor: [Insert name and address of place of issue, unless indicated in the letterhead]
We have been informed that ______ [insert name of the Bidder, which in the case of a joint
venture shall be the name of the joint venture (whether legally constituted or prospective) or
the names of all members thereof] (hereinafter called "the Applicant") has submitted or will
submit to the Beneficiary its bid (hereinafter called "the Bid") for the execution of
________________ under Invitation for Bids No. ___________ (“the IFB”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Beneficiary’s conditions, bids must be

supported by a bid guarantee.
At the request of the Applicant, we, as Guarantor, hereby irrevocably undertake to pay the
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of ___________
(____________) upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s complying demand, supported by
the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself or a separate signed document
accompanying or identifying the demand, stating that either the Applicant:
(a) has withdrawn its Bid during the period of bid validity set forth in the Applicant’s
Letter of Bid (“the Bid Validity Period”), or any extension thereto provided by the
Applicant; or
(b) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Beneficiary during the Bid
Validity Period or any extension thereto provided by the Applicant, (i) has failed to
execute the contract agreement, or (ii) has failed to furnish the performance security, in
accordance with the Instructions to Bidders (“ITB”) of the Beneficiary’s bidding
document.
This guarantee will expire: (a) if the Applicant is the successful bidder, upon our receipt of
copies of the contract agreement signed by the Applicant and the performance security issued
to the Beneficiary in relation to such contract agreement; or (b) if the Applicant is not the
successful bidder, upon the earlier of (i) our receipt of a copy of the Beneficiary’s
notification to the Applicant of the results of the bidding process; or (ii) twenty-eight days
after the end of the Bid Validity Period.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at the
office indicated above on or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees (URDG) 2010
Revision, ICC Publication No. 758.
_____________________________
[Signature(s)]
Note: All italicized text is for use in preparing this form and shall be deleted from the final
product.
54
Manufacturer’s Authorization
[The Bidder shall require the Manufacturer to fill in this Form in accordance with the
instructions indicated. This letter of authorization should be on the letterhead of the
Manufacturer and should be signed by a person with the proper authority to sign documents
that are binding on the Manufacturer. The Bidder shall include it in its bid, if so indicated in
the BDS.]
To: [insert complete name of Purchaser]
WHEREAS
We [insert complete name of Manufacturer], who are official manufacturers of [insert type
of goods manufactured], having factories at [insert full address of Manufacturer’s factories],
do hereby authorize [insert complete name of Bidder] to submit a bid the purpose of which is
to provide the following Goods, manufactured by us [insert name and or brief description of
the Goods], and to subsequently negotiate and sign the Contract.
We hereby extend our full guarantee and warranty in accordance with Clause 28 of the
General Conditions of Contract, with respect to the Goods offered by the above firm.
Signed: [insert signature(s) of authorized representative(s) of the Manufacturer]
Name: [insert complete name(s) of authorized representative(s) of the Manufacturer]
Title: [insert title]
Dated on ____________ day of __________________, _______ [insert date of signing]

55
Section V. Eligible Countries
Eligibility for the Provision of Goods, Works and Non Consulting Services in
Bank-Financed Procurement
In reference to ITB 4.7 and 5.1, for the information of the Bidders, at the present time firms,
goods and services from the following countries are excluded from this bidding process:
Under ITB 4.7(a) and 5.1: None
Under ITB 4.7(b) and 5.1: None

57
Section VI. Bank Policy - Corrupt and

Fraudulent Practices
Guidelines for Procurement of Goods, Works, and Non-Consulting Services under IBRD
Loans and IDA Credits & Grants by World Bank Borrowers, dated January 2011.
“Fraud and Corruption:
1.16 It is the Bank’s policy to require that Borrowers (including beneficiaries of Bank
loans), bidders, suppliers, contractors and their agents (whether declared or not), sub-
contractors, sub-consultants, service providers or suppliers, and any personnel thereof,
observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of Bank-
financed contracts.2 In pursuance of this policy, the Bank:
(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:
(i) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting, directly
or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of
another party;3;
(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation,
that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to
obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation;4
(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or more parties
designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence
improperly the actions of another party;5
(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair or
harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to
influence improperly the actions of a party;6
(v) "obstructive practice" is:
3
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the
procurement process or contract execution. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and
employees of other organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions.
4
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and
“obligation” relate to the procurement process or contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended
to influence the procurement process or contract execution.
5
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including
public officials) attempting either themselves, or through another person or entity not participating in the
procurement or selection process, to simulate competition or to establish bid prices at artificial, non-
competitive levels, or are privy to each other’s bid prices or other conditions.
6
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract
execution.
(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering, or concealing of
evidence material to the investigation or making false statements to
investigators in order to materially impede a Bank investigation
into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive
practice; and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party to
prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to the
investigation or from pursuing the investigation, or
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s
inspection and audit rights provided for under paragraph 1.16(e)
below.
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the bidder recommended for
award, or any of its personnel, or its agents, or its sub-consultants, sub-
contractors, service providers, suppliers and/or their employees, has, directly or
indirectly, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive
practices in competing for the contract in question;
(c) will declare mis-procurement and cancel the portion of the loan allocated to a
contract if it determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or of a
recipient of any part of the proceeds of the loan engaged in corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices during the procurement or the
implementation of the contract in question, without the Borrower having taken
timely and appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to address such practices
when they occur, including by failing to inform the Bank in a timely manner at
the time they knew of the practices;
(d) will sanction a firm or individual, at any time, in accordance with the prevailing
Bank’s sanctions procedures,7 including by publicly declaring such firm or
individual ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time: (i) to be
awarded a Bank-financed contract; and (ii) to be a nominated8;
(e) will require that a clause be included in bidding documents and in contracts
financed by a Bank loan, requiring bidders, suppliers and contractors, and their
sub-contractors, agents, personnel, consultants, service providers, or suppliers, to
permit the Bank to inspect all accounts, records, and other documents relating to
7
A firm or individual may be declared ineligible to be awarded a Bank financed contract upon: (i)
completion of the Bank’s sanctions proceedings as per its sanctions procedures, including, inter alia, cross-
debarment as agreed with other International Financial Institutions, including Multilateral Development
Banks, and through the application the World Bank Group corporate administrative procurement sanctions
procedures for fraud and corruption; and (ii) as a result of temporary suspension or early temporary
suspension in connection with an ongoing sanctions proceeding. See footnote 14 and paragraph 8 of
Appendix 1 of these Guidelines.
8
A nominated sub-contractor, consultant, manufacturer or supplier, or service provider (different names are
used depending on the bidding document) is one which has either been: (i) included by the bidder in its pre-
qualification application or bid because it brings specific and critical experience and know-how that allow
the bidder to meet the qualification requirements for the particular bid; or (ii) appointed by the Borrower.
Section VI. Schedule of Requirements 59
the submission of bids and contract performance, and to have them audited by
auditors appointed by the Bank.”
61
PART 2 – Supply Requirements

63
Section VII. Schedule of Requirements
Contents
1. List of Goods and Delivery Schedule ................................................................................ 64
2. List of Related Services and Completion Schedule .......................................................... 66
3. Technical Specifications ..................................................................................................... 1

64
1. List of Goods and Delivery Schedule
Line Description of Goods Quantity Physical Final Delivery (as per Incoterms) Date
Item unit (Project Site) Earliest Latest Bidder’s offered
N Destination as Delivery Delivery Delivery date
specified in BDS Date Date [to be provided by
the bidder]
1 25MVA multi-ratio mobile Two Complete Gulu Substation 8 months 12
substations Unit months
Delivery configuration shall be:
 1x25MVA 132/11kV
 1x25MVA 132/33kV
Commissioning and Decommissioning (IN and OUT of Service Test) Equipment

2 Robust Plant Maintenance One Complete Lugogo Stores 8 months 12
Laptop with software for Unit with months
Protection Relays, RTU, backup
AVR, Energy Meters, media
Onboard permanent impact
recorder (accelerometer), test
sets, etc.
3 Multifunctional diagnostic One Complete Lugogo Stores 8 months 12
testing solution (compatible Set months
with existing STS5000 and
TDX5000 platforms) for
Power Transformers and
Switchgear with Cable Sets,
Software, Heavy Duty
Transport Cases and Trolley
Section VII. Schedule of Requirements 65
4 Testing solution for Surge One Complete Lugogo Stores 8 months 12

Arrestors (compatible with Set months
existing SCAR-10 platforms)
with Current Clip-on
Transformers, Cable Sets and
Carrying Bag
5 Standalone Power One Complete Lugogo Stores 8 months 12
Transformer Online Drying Set months
System (compatible with
existing ATMoS platforms)
6 Multi-Mode Optical Fiber 50 Meter Roll Lugogo Stores 8 months 12
Cable for The Mobile Station months
66 Section VII Schedule of Requirements
2. List of Related Services and Completion Schedule

Place where Services Final Completion
Service Description of Service Quantity Physical Unit shall be performed Date(s) of Services
1 Factory Acceptance Test for the mobile 2 Persons At the place of 10 Months
substations to include transformers, control manufacture
and protection. The cost of these tests shall
be borne by the supplier.
(UETCL shall choose to attend physically,

virtually or appoint an agent to witness on
their behalf. Cost of witnessing shall be
borne by UETCL)
2 Configuration, Site Acceptance Tests, 2 Lot Project Site 12 months
commissioning, and final acceptance of the
complete plant
3 Training for all key components of the Lot 8 Persons Project site 12 months
plant, including operations and
maintenance, control, protection,
communication. To be conducted by
supplier’s experts. UETCL to provide the
venue for the training.
4 Defects Liability/Warranty Period shall be Lot 24 months
applicable and shall be 24 months for the
complete plant.
1 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
3. Technical Specifications
Specification
Table of Contents
1 Foreword .......................................................................................................................... 22
1.1. Background ..............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined.
1.2. Scope..................................................................................................................... 22
1.3. Physical Arrangement ........................................................................................ 23
1.4. Standards ............................................................................................................. 23
1.5. Normative references .......................................................................................... 24
1.6. Definitions and abbreviations ............................................................................ 25
1.6.1. Definitions ............................................................................................................ 25
1.6.2. Keywords: ............................................................................................................ 25
1.6.3. Abbreviations ...................................................................................................... 25
1.7. Warranty .......................................................................................................................... 25
1.8. Electrical Plant Design Criteria ...................................................................................... 25
1.8.1. General Conditions in Uganda .......................................................................... 25
1.8.2. Cable Box Clearances ......................................................................................... 26
1.9. Insulators and Bushings ..................................................................................... 26
1.10. Communication System ...................................................................................... 27
1.11. Control System .................................................................................................... 27
1.12. Protection System ................................................................................................ 27
1.13. Airborne Contamination .................................................................................... 27
2 Vehicle Requirements ..................................................................................................... 28
2.1 Vehicle configuration: .................................................................................................... 28
2.2 Trailer Construction:...................................................................................................... 28
2.3 AV Approvals: ................................................................................................................. 28
2.4 Trailer Dimensions: ........................................................................................................ 28
2.4.1 Length: ................................................................................................................. 28

2.4.2 Width: .................................................................................................................. 29
2.4.3 Height:.................................................................................................................. 29
2.4.4 Ground Clearance: ............................................................................................. 29
2.4.5 Trailer Goose-Neck:............................................................................................ 29
2.4.6 Kingpin and 5th wheel: ...................................................................................... 29
2.4.7 Vehicle Design Speed: ......................................................................................... 29
2.4.8 Suspension: .......................................................................................................... 29
2.4.9 Brakes: ................................................................................................................. 29
2.4.10 Leveling Gear ...................................................................................................... 30
2.4.10.1 Stabilizing Legs: .................................................................................................. 30
2.4.10.2 Level Indicators: ................................................................................................. 30
2.4.11 Tool-box and Spare Wheels ............................................................................... 30
2.4.12 Storage for Supervisory Mast: ........................................................................... 30
2.4.13 Road Tools: .......................................................................................................... 30
2.4.14 Wheels and “Lock-Nuts”: .................................................................................. 30
2.4.15 Hydraulic Jack and Jacking Points: ................................................................. 30
2.4.16 Trailer Indicating Lights: .................................................................................. 31
2.5 Operational Lights:......................................................................................................... 31
2.6 Trailer Earthing .............................................................................................................. 31
2.6.1 General: ............................................................................................................... 31
2.6.2 Earthing Attachment Points: ............................................................................. 31
2.6.3 Operational Earthing: ........................................................................................ 31
2.6.4 Safety Rails and Steps......................................................................................... 32
3 Power Transformer ........................................................................................................ 33
3.1 General Properties .......................................................................................................... 33
3.2 Ratings and Operating Conditions ................................................................................ 33
3.2.1 Power Rating ....................................................................................................... 33
3.2.2 Current Rating .................................................................................................... 33
3.2.3 Emergency Current Rating ................................................................................ 33

3.2.4 Voltage Rating on Principal Tapping ............................................................... 33
3.2.5 Maximum Continuous Voltage on Any Tapping (Over flux) ......................... 34
3.2.6 No-Load Losses and Current ............................................................................. 34
3.2.7 Maximum Temporary Overvoltage .................................................................. 34
3.2.8 Network Frequency ............................................................................................ 34
3.2.9 Short-Circuits ...................................................................................................... 34
3.2.10 Impedance and Tolerances................................................................................. 34
3.2.11 Tapping Ranges................................................................................................... 34
3.2.12 Acoustic Noise...................................................................................................... 35
3.2.13 Clearances in Air................................................................................................. 35
3.2.14 Transformer Design Parameters: ...................................................................... 35
3.2.15 Insulation: ............................................................................................................ 35
3.2.16 Terminations onto Switchgear: ......................................................................... 35
3.2.17 Transformer Replacement: ................................................................................ 36
3.2.18 MV (33-11kV) Voltage Ratio Selection:............................................................ 36
3.2.19 Temperature Indicators:.................................................................................... 37
3.2.20 Oil Level Indicators, Alarm and Signaling Devices ......................................... 37
3.2.20.1 General ................................................................................................................. 37
3.2.20.2 Range Of Indication ............................................................................................ 37
3.2.21 Graduation of Indicator ..................................................................................... 37
3.2.21.1 Mounting.............................................................................................................. 37
3.2.21.2 Low and high level alarms ................................................................................. 37
3.2.21.3 Surge Pressure Relay:......................................................................................... 37
3.2.22 Impact recorder: ................................................................................................ 37
3.2.23 Marshalling interface box: ................................................................................. 38
3.2.24 Cooling ................................................................................................................. 38
3.3 Transformer Oil .............................................................................................................. 38
3.3.1 Oil Type and Quality .......................................................................................... 38
3.3.2 Oil Dielectric Strength ........................................................................................ 38
3.3.3 Oil Moisture Content .......................................................................................... 38

3.3.4 Insulation Test Blocks for Moisture Measurement ......................................... 38
3.3.5 Oil-Filling/Impregnation under Vacuum ......................................................... 39
3.3.6 PCB Content ........................................................................................................ 39
3.3.7 Contact with Bare Copper ................................................................................. 39
3.4 Oil Conservator Tank and Connections ....................................................................... 39
3.4.1 Capacity ............................................................................................................... 39
3.4.2 Mounting.............................................................................................................. 39
3.4.3 Removable End Cover ........................................................................................ 39
3.4.4 Isolating/Drain Valves ........................................................................................ 39
3.4.5 Pipework Connections ........................................................................................ 39
3.4.6 Sealed Oil Preservation System ......................................................................... 40
3.5 Dehydrating Breathers ................................................................................................... 40
3.5.1 General ................................................................................................................. 40
3.5.2 Containing of the Silica Gel Charge .................................................................. 40
3.5.3 Visual Inspection of the Desiccant ..................................................................... 40
3.5.4 Castings ................................................................................................................ 40
3.5.5 Corrosion Proofing ............................................................................................. 40
3.5.6 Mounting and Pipework Connections ............................................................... 40
3.6 Windings and Connections ............................................................................................ 41
3.6.1 Bracing of windings ............................................................................................ 41
3.6.2 Methods of Making Winding Connections ....................................................... 41
3.6.3 Soldered and Brazed Connections ..................................................................... 41
3.6.4 Welded Connections and Joints in Winding Body .......................................... 41
3.6.5 Bolted Connections ............................................................................................. 41
3.6.6 Crimped Connections and Other Methods....................................................... 41
3.6.7 Winding Terminations onto Bushings .............................................................. 41
3.6.8 Insulation Tests, Fault and Creepage Levels .................................................... 42
3.6.9 Winding Current Density: ................................................................................. 42
3.6.10 Vector group: ...................................................................................................... 42

3.6.11 Impedance: ...............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined.
3.7 Voltage Variation and Control ...................................................................................... 44
3.7.1 Tapping Ranges................................................................................................... 44
3.7.2 On-Load Tap-Changing Equipment ................................................................. 44
3.7.3 Current Ratings .................................................................................................. 44
3.7.4 Short-circuit Currents ........................................................................................ 44
3.7.5 Insulation Level ................................................................................................... 44
3.7.6 Design of the Tap-Changer ................................................................................ 44
3.7.7 Buchholz Relay for Selector Compartment ...................................................... 45
3.7.8 Strength of Tap-Changer Compartments and Insulating Barriers ............... 45
3.7.9 Driving Mechanism, Control and Indicating Equipment ............................... 45
3.7.10 Design of Driving Mechanism: Synchronism and Limit Stops ....................... 45
3.7.11 Manual Operation............................................................................................... 45
3.7.12 Electrical operation ............................................................................................. 45
3.7.13 Tap-in-progress indication ................................................................................. 46
3.7.14 Circuit-breaker for motor protection ............................................................... 46
3.7.15 Protection of tap changer during system faults ............................................... 46
3.7.16 Local Control ....................................................................................................... 46
3.7.17 "Raise and Lower" Motor Operating Contactors ........................................... 46
3.7.18 Step-by-Step and Parallel Operation ................................................................ 46
3.7.19 Tap Position Indication, Supervision and Monitoring .................................... 46
3.7.20 Maximum and Minimum Tap Position Indicators .......................................... 47
3.7.21 Operation counters ............................................................................................. 47
3.7.22 Tap Changer Outline Drawings and Schematic Diagrams ............................. 47
3.7.23 Tap Position Numbering .................................................................................... 47
3.7.24 Tap-Change Scheme ........................................................................................... 48
3.8 Transformer Tank .......................................................................................................... 48
3.8.1 Plant Mass............................................................................................................ 48
3.8.2 Transformer Dimensions: .................................................................................. 48
3.8.3 Materials and Welding ....................................................................................... 49

3.8.4 Corrosion Protection and Paint Finish ............................................................. 49
3.8.5 Coating of Interior Surfaces .............................................................................. 49
3.8.6 External Surfaces: Color, Corrosion Proofing and Finishing ........................ 49
3.9 Tank Construction .......................................................................................................... 49
3.9.1 Shape .................................................................................................................... 49
3.9.2 Cooling Corrugations ......................................................................................... 49
3.9.3 Guides for Core and Winding Assembly .......................................................... 49
3.10 Tank Strength and Oil Tightness ...................................................................... 50
3.10.1 Rigidity ................................................................................................................. 50
3.10.2 Internal Pressure and Vacuum .......................................................................... 50
3.10.3 Magnetic Flux Effects ......................................................................................... 50
3.10.4 Under Base ........................................................................................................... 50
3.10.5 Jacking Pads ........................................................................................................ 51
3.11 Pressure Relief Devices ....................................................................................... 51
3.12 Main Tank Covers .............................................................................................. 51
3.12.1 Shape .................................................................................................................... 51
3.12.2 Lifting ................................................................................................................... 51
3.12.3 Support................................................................................................................. 51
3.12.4 Gas Venting ......................................................................................................... 52
3.12.5 Cover Identification ............................................................................................ 52
3.12.6 Thermometer Pockets ......................................................................................... 52
3.12.7 Currents Flowing In Tank Cover ...................................................................... 52
3.12.8 Welding Of Cover ............................................................................................... 52
3.13 Gaskets: Types, Material, Re-Tightening and Welding .................................. 52
3.13.1 General ................................................................................................................. 52
3.13.2 Gaskets ................................................................................................................. 53
3.13.3 Attachments to the Transformer Tank ............................................................. 53
3.13.4 Pipe Joints ............................................................................................................ 53
3.13.5 Drilling Of Pipe Flanges ..................................................................................... 53

3.13.6 Access Openings and Covers.............................................................................. 53
3.13.7 Manhole Orientation: ......................................................................................... 53
3.13.8 Handles................................................................................................................. 53
3.13.9 Lifting Lugs ......................................................................................................... 53
3.14 Valves and Oil Sampling Devices ...................................................................... 54
3.14.1 Isolating Valves ................................................................................................... 54
3.14.2 Filtering and Drain Valves ................................................................................. 54
3.14.3 Oil Sampling Devices .......................................................................................... 54
3.14.4 Strength and Oil Tightness ................................................................................ 54
3.14.5 Valve Stem Seals ................................................................................................. 54
3.14.6 Padlocking ........................................................................................................... 55
3.14.7 Blanking Plates .................................................................................................... 55
3.14.8 Valve Function Plate ........................................................................................... 55
3.14.9 Valve Position Indication ................................................................................... 55
3.14.10 Labelling of Oil Sampling Devices..................................................................... 55
3.15 Gas and Oil Actuated Relays (Buchholz).......................................................... 55
3.15.1 Relay Stability ..................................................................................................... 56
3.15.2 Magnetic Influence.............................................................................................. 56
3.15.3 Mounting and marking of relays ....................................................................... 56
3.15.4 Windows............................................................................................................... 56
3.15.5 Gas Release and Oil Sampling Cock ................................................................. 56
3.15.6 In-Situ Testing ..................................................................................................... 56
3.15.7 Oil Tightness and Strength ................................................................................ 56
3.15.8 Electrical Connections, Terminals and Terminal Box .................................... 57
3.15.9 Devices for the Protection of Relay Contacts ................................................... 57
3.15.10 Type and Routine Testing .................................................................................. 57
3.15.11 Assembly, Operating and Maintenance Instructions ...................................... 57
3.15.12 Floats .................................................................................................................... 57
3.16 Transformer Cores ............................................................................................. 58
3.16.1 Transformer Core Clamping: ........................................................................... 58

3.16.2 Electrical Continuity ........................................................................................... 58
3.16.3 Insulation of the core .......................................................................................... 58
3.16.4 Core Earthing ...................................................................................................... 58
3.16.5 Core Clamping Structure ................................................................................... 58
3.16.6 Cross-Sectional Area of Earthing Connections ................................................ 59
3.16.7 Core Mechanical Construction .......................................................................... 59
3.16.8 Mechanical supports ........................................................................................... 59
3.16.9 Lifting Facilities .................................................................................................. 59
3.16.10 Cooling Arrangements........................................................................................ 59
3.16.11 Heat exchangers: ................................................................................................. 60
3.16.12 Hot Oil Connection Point ................................................................................... 60
3.16.13 Electrostatic Charging Tendency (ECT) .......................................................... 60
3.16.14 Oil and Winding Temperature Measurement and Settings ............................ 60
3.16.15 Contactors ............................................................................................................ 61
3.16.16 Construction Details ........................................................................................... 61
3.16.17 Detachable Supplementary Radiators .............................................................. 62
3.16.18 Cooler Control and Settings............................................................................... 62
3.16.19 Cooler Control Equipment................................................................................. 62
3.16.20 Oil Pumps ............................................................................................................ 63
3.16.21 Fans ...................................................................................................................... 64
3.16.22 Motors .................................................................................................................. 64
3.16.23 Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 64
5. Switchgear ....................................................................................................................... 65
3.17 General Detail...................................................................................................... 65
3.17.1 SF6-Insulated Switchgear Construction ............................................................ 65
3.17.2 Configuration: ..................................................................................................... 66
3.17.3 Switchgear vibration performance: .................................................................. 66
3.17.4 Indication and Verification of Switch Positions ................................................ 66
3.17.5 Breaker Mechanism Status: .............................................................................. 66

3.17.6 Operational and Maintenance Access: ............................................................ 66
3.17.7 Earthing: .............................................................................................................. 67
3.17.8 Secondary Terminals: ........................................................................................ 67
3.17.9 Sulphur Hexafluoride Gas (SF6) ......................................................................... 67
3.17.10 Internal Gas Treatment ...................................................................................... 67
3.18 HV Circuit-Breaker, Disconnector and Earthing switch................................. 67
3.18.1 HV Circuit Breakers ........................................................................................... 67
3.18.2 HV Disconnector / Earthing Switch .................................................................. 68
3.18.3 HV Bushings and Connections: ......................................................................... 69
3.18.4 Vibration suppression jig: .................................................................................. 69
3.19 MV Circuit-Breaker, Disconnector and Earthing switch ................................ 69
3.19.1 MV Circuit-Breaker ........................................................................................... 69
3.19.2 Type of MV Circuit-Breaker ............................................................................. 70
3.19.3 Ratings: ................................................................................................................ 71
3.19.4 Internal arc rating and venting: ....................................................................... 71
3.19.5 Weatherproof enclosure: .................................................................................... 72
3.19.6 SF6-Insulated Switchgear Construction ............................................................ 72
3.19.7 MV Terminations: .............................................................................................. 72
3.19.8 Isolator/Earthing Switch .................................................................................... 72
3.19.9 Earthing: .............................................................................................................. 73
3.19.10 Terminations: ...................................................................................................... 73
4 Power and Auxiliary Cables .......................................................................................... 74
3.20 General ................................................................................................................. 74
3.20.1 Standards ............................................................................................................. 74
3.20.2 Dimensioning ....................................................................................................... 74
3.20.3 Labels and Identification for Cables .................................................................. 74
3.20.4 Cable Entry and Connections ............................................................................ 74
3.20.5 Single Core Cables and Cables with Insulated Sheaths .................................. 74
3.21 Design Criteria for Power Cables and Accessories ........................................... 74
3.21.1 Conductors ........................................................................................................... 74

3.21.2 Conductor Screening ........................................................................................... 75
3.21.3 Insulation.............................................................................................................. 75
3.21.4 Identification of Cores ......................................................................................... 75
3.21.5 Laying up and Fillers .......................................................................................... 76
3.21.6 Manufacturer's Identification ............................................................................ 76
3.21.7 Amour .................................................................................................................. 76
3.21.8 Protective Coverings............................................................................................ 76
3.21.9 Voltage Marking and Identification ................................................................... 76
3.21.10 Testing .................................................................................................................. 76
3.21.11 Current Carrying Capacity and Design Parameters ........................................ 76
3.22 Trail Power Cables: ............................................................................................ 76
3.22.1 Type and quantity: ............................................................................................. 77
3.22.2 Cable routing and support: .............................................................................. 77
3.22.3 Power Cable Termination Details: .................................................................... 77
3.22.4 Cable termination enclosure: ............................................................................ 78
3.22.5 MV Outgoing Feeder Cable and Reel Details: ............................................... 78
3.23 Design Criteria for PVC Insulated Concentric Cables ..................................... 78
3.24 Design Criteria for Multicore Cable and Accessories ....................................... 78
3.24.1 General ................................................................................................................. 78
3.24.2 Core Identification............................................................................................... 79
3.24.3 Over-sheaths ........................................................................................................ 79
3.25 Design Criteria for Multi-Pair Cables................................................................ 79
3.25.1 General ................................................................................................................. 79
3.25.2 For Analogue Measurands ................................................................................. 79
3.25.3 For Digital Inputs/outputs .................................................................................. 81
3.25.4 For 240 VAC and 110 VDC Distribution ........................................................... 82
3.25.5 For Cross Connections ........................................................................................ 82
3.26 Installation of Cables ........................................................................................... 82
3.26.1 Segregation .......................................................................................................... 83

3.27 Galvanizing .......................................................................................................... 83
1.13.1. 33 KV Connections to Feeders ............................................................................ 83
1.13.2. 33 KV Connections to Power Transformer ....................................................... 83
3.27.1 33 KV Connections to AUX TX.......................................................................... 83
3.28 Low Voltage Power Cable Connection............................................................... 84
3.29 Supply, Installation and Termination ................................................................ 84
3.30 Small Wiring and Terminations ........................................................................ 84
3.30.1 General ................................................................................................................. 84
3.30.2 Termination of Wiring ........................................................................................ 85
3.30.3 Termination of Internal Wiring and Terminal Boxes ..................................... 85
3.30.4 Identification of Wiring ...................................................................................... 86
3.31 Terminal Boards .................................................................................................. 86
3.32 Mounting of Terminal Blocks ............................................................................ 87
3.32.1 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 87
3.32.2 Retaining .............................................................................................................. 87
3.32.3 Replacement ........................................................................................................ 87
3.33 Type of Terminal Block ...................................................................................... 87
3.33.1 Spring loaded ....................................................................................................... 87
3.33.2 Heavy-Duty Stud Type ....................................................................................... 88
3.33.3 Terminal Boxes.................................................................................................... 89
3.33.4 Clearances ............................................................................................................ 89
3.33.5 Venting and Draining ......................................................................................... 89
3.33.6 Earthing Terminal .............................................................................................. 89
3.33.7 Cable Entry.......................................................................................................... 89
3.33.8 Wiring and Termination ..................................................................................... 90
3.34 Trailer Earthing .................................................................................................. 91
3.34.1 General: ............................................................................................................... 91
3.34.2 Earthing Attachment Points: ............................................................................. 91
3.34.3 Operational Earthing: ....................................................................................... 91
3.34.4 Cable Earthing: .................................................................................................. 92

3.35 Provisions for Earthing ...................................................................................... 92
3.35.1 Transformer Tank Earthing .............................................................................. 92
3.35.2 Transformer Neutral Earthing .......................................................................... 92
3.35.3 Surge arrester earthing (line and neutral surge arresters) ............................. 92
3.36 Core Earthing ...................................................................................................... 93
3.36.1 Core ...................................................................................................................... 93
3.36.2 Core Clamping Structure ................................................................................... 93
3.36.3 Cross-sectional area of earthing connections ................................................... 93
3.37 Cable Earthing .................................................................................................... 93
3.38 Equipment Earthing ........................................................................................... 93
3.39 Earthing and Earthing Devices.......................................................................... 94
4 Control Plant and Supervisory Systems ....................................................................... 95
4.1 Equipment Controls........................................................................................................ 95
4.1.1 HV switchgear control circuits: ....................................................................... 95
4.1.2 MV switchgear control circuits: ....................................................................... 95
4.1.3 Time delay and alarm: ..................................................................................... 95
4.1.4 Mimic panel: ........................................................................................................ 95
4.2 Control cubicles ............................................................................................................... 95
4.2.1 Dimensions and Quantity: .................................................................................. 95
4.2.2 Mounting and Position: ..................................................................................... 96
4.2.3 Fabrication Details: ............................................................................................ 96
4.2.4 Miscellaneous: ..................................................................................................... 97
4.3 Equipment Configuration .............................................................................................. 97
4.3.1 General ................................................................................................................. 97
4.3.2 Control and Monitoring Equipment ................................................................. 97
4.3.2.1 Control and Indication ....................................................................................... 97
4.3.2.2 Auxiliary Switches .............................................................................................. 98
4.3.2.3 Control Switches .................................................................................................. 98
4.3.3 Indications and Alarms ....................................................................................... 98

4.3.3.1 Indication System ................................................................................................ 99
4.3.3.2 Indication Lamps ............................................................................................... 100
4.3.3.3 Alarm Indication System .................................................................................. 100
4.3.4 Instruments ........................................................................................................ 101
4.3.5 Protection of Secondary Circuits ..................................................................... 101
4.3.5.1 Anti-Condensation Heaters .............................................................................. 101
4.3.6 Earthing Arrangements .................................................................................... 102
4.3.7 Transducers ....................................................................................................... 102
4.3.7.1 Transducers Additional Properties ................................................................. 102
4.3.8 Meters and Energy Management ..................................................................... 103
4.3.9 Labels for Switching Devices and Wires .......................................................... 103
4.4 Supervisory Systems ..................................................................................................... 103
4.4.1 Tele-control Equipment: .................................................................................. 103
4.4.2 Plant Tele Control ............................................................................................. 104
4.4.3 RTU Cubicle ...................................................................................................... 104
4.4.4 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) .......................................................................... 104
5 Protection Equipment ................................................................................................... 106
5.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 106
5.1.1 Testing Facilities................................................................................................ 106
5.1.2 Transformer protection .................................................................................... 106
5.1.3 On-load tap-changer ......................................................................................... 107
5.1.4 Feeder protection .............................................................................................. 107
5.1.5 Measurement ..................................................................................................... 107
5.1.6 Alarm, Control and Tripping Contacts .......................................................... 107
5.1.7 Alarm and control contacts .............................................................................. 107
5.1.8 Tripping contacts .............................................................................................. 107
5.1.9 Wiring and Termination ................................................................................... 107
5.2 Measuring Instruments ................................................................................................. 108
5.3 Protective Relays and Associated Apparatus ............................................................. 109
5.3.1 General ............................................................................................................... 109

5.3.2 Standards ........................................................................................................... 109
5.3.3 Warranty ............................................................................................................ 109
5.3.4 Relays ................................................................................................................. 109
5.3.5 Testing Facilities................................................................................................ 111
5.3.6 Relays, MCB's and Ancillary Apparatus ......................................................... 111
5.3.7 Name Plates ........................................................................................................ 112
5.3.8 Requirements ..................................................................................................... 112
5.4 Interlocking System ....................................................................................................... 113
5.5 Instrumentation ............................................................................................................. 113
5.5.1 General ............................................................................................................... 113
5.5.2 HV Transformer Bay Control Section ............................................................. 113
5.5.3 Transformer Voltage Regulation...................................................................... 114
5.5.4 MV Feeder and Transformer Bay Control Section ........................................ 114
5.5.5 Relays ................................................................................................................. 114
5.6 Transformer Protection System .................................................................................. 115
5.6.1 Differential Protection ....................................................................................... 116
5.6.2 Restricted Earth Fault Protection .................................................................... 117
5.6.3 Standby Earth Fault Protection ....................................................................... 117
5.6.4 Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................................... 118
5.6.5 MV Feeder Cable Protection ............................................................................ 118
5.7 Feeder Protection System ............................................................................................. 118
5.7.1 Distance Protection ............................................................................................ 119
5.7.2 Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection ........................................................ 120
5.7.3 Sensitive Earth Fault ........................................................................................ 120
5.7.4 Auto-Reclosing .................................................................................................. 120
5.8 AUX TX Protection ....................................................................................................... 121
5.9 Energy Metering ........................................................................................................... 121
5.9.1 Technical ............................................................................................................ 121
6 Communication Systems .............................................................................................. 123

6.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 123
6.2 Antenna mast: .............................................................................................................. 123
6.3 Ethernet Radio .............................................................................................................. 124
6.4 Fiber Optical Modem with Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer (Optical Modem) .........
124
6.5 IP (V0IP) Phones ........................................................................................................... 124
6.6 GPRS IP Modem (GPRS Modem) .............................................................................. 125
7 Surge Arresters ............................................................................................................. 126
7.1 General Protective Margin .......................................................................................... 126
7.2 Temporary Overvoltage Capability ............................................................................ 126
7.3 HV Line Surge Arresters ........................................................................................... 126
7.4 Vibration Suppression Jig ............................................................................................ 127
7.5 HV Line Surge Arresters: ............................................................................................ 127
7.6 Transformer HV Neutral Surge Arrester................................................................... 127
7.7 MV Surge Arresters: ................................................................................................... 127
7.8 Transformer MV Neutral Surge Arrester .................................................................. 128
8 Plant Auxiliary Supplies ............................................................................................... 129
8.1 Auxiliary Transformer ................................................................................................. 129
8.2 Voltage and Resistor Selection: ................................................................................... 129
8.3 Auxiliary Transformer Capacity ................................................................................. 129
8.4 Protection ....................................................................................................................... 129
8.5 Connections: .................................................................................................................. 129
8.6 Auxiliary Supply Circuit Breakers: ............................................................................ 130
8.7 AC distribution modules .............................................................................................. 130
8.8 110VDC Supply System ................................................................................................ 130
8.9 110 V Battery Equipment ............................................................................................. 131
8.10 DC distribution module .................................................................................... 132
8.11 DC Distribution Panel ...................................................................................... 132
9 Instrument Transformers ............................................................................................ 133
9.1 Voltage Transformer .................................................................................................... 133
9.1.1 HV Voltage Transformers ................................................................................ 133

9.1.2 MV Voltage Transformer................................................................................. 133
9.2 Current transformers ................................................................................................... 133
9.2.1 Current Transformer Properties ..................................................................... 134
9.2.2 Current Transformers Requirements ............................................................. 134
9.2.3 Shielding............................................................................................................. 135
9.2.4 Current Transformer Positioning and Ratings .............................................. 136
9.2.5 Number and Location ....................................................................................... 137
9.2.6 Applicable Standard ......................................................................................... 137
9.2.7 Transformer Short-Circuits and Overload .................................................... 138
9.2.8 Insulation Levels and Short-Circuiting for Testing....................................... 138
9.2.9 Tests.................................................................................................................... 138
9.2.10 Protective current transformers ...................................................................... 138
9.2.11 Data for rating and diagram plates ................................................................. 139
9.2.12 Terminal Markings ........................................................................................... 139
10 Training and Testing .................................................................................................... 141
10.1 Training of Purchaser’s Staff .................................Error! Bookmark not defined.
10.2 Onsite Training ................................................................................................. 141
10.3 Tests at Factory and On Site ............................................................................ 141
10.3.1 Manufacturer's Testing Capabilities............................................................... 141
10.3.2 Test instruments and apparatus ...................................................................... 141
10.3.3 Test certificates.................................................................................................. 142
10.3.4 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) ....................................................................... 142
10.3.5 Testing on Power Transformer........................................................................ 142
10.3.6 Testing on Cables .............................................................................................. 144
10.3.7 Testing on Switchgear and Switchboards ....................................................... 145
10.3.8 Testing on Instrument Transformers.............................................................. 146
10.3.8.1 Voltage Transformers ....................................................................................... 146
10.3.8.2 Current Transformers ...................................................................................... 146
10.3.9 Lightning Arresters ........................................................................................... 147

10.3.10 Oil-Filled Vessels Other Than Cable Boxes (If Any)....................................... 147
10.3.11 Insulating Oil ..................................................................................................... 147
10.3.12 Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) Gas ...................................................................... 147
10.3.13 Testing on Ancillary Equipment ..................................................................... 147
10.3.13.1 Control Switches ............................................................................................. 147
10.3.13.2 Instruments ...................................................................................................... 148
10.3.13.3 Indication and Alarms .................................................................................... 148
10.3.13.4 Relays and MCBs ............................................................................................ 148
10.3.13.5 Earthing Arrangements.................................................................................. 148
10.3.13.6 Protective Relays and Associated Apparatus ............................................... 149
10.3.13.7 Programmable Transducers .......................................................................... 149
10.3.13.8 Battery Charger and Batteries ...................................................................... 149
10.3.13.9 Wiring .............................................................................................................. 150
10.3.13.10 Tests on DC Circuits ................................................................................... 150
10.3.13.11 Mechanical Inspection of Relays ............................................................... 151
10.3.13.12 Secondary Injection of Protection Circuits .............................................. 151
10.3.13.13 Primary Injection ........................................................................................ 151
10.4 Work Tests ......................................................................................................... 152
10.5 On Site Testing Final Acceptance .................................................................... 152
10.5.1 Site Tests ............................................................................................................ 152
10.5.2 Testing on Site ................................................................................................... 152
10.6 Records of Equipment Checks and Tests ....................................................... 153
11 Miscellaneous................................................................................................................. 155
11.1 System Control Centre ...................................................................................... 155
11.2 Compatibility ..................................................................................................... 155
11.3 Documentation .................................................................................................. 155
11.4 Special tools ....................................................................................................... 156
11.5 Spares ................................................................................................................. 156
11.6 Maintenance practices ...................................................................................... 156
11.7 External Electrical Equipment Insulation ...................................................... 157

11.8 Operational barricading ................................................................................... 157
11.9 Paint and corrosion protection ........................................................................ 157
11.9.1 Equipment: ........................................................................................................ 157
11.9.2 Fasteners: ........................................................................................................... 157
11.10 Transport ........................................................................................................... 157
11.10.1 General Conditions, Blanking Plates and Gas Filling ................................... 157
11.10.2 Accelerometer limits ......................................................................................... 158
11.10.3 Road transport .................................................................................................. 158
11.10.4 Transport support brackets ............................................................................. 158
11.11 Component Approvals ...................................................................................... 158
11.12 Design Review.................................................................................................... 159
11.13 Quality................................................................................................................ 159
11.14 Condition Monitoring / Assessment Equipment ............................................ 159
11.15 Rating and Diagram Plates .............................................................................. 164
11.15.1 General ............................................................................................................... 164
11.15.2 Materials and Methods of Marking ................................................................ 164
11.15.3 Mounting............................................................................................................ 164
11.15.4 Information for Plant ....................................................................................... 165
11.16 Adjudication of Bidders ................................................................................... 166
11.17 Workmanship .................................................................................................... 167
11.18 Galvanizing ........................................................................................................ 167

Table of Figures
Figure 1: The typical mobile substation trailer deck layout. .......................................................... 22
Figure 2: Buchholz relay outline drawing and sizes ........................................................................ 57
Figure 3: bus coupler / incomer bay arrangement........................................................................... 70
Figure 4: General mounting of terminal block ................................................................................ 89
Figure 5: General arrangement of stud type terminal block .......................................................... 89
Figure 6: Control cubicles .................................................................................................................. 96
Figure 7: CT Positions on Plant ....................................................................................................... 137
Table of Tables
Table 1: Multi-ratio mobile substations ............................................................................................ 22
Table 2: Electrical clearances in air .................................................................................................. 35
Table 3: Minimum Insulation, Fault and Creepage Levels for the Power Transformers............ 43
Table 4: Contact state at each tap position ....................................................................................... 46
Table 5: Minimum thickness of tank base plates mild steel ............................................................ 50
Table 6: Gas and oil actuated relays oil flow rates for closure of surge contacts.......................... 55
Table 7: HV Circuit Breaker Rating ................................................................................................. 68
Table 8: MV circuit breaker rating ................................................................................................... 71
Table 9: MV Trailing cables and cable terminations application guide ....................................... 77
Table 10: HV Line Surge Arrester Application ............................................................................. 127
Table 11: HV Neutral Surge Arrester Application ........................................................................ 127
Table 12: MV Line Surge Arrester Application............................................................................. 127
Table 13: 25MVA Transformer and AUX TX CT specifications (refer to fig. 4) ....................... 136
Table 14: Functions of Monitoring .................................................................................................. 160
Table 15: General Plant Technical Schedules ................................................................................ 168
Table 16: Power Transformer Technical Schedules ...................................................................... 171
Table 17: HV Circuit-Breaker, Disconnector & Earthing Devices Technical Schedules ........... 175
Table 18: Control / MIB Panels Technical Schedules.................................................................... 177

Table 19: MV circuit-breaker (GIS) type Technical Schedules.................................................... 182
Table 20: MV Trailing Cables Technical Schedules ...................................................................... 185
Table 21: Surge Arrestor Technical Schedules .............................................................................. 186
Table 22: Auxiliary Transformer Technical Schedules ................................................................. 189
Table 23: Voltage Transformer Technical Schedules .................................................................... 191
Table 24: Current Transformer Technical Schedules ................................................................... 192
Table 25: Transformer Oil Technical Schedules ............................................................................ 194
Table 26: Fibre Optical Modem with Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer Technical Schedules.. 195
Table 27: Ethernet Radios Technical Schedules ............................................................................. 197
Table 288: GPRS Modem Technical Schedules ............................................................................. 198
Table 299: IP (VoIP) Phone Technical Schedules .......................................................................... 200
Table 302: Multi-Mode Optical Fibre Cable Technical Specifications ........................................ 204
Table 313: Documentation, Spares, and Special Tools Technical Schedules ............................... 206
Table 32: Deviation schedule............................................................................................................ 214

1 Foreword
This section of document is intended as a technical guideline for the procurement of two
25MVA multi-ratio mobile substations. Note that the Bidders / Suppliers / Manufacturers /
Contractor are required to offer and supply a complete / total solution regardless of whether
this document provides for every detail.
Thus scope of delivery of the multi-ratio mobile substation shall include all the necessary
accessories, even if not mentioned specifically, as well as the FAT and Site testing, training
and commissioning ready for operation.
1.1. Scope
This specification is a guideline to the design, manufacture, testing and ready-for-operation
delivery of two complete multi-ratios (132/33-11kV), mobile outdoor substation/ plant each
with a capacity of 25MVA (a complete solution shall be required). The mobile substations
shall be delivered under the following configurations;
1. One Unit as a complete multi-ratio under 132/33kV Configuration
2. One Unit as a complete multi-ratio under 132/11kV Configuration
Each mobile substation shall consist of a power transformer, auxiliary transformer, HV and
MV switchgear, and all associated communication, control and protection plant, mounted on
appropriate trailers.
The specification also prescribes the typical vehicle for the mobile substation, to be in
accordance with the Uganda National Roads Authority and regional transportation restrictions
for abnormal vehicles.
The mobile substation / plant type is given in table 1.

Table 1: Multi-ratio mobile substations
Voltage Capacity Quantity Impedance Vector group Tap-changer MV Voltage
Ratios Ratio Selection
(*Selected
132/33-11kV 25 MVA TWO 10-14% YN0yn0 Vac-type OLTC (OCTS) interlink
MV) or OLSS
The mobile substation / plant shall incorporate ALL components and accessories required in
the described application, including protection, control, communication, connection
accessories, trail power cabling, and all the necessary accessories, even if not mentioned
specifically but needed for the complete supply and operation, as per UETCL operations,
protection, communication, and control philosophy, and accordance with modern and best
engineering practise.
For the Proposed single-line diagram of the mobile substation, refer to the Annex of this
document. The basic configuration of the major components is depicted in the layout below:
Figure 1: The typical mobile substation trailer deck layout.

Note: The positions of the MV switchgear, heat exchanger and control cubicles are
variable; however, the HV CMT-GIS switchgear shall be at rear of the trailer and the
output to the switchgear connected to the HV terminals of the transformer, as an
operational preference.
1.2. Physical Arrangement

Unless otherwise specified, the physical arrangement shall be such that:
a) separately mounted cooler banks, if provided, shall be located to allow free withdrawal
of the transformer in the direction of the minor axis; and
b) The maximum overall dimensions to fit within the trailers / vehicle.
c) The HV and MV terminals of the power transformer connected onto the respective
switchgears
1.3. Standards
The following standards contain provisions that, through reference in the text, constitute
provisions of this specification. All standards are subject to revision, and Bidders should note
that the most recent editions of the standards listed below shall apply to this contract.
The requirements of this specification take precedence over the requirements of normative
references.
IEC 60034: 1996: Rotating electrical machines.

IEC 60044: - 3:1980: Instrument transformers. - Part 3 Combined transformers.
IEC 60052: 1960: Recommendations for voltage measurement by means of sphere-
gaps (one sphere earthed).
IEC 60060:1989: High-voltage test techniques.
IEC 60076-1:1993: Power transformers - part 7 General.
IEC 60076-2:1993: Power transformers - Part 2 Temperature rise.
IEC 60076- 3:1993: Power transformers - Part 3 Insulation levels and dielectric tests.
IEC 60076- 5:1976: Power transformers - Part 5 Ability to withstand short circuit.
IEC 60085:1984: Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation.
IEC 60137:1995: lnsulating bushings for alternating voltages above 1 000 V.
IEC 60144: 1963: Degrees of protection of enclosures for low-voltage switchgear and
control gear
IEC 60156: 1995 Insulating liquids - Determination of the breakdown voltage at
power frequency.
IEC 60185:1981, Current transformers.
IEC 60214:1989, On-load tap-changers.
IEC 60255-21-3:1993, Electrical relays - Part 21 Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests
on measuring relays and protection equipment - Section 3 Seismic
tests.
IEC 60270: 1981, Partial discharge measurements.
IEC 60296: 1982, Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear.
IEC 60354:1991, Loading guide for oil- immersed power transformers.
IEC 60439:1987 - 1996, Low- voltage switchgear and control gear.
IEC 60551 :1987, Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels.
IEC 60947 :1989-1996: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
NEMA TR1 :1993, Transformers regulators and reactors.
BS 142:1993, Electrical protection relays.
BS 171 Appendix D:197O-1987, Power transformers
BS 775-1 :1974, A.C. contactors for voltages above 1 kV up to and including 12 kV
BS 1433:1970, Copper for electrical purposes - rod and bar.
BS 1706:1990, Electroplated coatings of zinc & cadmium on iron and steel
BS 1872:1984, Electroplated coatings of tin.

BS 2562:1979, Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors.
BS 3382 - Parts 1 and 2:1961, Specification for electroplated coatings and threaded
components. -Parts 1 and 2 Cadmium on steel components. Zinc on
steel components.
BS 3382-Parts 5 and 6:1967, Specification for electroplated coatings and threaded
components. -Parts 5 and 6 Tin on copper and copper alloy
(including brass) components. Silver on copper and copper alloy
(including brass) components.
BS 3523:1991, Granular desiccant silica gel impregnated with cobalt chloride.
BS 3571 :1985, General recommendations for manual inert gas metal arc welding
Part 7: MIG welding of aluminum and aluminum alloys.
BS 3938:1973, Specification for current transformers.
BS 4360:1990, Specification for wieldable structural steels.
BS 4504:1989, Circular flanges for pipes valves and fittings (PN designated).
BS 5135:1984, Arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels.
DIN 2576 :1975, Flanges Slip-on type for Brazing or Welding; Nominal pressure 10
max.
DIN 2631 :1975, Welding neck flanges; nominal pressure 6 (max).
DIN 46277-1, Assembly rails
ISO:9001, 1994, Quality systems - Model for quality assurance in design
development production, installation and servicing.
IEC 60071-1/2:1996, Insulation co-ordination.
IEC 60216-2:1990, Guide for the determination of thermal endurance properties of
electrical insulating materials.
IEC 60233:1988, Tests on hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment.
IEC 60505:1975, Guide for the evaluation of insulation systems of electrical
equipment.
IEC 60507:1991, Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be used on a.c.
systems.
IEC 60815:1986, Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted condition.
IEC 60502, Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) – Insulated electric cables
1.4. Normative references

Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed
below:
 Specification for large power transformers up to 132kV within the document
 Distribution specific requirements for 132kV, 33kV, and 11kV mixed technology gas
insulated switchgear
 Metal enclosed fixed pattern switchgear for rated voltages from 12kV to 52kV
manufactured in accordance with IEC 62271-200
 Distribution Group’s specific requirements for 11 kV and 33kV outdoor type switchgear
 Specification for 11kV and 33kV impregnated paper and XLPE-Insulated cables
 Accessories for medium-voltage power cables with rated voltages from 11kV to 33kV
 Specification for combined three-phase auxiliary power transformers.
 Flexible electric trailing cables for use in mines Part 2: High-voltage 3,8/6,6 kV to 19/33
kV cables.
 Bushings above 1 kV up to 36 kV and from 250 A to 3,15 kA for liquid filled transformers
 Enclosures for cable terminations in air-for rated a.c. voltages of 7,2 kV and up to and
including 36 kV.
 Specification for station class metal oxide surge arresters without spark gaps. Corrosion
protection specification for distribution outdoor equipment manufactured from steel.
 UETCL color standards for paint
 Ball joint (double) assembly for use on portable earthing

 Clamp, cable double 75-100 dia polyprop black
 Clamp, peg al cent 26.5mm epc-26
1.5. Definitions and abbreviations

1.5.1. Definitions
For the purposes of this specification the definitions in IEC apply.
Approved/approval: Approved by or the approval of the Purchaser representative (Contract

Manager), in writing.
1.5.2. Keywords:
Abnormal vehicle, mobile substation, multi-ratio, switched MV winding, switchgear.
1.5.3. Abbreviations
MIB: Marshalling Interface Box
CMT- GIS: Compact Mixed Technology Gas Insulated Switchgear
OLTC: On Load Tap-Changer
OLSS: Off Load Selector Switch
OCTS Off Circuit Tap Switch
MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker
HV: High Voltage. With reference to the mobile substation, the incoming
nominal line voltage is 132kV
MV: Medium Voltage. In the mobile substation context, MV is the outgoing
supply nominal line voltage, 11 or 33kV
AV: Abnormal Vehicle
GCM: Gross Combination Mass
SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
PM: Percentage Protective Margin
BIL: Basic Insulation Level
Ures: Residual Voltage of the Surge Arrester at 10 kA for an 8/20 current
impulse
MR Multi-Ratio secondary winding for Current Transformer
AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator Relay
AUX TX Auxiliary Transformer
CVT Capacitive Voltage Transformer
BCU Bay Control Unit
IED Intelligent Electronic Devices
BWR Bushing with Rod
1.6. Warranty
The Contractor must submit to the Purchaser Letters of Warranty that all material used in the
manufacture of the plant shall withstand Uganda’s climatic conditions.
1.7. Electrical Plant Design Criteria

1.7.1. General Conditions in Uganda
Plant Application: out-of-doors
Altitude above sea level: up to 1500 m
Ambient air temperatures:
*maximum 45°C
*daily average 30°C
*yearly average 25°C
*minimum 5°C
Average humidity: 30 % to 95% (Tropicalized);

Sinusoidal supply voltage wave shape: 50 Hz;
Symmetrical 3phase supply voltages: (negative and zero phase sequence voltages less
than 2 %)
Life expectancy at rated conditions: at least 35 years; and
Modern good engineering practices: YES
Note: - Due to higher prevailing ambient temperatures, winding temperature rises and top oil
temperature rises for the Power Transformer shall not exceed 100K and 55K respectively, on
ambient of 450C. In this respect, the above temperature limits differ from those specified in
IEC 60076;
Nominal system voltage between phases kV 132 33 – 11

0.400
Highest system voltage between phases kV 145 36 – 12
0.435
System frequency Hz 50 50 – 50 50
System earthing Solid through Surge Arrester Solid
System fault level max. kA 31.5 40 – 40 20
Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 us) kV 650/250 170 - 75 -
Power frequency (1 min) withstand voltage kV 275/95 75 - 28 3.0
Assumed highest switching surge pu - 3.5 3.5
Minimum substation clearances: -

a. Phase to earth mm 1600 320 60
b. Phase to phase mm 1600 380 90
c. Between terminals of same phase mm 1600 380 90
d. From ground to live parts mm 3850 2625 -
e. Working clearance (Horizontal) mm 2300 1500 -
1.7.2. Cable Box Clearances

(Where terminations are fully shrouded with heat shrinkable material.)
Min. Clearance between
Phases mm - 215 20
Phase/earth mm - 215 20
Phase to earth over cable surface mm - 290 25
Nominal voltage for: -

 Controls, indications, motors V DC 110
 Auxiliary equipment V AC 400/230 50 Hz
Note: Unless specified otherwise all primary circuit components shall have ratings equivalent
to the normal and short time rating of the associated circuit-breaker as specified. All Plant
shall have the ratings specified, within any housing or enclosure, which forms part of the
Plant or Works and under the most onerous combination of Site Conditions specified.
The rating of Plant shall not be dependent on the availability of the ventilation and air
conditioning. The withstand voltage shall apply to insulators, bushings, plugs, including
support insulators and casings for circuit-breakers, current transformers, voltage transformers,
and auxiliary transformer, etc.
1.8. Insulators and Bushings

The minimum surface leakage distance measured from the metal cap to the base over the
surface of ALL insulator shed, shall not be less than 25 mm per highest system kV between
phases. The minimum protected surface leakage distance shall not be less than thirty-five
percent of the total surface leakage distance. The protected leakage distance refers to that part
of the insulator which is protected against rain at right angles to the axis of the bushing.
"Anti-fog" or "Anti-pollution" type or other insulators with deep sheds or skirts will not be
approved.
1.9. Communication System

A multi-mode communication system shall be designed to interface and integrate with
existing communication system. This shall have the following option:
a) Interlinking to the mobile RTU through a portable Fiber Optical Modem with
Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer in the event of breaking into a transmission line that has
an optical fiber link.
b) Interlinking to the mobile RTU through a portable GPRS Modem with
Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer in the event of breaking into a transmission line in an
area with only GSM/GPRS link.
The contractor shall also include Four (4) GPRS Modems.
c) Interlinking to the mobile RTU through wireless Ethernet radio in the event of breaking
into a transmission line that has no optical fiber link.
The contractor shall also include Five (5) Ethernet Radios, Two per Mobile, and One
Spare.
d) Interlinking to the mobile RTU by direct interface into existing substations
communication systems in the event of running the plant from an existing substation.
e) The contractor shall also include Two (2) fairly sized Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)
Systems for each Mobile Substation (4 Total), for providing prolonged (minimum 4
hours) stable and reliable supply, to both Mobile Plant and Existing Substation side
communication (Ethernet Radios, IP Phones and Modems) units, in the event of any
system failure.
f) The contractor shall also include Two (2) IP (VoIP) Phones.
The Contractor shall design and consider all three SCADA integration scenarios to the
existing systems.
1.10. Control System

Shall be designed to interface and integrate with existing SCADA system at National Control
Centre, and shall provide for all controls and signals as listed in this document.
1.11. Protection System

Shall be designed to interface and integrate with existing Protection schemes and systems.
1.12. Airborne Contamination

All external equipment shall be immune to the effects of airborne contamination on surface
housing. All control and auxiliary equipment shall be housed in IP55 cubicles, while the MV
switchgear in IP54 housing, but all contained in a suitably sized IP65 air-conditioned
enclosure.
2 Vehicle Requirements
2.1 Vehicle configuration:
The vehicle shall be comprised of one tractor head and four typical “low bed” trailers (2 Main
and 2 MV panel trailers), approved as a vehicle combination to be supplied by the bidder.
Specifications of the new tractor head are included as Annex III b) to this document. The new
tractor head shall be itemized and quoted separately in the price schedules. The bidder shall
also ensure that all trailers are appropriately designed to interface with the existing UETCL
tractor head whose specifications are included as Annex III a) to this document.
The main trailer shall have four axles, while the MV Panel trailer shall have two axles. Every
effort must be made to reduce the mass of the equipment, such that the two and four axle
trailers can be utilized (load capability approximately 20 – 40 ton), due to its significantly
better maneuverability, and in line with the load and axle guidelines of Uganda National Road
Authority and the regional transportation restrictions.
The vehicle must not require the use of a “helper dolly” in order to achieve gross axle unit
mass limitations. The equipment on the trailers shall be appropriately distributed in order to
adhere to the axle unit limitations, to achieve the required mass on the 5th wheel for traction.
2.2 Trailer Head:
2.3 Trailer Construction:

The trailers should preferably be designed and manufactured for utilization on Ugandan
roads. Only components supplied in accordance to relevant and industry accepted, local and
international specifications shall be used.
The specifications of the required trailer head are included in Annex III b. Note that UETCL
owns a trailer head (specifications in Annex III a) and it is required that these two can be used
interchangeably.
The power transformer tank may NOT form a stressed member of the Main trailer. The Main
trailer must be designed such that the power transformer could be exchanged for another unit
if necessary. All bolted parts and assemblies shall be supplied and fitted with suitable locking
devices/fasteners e.g. self-locking nuts, to inhibit equipment from vibrating loose, whilst in
transit or in service.
2.4 AV Approvals:
The vehicle must be designed in accordance to the stipulations of the Abnormal Vehicle and
Load Guideline of Uganda National Road Authority and regional transportation restrictions.
Updated information can be obtained from https://www.unra.go.ug/resources/laws-policies-
regulations. The substation electrical assembly is classified as an “indivisible load”.
The supplier / contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the required Approvals, from the
Uganda National Road Authority and regional transportation bodies. UETCL will supply the
truck tractor specification for obtaining approval for the vehicle combination. (See Annex III)
2.5 Trailer Dimensions:

The following maximum dimensions are specified (for more detail see the Annex II to this
document), however manufacturers should obviously attempt to reasonably minimize the
dimensions in order to minimize the vehicle overall mass and ameliorate maneuverability.
2.5.1 Length:
The maximum length of the trailers shall be limited by the maximum wheelbase for a single
articulation vehicle, under the abnormal vehicle (AV) regulations of 14,500mm (distance
between 5th wheel and bogey i.e. center of rear axles).
2.5.2 Width:
The maximum practical width is 3,200mm, beyond which an escort becomes necessary. The
maximum width is provided should the deck area be necessary; however, the preferred width
is 2,900mm.
2.5.3 Height:
The preferred height is the legally permissible overall height of 4300mm from ground level.
Since the vehicle will be abnormal in respect of mass and will have to be moved under
permit, the overall maximum height may be in excess of 4300mm but shall not exceed
4,600mm when the vehicle is in transport state, and the in-service mode shall be as close to
the transport configuration in order to minimize on site erection and disassembly.
2.5.4 Ground Clearance:

The ground clearance underneath the deck of the trailers, shall be between 200 – 250mm in
order to rhyme with the required rim diameter for the trailer of 16 – 18 inches
2.5.5 Trailer Goose-Neck:

The option of a goose neck allows flexibility from approximately 0 – 1000mm at the front of
the trailers which may be used in order to temporarily improve ground clearance during off
road use.
The goose neck shall also facilitate engagement of the truck tractor without jacking the
trailers stabilizing legs.
2.5.6 Kingpin and 5th wheel:

The trailers shall have a 3.5inch (89mm) “JOST 38C” kingpin or similar, suitable for
abnormal vehicle applications with a Gross Combination Mass (GCM) of 120 metric tons.
The kingpin, and height of the 5th wheel of 1350mm, will be standardized for all mobile
substations in order to facilitate national interoperability, and possible use with the existing
UETCL tractor head.
2.5.7 Vehicle Design Speed:

The preferred transport speed shall be up to 60 km/h on asphalt (tarred), public (proclaimed)
roads, and up to 20 km/h on “reasonable” gravel roads or in accordance with the state of the
road.
The design speed shall be stated in the technical schedules. The AV will be fitted with an
accelerometer for on-line measurement to ensure adherence to the design capability of the
vehicle.
2.5.8 Suspension:
The trailers shall be equipped with an air suspension system in order to provide suitable ride
quality (minimization of vibration) to cater for the sensitive electrical apparatus. The
suspension should be suitable for reasonable off-road application by allowing vertical
variability between individual axle heights (preferred 150mm).
2.5.9 Brakes:
The trailers shall be fully equipped with a universal, air assisted ABS (Anti-lock Braking
System) braking system, suitable for the gross combination mass (GCM - typically 120 ton)
of the vehicle, and the maximum permissible speed of the vehicle (typically 60km/hour).
2.5.10 Leveling Gear

2.5.10.1 Stabilizing Legs:
The Main trailer shall be fitted with 6 mechanically actuated stabilizing legs (grounding
pads). Each leg shall be rated for at minimum 33 % of the total mass of the trailer. The
legs shall be used on site or when the vehicle is in storage to remove the load off the trailer
wheels at the rear, and to engage the truck tractor at the front.
The MV Panel trailer shall be fitted with 4 mechanically actuated stabilizing legs
(grounding pads). Each leg shall be rated for at minimum 50 % of the total mass of the
trailer. The legs shall be used on site or when the vehicle is in storage to remove the load
off the trailer wheels at the rear, and to engage the truck tractor at the front.
2.5.10.2 Level Indicators:

Spherical, bubble-type, spirit-level indicators are to be fitted at each of the four outer
stabilizing leg positions for levelling purposes. The indicators shall be suitably
mechanically protected and weatherproof.
2.5.11 Tool-box and Spare Wheels

The trailers shall be fitted with lockable powder-coated stainless steel (3CR12) lockable
storage cabinets (typically four), having minimum dimensions of 600 x 400 x 400 mm (length
x width x height), manufactured to an IP55 rating shall be provided in the overall design of
the trailers and substation unit.
2.5.12 Storage for Supervisory Mast:

Two suitable stainless steel tube, retractable, telescopic, polymer or composite (3500 x
100dia) with all mounting and installation accessories, having removable end caps at one end,
blanked off at the other and manufactured to an IP55 rating, which can be manually raised to
an appropriate length/height for line of sight communication in all possible application, and
suitable for wireless communication antenna mounting compatible to that used in UETCL.
One fully retractable (within the defined height limits) mast shall be provided and secured
into a suitable position along one side of the substation trailers. For the safe storage of the
supervisory mast, the retracting jack shall be lockable, and fitted with a warning alarm /
signal in tractor cabin in the event of attempted towing when out-of-towing position above the
deck of the trailers (deck height typically 1m), and/or unlocked.
The second fully retractable mast shall be provided the receiving substation installation. A
safe storage compartment shall be provided within the MV Panel Trailer, for the securing and
storage of this mast. The mounting and installation accessories shall take into consideration
that this mast maybe be mounted on a pole or gantry structure at the receiving station.
2.5.13 Road Tools:

The trailers shall be equipped with all the necessary tools and other equipment that may be
required when the unit is put into service. This equipment shall include appropriate wheel
chocks (four) and a set of regulation warning triangles.
2.5.14 Wheels and “Lock-Nuts”:

The trailers operational wheels shall be affixed by means of the theft deterrent fasteners. Two
standard spare wheels shall be fitted to the trailers. The spare wheels shall similarly be
suitably locked, with theft deterrent “lock-nuts”.
2.5.15 Hydraulic Jack and Jacking Points:

A suitable jack shall be provided that is accessible from ground level, and operable by a
single person. All the jacking points on the trailers in order to effect wheel replacement shall
be clearly marked for easy identification. The jacking system must be positioned and
designed to ensure the stability of the trailers throughout the jacking process.
2.5.16 Trailer Indicating Lights:

A full set of indicating lights shall be fitted in accordance with the National Road Traffic Act.
The lights are to be LED clusters for tail/brake lights and direction change indicators.
Periphery light along the trailers chassis shall also be provided.
2.6 Operational Lights:

The trailers shall each be fitted with at least four (4) 400W LED/HPS operational luminaires,
positioned to provide adequate lighting over the entire substation. These lights should be
positioned facing away from coolers so as not to attract insects, which could reduce heat-
exchanger efficiency. These lamps shall be controlled via a suitable weather-proof light
switch fed from the MCB, situated in the AC distribution board. (Refer to section 12.0 for
further aux supply details.)
Highly reliable and efficient DC lighting shall be provided for the indoor and in each
operating panel. This lighting shall be LED clusters. This lighting shall also function as
emergency lighting. The power source is 110 VDC from the DC distribution board. A door
limit switch must be fitted, that disconnects the lights when the cubicle is closed. The
Supplier is to specify the load requirements of the lights and put this in consideration while in
the sizing of the batteries.
2.7 Trailer Earthing

2.7.1 General:
All equipment shall be appropriately earthed (grounded) directly to the integral steelwork of
the trailers, for an asymmetrical fault current magnitude of 40kA for 3 seconds. Where
necessary, galvanized steel straps or similar, may be used for earthing equipment to the
trailers superstructure. All equipment must be earthed, at minimum, at two points for
redundancy purposes. Each point should be capable of carrying the full fault current for 3
second.
2.7.2 Earthing Attachment Points:

Six portable earth attachment points shall be provided for the purpose of connecting flexible
earth leads to an existing substation or tower earth electrode or earthing spikes.
For information: It will generally be unfeasible to establish adequate earthing for moderate
to high fault levels, in order to limit ground potentials to within safe limits for operational
personnel in the vicinity. Therefore, an “equipotential” surface is to be established around the
trailer’s in-service position e.g. diamond mesh fence on ground surface.
A floating perimeter fence (not connected to Main trailer) will restrict access to the area of
potentially high ground surface potentials. Furthermore, the main trailer shall be design to
always be connected to adjacent power line structures where practicable.
2.7.3 Operational Earthing:

Earthing of HV line, transformer and trailing cables shall be provided through the integral
earthing devices (switches) of the HV and MV switchgear.
In addition to the integral earthing, external earthing points for portable earths shall be
required. These earthing connection points shall comply with UETCL Safety Guidelines
Manual, and shall be indicated on the general arrangement drawing of the mobile transformer.
For air insulated connections between equipment, earthing pegs, in accordance with IEC,
shall be installed to facilitate portable earthing connections.
2.7.4 Safety Rails and Steps

Any operating platform, located at an elevated level, provided in the overall design of the
substation, for the purposes of gaining access to specific equipment (e.g. protection / control
operating panels, etc.), shall be fitted with stainless steel or powder-coated galvanized mild
steel safety rails that are an integral feature of the operating deck.
Any permanent or portable steps provided to facilitate access to the elevated operating deck,
shall comply with the relevant requirements for ‘Elevated Work Surfaces’.
3 Power Transformer
Except for mobile application specific details, the power transformer shall comply with
UETCL existing requirements for large power transformers up to 132kV, in the rating range
of 20 MVA to 80 MVA
3.1 General Properties

The mechanical and electrical design of the transformers shall be based on the site and road
conditions of Uganda, and in line with IEC 60076. The transformer shall be capable of
operating continuously at any tap position within the temperature rise limit. The windings of
the transformer shall be of Electrolytic copper of a high conductivity (class A, in accordance
with IEC) and insulation material of high quality (full hybrid) shall be used.
The insulation material of windings and connections shall be free from insulation
compositions subject to softening, shrinking of collapsing during service. None of the
material used shall disintegrate, carbonize or become brittle under the action of hot oil, under
all load conditions.
The coils must be capable of withstanding movement and distortion caused by abnormal
operating conditions and trailers movements. Adequate barriers shall be provided between
windings and core as well as between high voltage and medium voltage windings. All leads
or bars from the windings to the bushing configurations shall be rigidly supported. Stresses on
coils and connections must be avoided. The HV neutral point shall be insulated to withstand
at least 33% of the HV line terminal power frequency withstand voltage, and solidly earthed
through a HV Neutral Earth Surge Arrestor.
The MV neutral point shall be insulated to withstand the MV line terminal power frequency
withstand voltage, and solidly earthed through a MV Neutral Earth Surge Arrestor.
The transformer tanks shall as much as possible be of the upper flange type with bolted cover
and a reinforced bottom. Lifting lugs shall be provided on the cover as well as traverses under
the bottom as a mounting base. Adequate earthing terminal of adequate sizing shall be
provided at the bottom of the transformer tank.
3.2 Ratings and Operating Conditions

3.2.1 Power Rating
The transformer shall be of 25 MVA continuous rating, at each of the windings and shall
operate on the principal tapping at a voltage equal to nominal system voltage Un, without
exceeding the temperature rise limits specified in this specification.
3.2.2 Current Rating

The rated current shall correspond to the rated power at rated voltage on the principal tap.
3.2.3 Emergency Current Rating

The Power Transformer shall have overloading capabilities in accordance with IEC 60354
and shall not be less than the following:
1.3 pu for 120 minutes
These capabilities shall be verified by type testing at 1.5 pu and 1.3 pu currents.
3.2.4 Voltage Rating on Principal Tapping

The rated voltage of each winding of the transformer on the principal tapping is specified in
the technical schedule and, shall correspond to the system nominal voltage Un. The system
highest voltages (Um) will be 1.1 Un
3.2.5 Maximum Continuous Voltage on Any Tapping (Over flux)

Regardless of the actual location of the tapings in the HV winding, the rated voltage of the
HV winding on any tapping shall be assumed to be equal to the rated voltage on the MV
winding of the transformer, multiplied by the voltage ratio on that tapping.
On any tapping the continuous voltages on the bus bars to which and the windings of the
transformer are connected, will not exceed 1.1 times the rated voltage of the particular
winding on that tapping, and thus giving rise to a maximum continuous over flux of 0.1 pu.
3.2.6 No-Load Losses and Current

All core, shunts and construction parts shall be designed to withstand the fluxing conditions
resulting from the continuous and temporary over voltage conditions as well as frequency
deviations. The no-load losses and the no-load current shall be measured as well as at an
agreed over flux condition to demonstrate compliance with this specification.
3.2.7 Maximum Temporary Overvoltage

Under switching conditions, the power frequency line voltage may exceed the maximum
system voltage (Um). The transformers shall be designed to withstand the following over
voltages without damage.
* 1.00 Um for continuous;
* 1.05 Um for 5 min;
* 1.25 Um for 5 s;
* 1.5 Um for 1 s; and
* 1.7 Um for 0.25 s.
3.2.8 Network Frequency

The transformer shall be designed for a rated frequency of 50 Hz ± 2 Hz. The operation of
under frequency relays on the UETCL grid is instantaneous, no time delay is set in the relays.
3.2.9 Short-Circuits
With reference to IEC 60076-5, the transformer shall be capable of withstanding the thermal,
mechanical and other effects of the following maximum fault levels for 3 s duration per fault
incident:
a) Three-phase bolted fault on any set of terminals assuming the fault level(s) on the
remaining sets of terminals is that given in the Technical Schedules.
b) Line-to-ground fault on any terminal assuming the fault level(s) on the remaining
terminals is that given in Technical Schedules.
The Purchaser reserves the right to obtain all information regarding calculations and the
philosophy of dealing with the short-circuit forces. In the absence of such tests the
manufacturer shall demonstrate with internationally accepted design calculations that the
transformer meets the requirements for short-circuit strength.
3.2.10 Impedance and Tolerances

The leakage impedance of the transformer main power windings on any tapping, at 75°C and
50Hz, shall be limited to 10%. The permissible range of impedance is 10 – 14%, as given in
the technical schedules, and this applies to all manufacturing tolerances.
All impedances and impedance ranges shall be referred to the nominal impedance of the
transformer. Therefore, the impedance on any tapping shall be the impedance in ohms as
viewed from the higher voltage terminals.
3.2.11 Tapping Ranges

The transformer is a double wound transformer and shall require and on-load tap changer of a
range of +5 % to -15 % of the HV voltage in 16 steps of 1.25 % each and, impedance ratio
MAX/MIN of 14/10.
3.2.12 Acoustic Noise

The transformer, tap changing equipment and supplementary cooling equipment noise levels
shall not exceed 70dB, and will be verified in accordance with IEC 60551.
3.2.13 Clearances in Air

When assembled with connections as in service, electrical clearances in air shall be adequate
to withstand the assigned impulse withstand test voltages. This shall be demonstrated by the
impulse voltage tests, during the performance of which all relevant fittings shall be in
position as for service conditions.
Care shall be taken to ensure that fittings are located so as not to interfere with the external
connection to the HV bushing terminals, and the clearance to such connections shall not be
less than the appropriate minimum phase-to-earth clearance given in table 2.
Table 2: Electrical clearances in air

System highest Min. phase-to- Min. vertical “X”-Dimension “Y”-Dimension
voltage earth clearance working
clearance from (2,5 x L)
Um “L” ground level to (L + 3000)
live metal (*Min 3000mm)
(kV) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
36 430 2930 3000 3430
145 1600 3700 3000 4200
1. Dimension not applicable to standard bushings per se
2. The minimum distance from the transformer base or ground level to the flange base of a
bushing (or surge arrester) shall be 2500mm.
3.2.14 Transformer Design Parameters:

The basic design boundary parameters for the 25 MVA 132/33–11kV YNyn0 plant are
detailed in the schedules. This transformer shall be considered to be the worst case
transformer from a mass perspective, and hence give a starting point for the design of the
vehicle. This shall also indicate the typical design values that should be considered in the
design of the transformer.
3.2.15 Insulation:
Full Hybrid (high temperature) Insulation system of Thermal Class 155 is preferred (i.e.
thermally upgraded paper and conventional transformer mineral oil), although “netting”
insulation with similar thermal class, is also acceptable. The aforementioned insulation
system will only be feasible when implemented in conjunction with an appropriate cooling
design (typically pumped and directed oil to control hot spot temperatures).
Meta- aramide insulation materials may be required for large transformers. Proprietary
insulation materials such as “Nomex” shall not be accepted.
3.2.16 Terminations onto Switchgear:

The HV switchgear shall be suitably connected by air insulation with the power transformer
line terminals. The MV switchgear shall also be suitably connected by connex plugs (or
equivalent) and power cables, onto the power transformer line terminal.
The MV side arrangement shall be such that:

1. The power transformer MV main terminals – to – MV GIS Switchgear shall be by
trail 33kV 2 X 400 mm2 copper XLPE power cable, with cable connections achieved
by type C connex / plug bushings (Each run suitable for 15MVA Current Rating, at
11kV Voltage Configuration).

2. The MV GIS Power Transformer Switchgear – to – MV GIS Feeder switchgear shall
be GIS switchgear bus coupler (incomer) breaker with two adjacent feeder/outgoing
panel configuration.
3. MV GIS Switchgear – to – out-of-plant-feeder terminals shall be by trail 33kV 1 X
400 mm2 copper XLPE power cable, with cable connections to the feeder switchgear
achieved by type C connex / plug bushings (Each run suitable for 15MVA Current
Rating, at 11kV Voltage Configuration).
4. The power transformer MV main terminals – to – AUX transformer MV main
terminals shall be by trail 33kV 1 X 95mm2 copper XLPE power cable, with cable
connections achieved by type C connex / plug bushings.
These connex bushings shall be suitably rated plug-in (connex) screened, separable type,
interfacing with type C connex plugs.
Note: For avoidance of doubt, cables shall be connected to the switchgear and MV terminals
by plug-in terminations. All accessories for medium-voltage power cables shall be rated up to
40kV. The type C connex bushings shall be of UV-stable material or cycloaliphatic, suitable
for outdoor applications.
Connections to the power transformer and switchgear shall be by 400 mm 2 copper XLPE
single core trail cables, through type C connex, screened, separable plug bushings on the
switchgear and power transformer for this connection.
Connections to the AUX TX transformer shall be by 95 mm2 copper XLPE single core trail
cables, through type C connex, screened, separable plug bushings on the AUX TX and power
transformer for this connection.
The plugs on the power transformer shall be clearly labelled for the AUX TX and
TRANSFORMER BAY. All must be sized at 95 and 400 mm2, respectively. The connections
on either equipment shall be protected by a suitable protective cover/enclosure (Cable Box),
where applicable.
If the AUX TX is mounted on the goose-neck of the main trailer, a suitable flexible
arrangement for the cables shall be provided. The cables shall typically be rubber covered to
improve flexibility.
3.2.17 Transformer Replacement:

The transformer may not form part of the main trailer superstructure or be utilized as a
stressed member. That is, the main trailer should be able to be transported without the
transformer. The design should facilitate the removal, and replacement if required, of the
transformer with another unit.
3.2.18 MV (33-11kV) Voltage Ratio Selection:

Voltage ratio selection shall be by means of an off-load selector switch. The selection shall be
provided via an external, positive and definitive selection switch. The selector switch shall
incorporate mechanical stops, and be supplied complete with suitably robust limit switches
that shall provide electrical indication of the voltage selected in the control panel, to facilitate
electrical interlocking functionality, and initiate a ‘TRIP’ signal to the master relay, should
the selector switch be operated inadvertently whilst the mobile substation is in service. The
switch shall include a facility for being locked e.g. padlock or otherwise approved. An
interchangeable link system shall not be accepted.
All selection chambers / covers must be clearly marked with corrosion resistant engraved,
punched or embossed metal labels. Also the specification for tightening down the covers
(tightening order and torque) should be indicated on the lid.
3 . 2 . 1 9 Temperature Indicators:
Winding, oil and ambient temperatures shall be measured and available for transmission via
SCADA. A Mechanical Winding Temperature gauge and Optical |Fiber temperature probe
system shall be fitted as backup to the Digital Winding & Oil Temperature Gauges.
ALL winding and oil temperature indicators shall be mounted in a weatherproof cubicle (MIB
- marshalling interface box) on the side of the transformer tank. The enclosure shall be visible
from ground level. Optical fiber temperature probes shall be installed at the identified
hotspots – a minimum of two sensors per winding (HV and MV windings) shall be installed
together with corresponding gauges and accessories.
3.2.20 Oil Level Indicators, Alarm and Signaling Devices

3.2.20.1 General
The oil level in conservators shall be clearly indicated when viewed from ground level by an
oil level gauge (of the magnetically coupled type) fitted to the conservator tanks. The output
functions shall be hardwired to the MIB and SCADA. The indicators shall be suitable for the
bag type conservators (COPS).
The breaking of the gauge glass shall not expose the oil to the atmosphere. The buoyancy of
the floating element shall be due to its relative density and shall not depend on the sealing of
a hollow float. The materials used shall be unaffected by the hot (flash point temperature)
transformer oil in the long term, and the vibration of the transformer shall not produce wear
and damage to the mechanism of the indicator.
3.2.20.2 Range of Indication

The oil level indication shall be continuous over the range of top oil temperature from 0°C to
+115°C. The level of oil in the conservator corresponding with the –10°C index shall be not
less than 25 mm above the transformer feed pipe entry.
3.2.21 Graduation of Indicator

The oil level indicator on the oil conservator connected to the tanks shall bear the following
markings:
 In dial-type, the words "FULL" and "EMPTY” shall be appropriately placed. (Indicator
pointers shall move from "Empty" to "Full" in the clockwise direction).
 Graduations indicating the normal oil levels at oil temperatures of 15°C, 30°C, 45°C,
60°C, 75°C and 90°C.
3.2.21.1 Mounting
Oil level indicators shall be arranged for front end mounting without requiring access to the
inside of the oil conservator or chambers.
3.2.21.2 Low and high level alarms

A pair of circuit-closing, potential free, for both the low and high oil level alarm signaling
contacts shall be provided in each compartment. These contacts shall be set to close at the
0°C and before the oil is pushed into the overflow pipe.
3.2.21.3 Surge Pressure Relay:

A Buchholz twin float relay shall be supplied, whose design and type shall be according to
IEC. A pressure relief device shall be supplied and fitted laterally to the transformer.
3.2.22 Impact recorder:

A permanent impact recorder (accelerometer) installation together with the interrogation
software shall be included in accordance with IEC. The impact recorder shall be inspected as
part of the commissioning procedure, and throughout the lifecycle of the Substation.
The supply to the permanent impact recorder shall be suitable for the function (lifetime
rechargeable using plant auxiliary supply), and the measured impact recording and
malfunctions shall be available on plant and for transmission via SCADA.
3.2.23 Marshalling interface box:

Suitably rated terminals, configured in a conventional terminal block arrangement per the
UETCL requirements shall be provided in an MIB of IP55, enclosed in a suitably size IP65
rated weatherproof, air conditioned enclosure with other cubicles. The terminal blocks shall
all be screw clamp insertion terminals are spring loaded.
The MIB shall be mounted as the first control cubicle to facilitate all applicable LV cable
terminations between the MIB and associated equipment, i.e. substation mimic and plant
protection, tap-changer and metering, tele control, AC/DC distribution board and charger, and
110 VDC battery bank cubicles.
3.2.24 Cooling
The power transformer shall be cooled by the directed-oil-flow type (ODAF - Oil Directed,
Air Forced), together with suitable oil/air heat exchangers and supplementary radiators.
3.3 Transformer Oil

3.3.1 Oil Type and Quality
New naphthenic-based oils shall be used. The oil shall be as specified by IEC 60296, and
under no circumstances shall poor quality oil be filled into the transformer and only thereafter
be brought up to specification by circulation within the transformer.
The transformer shall be supplied and shipped with their initial oil filling. The transformer oil
shall be pure mineral oil free from additives and shall be acid-refined with properties
complying with IEC 60296. The Contractor is held responsible to prove the dryness and all
other quantities of the oil before utilization of the plant.
3.3.2 Oil Dielectric Strength

The power frequency dielectric breakdown strength of the oil in any part of the transformer
shall meet the transformer manufacturer's requirement, but shall, in any case, not be less than
70 kV/2,5 mm. Dielectric strength shall be determined in accordance with the method
prescribed in IEC 60156.
3.3.3 Oil Moisture Content

The moisture content of the oil before filling the transformer shall not exceed 10 ppm. Prior
to energizing, the moisture content of the insulating oil shall not exceed 10 ppm in the main
and on-load tap-changer compartment.
The paper oil/paper moisture equilibrium chart shall be applied to the moisture-in-oil results
obtained from a transformer oil sample taken at least 7 days after completing the oil and
impregnation treatment. It shall be demonstrated that the moisture content in the full hybrid
(high temperature) insulation body of the transformer is less than 1 %.
3.3.4 Insulation Test Blocks for Moisture Measurement

Insulation test blocks shall be made of the thickest insulation material used in the transformer
and sized accordingly. At least two test blocks shall be provided, which shall be placed as far
as possible from each other, and fixed in position for easy access through manholes, on the
transformer tank.
The location of the test blocks shall be indicated on a drawing, which shall be part of the
plant manual.
3.3.5 Oil-Filling/Impregnation under Vacuum

The transformer shall be oil-filled under vacuum. Oil impregnation or drying under vacuum
shall be done with the transformer and oil at a temperature of at least 60°C. The duration of
the treatment shall be demonstrated as adequate by means of water measurement with a cold
trap.
Whenever the active full hybrid (high temperature) insulated HV connections, especially
those from the windings to the bushings, are exposed to atmosphere even for only a few
minutes, these shall be re-impregnated under vacuum. Procedures shall be as per IEC
standards and full instructions shall be included in the plant manual.
3.3.6 PCB Content

All oils used in the transformer and its accessories shall be free of PCBs and POPs (zero
ppm). A formal test certificate to this effect shall be included as part of bid and in the plant
manual.
3.3.7 Contact with Bare Copper

Bare copper in contact with transformer oil shall be minimized by using appropriate paper
covering and painting/ coating.
3.4 Oil Conservator Tank and Connections

3.4.1 Capacity
The capacity and design of the oil conservator shall be such that the oil level will not fall
below the top feed pipe to the transformer at a top oil temperature of 0°C and shall, as a
minimum, not overflow at a top oil temperature of 115°C. The transformer shall nevertheless
also be able to carry the overloads specified without overflowing.
3.4.2 Mounting
The conservator shall be part of a closed system, and need not be positioned on the top of the
power transformer tank. The mounting shall also facilitate the complete removal of the
conservator for whatever purpose.
3.4.3 Removable End Cover

The end cover of both compartments shall be attached by a bolted and gasket external flange
to facilitate internal cleaning of the conservator. The covers shall be provided with integral
lifting lugs. The removal of covers shall not be obstructed by pipework or fittings when the in
service.
3.4.4 Isolating/Drain Valves

a) Suitably dimensioned isolating valve shall be attached directly to the outlet of each
conservator compartment by bolted and gasket flanged.
b) Suitably dimensioned double flanged valve shall be provided to fully drain each
conservator compartment. This valve shall be mounted on an extension pipe where
necessary.
3.4.5 Pipework Connections

Pipework connections shall be adequately sized and suitably positioned and shall be as short
and direct as possible. Only radiused elbows shall be used. Installed pipework shall not in
any way obstruct the removal of tap-changers for maintenance, or normal movement of
maintenance staff on routine plant inspections, or general access to any plant accessories.
Gas-venting pipes shall be connected to the final rising pipe to the Buchholz relay as nearly
as possible in an axial direction, on the transformer side of the relay.
3.4.6 Sealed Oil Preservation System

The oil system shall be equipped with a bagged main conservator (COPS). The materials,
design and construction shall take into account the long life expectancy of the transformer.
High and low oil level alarm contacts shall be provided together with the oil level indication.
The COPS system shall not prevent or restrict the normal draining of the conservator or the
flow of oil into the transformer. The oil filling aperture shall be clearly marked to prevent oil
filling into the bag. The system shall be air tight.
The bag shall allow expansion without increasing the pressure or creating a partial vacuum
over the full specified temperature range. The rating and diagram plate shall bear a warning
statement that the conservator is fitted with a bag (COPS). The plant manual shall give clear
instructions on the filling, operation, maintenance, testing and replacement of the bag.
3.5 Dehydrating Breathers

3.5.1 General
The dehydrating breather the main tank and diverter compartment shall be maintenance free
type. No single breather shall carry a silica gel charge in excess of 12.5 kg. Where the
required quantity exceeds this mass it shall be subdivided into a sufficient number of
individual compartments arranged in parallel.
Unless otherwise approved, a desiccating breather using cobalt impregnated silica gel,
complying with BS 3523, shall be provided. The silica gel charges contained in the
dehydrating breathers shall not be less than 0.3 kg per 1000 litre of total oil content, with a
minimum of 2 kg.
The positioning and proportions of the dehydrating breather shall be such that air inhaled
during starting of oil circulating pumps shall receive adequate dehydration and shall be such
that the oil in the atmospheric seal shall not be drawn into the breather unit(s) during this
operation, nor blown out of the oil seal during the operation of stopping the oil circulating
pumps.
3.5.2 Containing of the Silica Gel Charge

The silica gel charge shall preferably be contained in a transparent and independent container
of weatherproof, UV and heat resistant (up to 115°C) material.
3.5.3 Visual Inspection of the Desiccant

Unless the container for the silica gel charge is transparent, an inspection window of at least
50 mm wide shall be provided to allow inspection of the color and condition of the silica gel.
The inspection window shall be positioned to make the desiccant visible at both ends and for
the full length of each cartridge. Windows or containers shall be weatherproof, UV and heat
resistant (up to 115°C), and protected using metal grids.
3.5.4 Castings
Where cast components are used they shall be high quality, non-porous castings.
3.5.5 Corrosion Proofing

Corrosion shall be eliminated by the use, wherever possible, of non-corrodible materials, and
by avoiding the contact of dissimilar metals.
3.5.6 Mounting and Pipework Connections

Connection shall be made to a point in the oil conservator not less than 50 mm above the
maximum working oil level (i.e. top oil temperature 115°C), by means of a pipe of
appropriate diameter and supports. Connecting pipes shall be securely cleated to the
transformer, in such a manner as to eliminate undesirable vibration and noise.
3.6 Windings and Connections

3.6.1 Bracing of windings
All winding insulation shall be processed to ensure that there will be no detrimental shrinkage
after assembly. Windings shall be provided with clamping arrangements that will distribute
the clamping forces evenly over the ends of the winding.
Unless otherwise approved, winding clamping arrangements shall permit adjustment of the
pressure and the taking up of shrinkage that may occur in service. The bracing of the
windings and connections shall be such that these parts shall safely withstand the cumulative
effects of stresses that may occur during handling, transportation, and service, including line-
to-line and line-to-ground faults.
Full details of the winding clamping arrangements, and their adjustment in or out of the tank,
together with relevant drawings and values, shall be provided for review during the design
stage and shall form part of the plant manual.
3.6.2 Methods of Making Winding Connections

All connections shall be rounded off to prevent sharp edges
3.6.3 Soldered and Brazed Connections

Soft solder shall not be used in making winding connections. If brazed connections are used
all traces of acidity shall be eliminated on completion of the process.
3.6.4 Welded Connections and Joints in Winding Body

All welded copper connections shall be made by the metal-inert gas method or other
internationally recognized method. This applies particularly to conductor joints in the body of
windings. All such joints shall be properly controlled by internationally recognized quality
control procedure.
3.6.5 Bolted Connections

The mating faces of bolted connections shall be appropriately finished and prepared for
achieving good, long lasting, electrically stable and remarkable contacts. All nuts shall be
locked by standard machined lock nuts, or by using internationally recognised locking plates.
3.6.6 Crimped Connections and Other Methods

Connections made by "compression" and "cold-welding" techniques may be used where the
particular method as per IEC standards. All lugs for crimping shall be the correct size for the
conductors.
3.6.7 Winding Terminations onto Bushings

Winding termination interfaces with bushings integration shall be designed to allow for
repeatable and safe connection under site conditions without jeopardizing the in-service
integrity of the transformer.
The winding-end termination, insulation system and transport fixings shall be so designed
that the integrity of the insulation system is not easily compromised during repeated work in
this area.
Allowances shall be made for accommodating up to 100 mm tolerances on bushing axial

dimensions and the fact that bushings may have to be rotated to get oil level inspection
gauges to face in a direction that allow easy inspection from ground level.
In particular rotation or straining of insulated connections shall be avoided during the

fastening of conductor pads from the winding onto the termination surfaces of the bushing.
Suitable inspection and access facilities into the tank shall be provided to minimize the
possibility of creating faults during the installation of Neutral bushings or termination of the
line terminals.
Note: The MV line terminals shall be suitably connected by connex plugs onto the MV
switchgear systems
3.6.8 Insulation Tests, Fault and Creepage Levels

The table 3, below specifies the insulation levels that apply for the various voltage levels.
3.6.9 Winding Current Density:

The winding current density shall be approximately 7A/mm2 so as to reduce the copper mass.
3.6.10 Vector group:

The transformer shall have vector group of (YN0yn0) with switched MV (33-11kV), in order
to maintain interconnection compatibility with existing networks, while limiting the size and
weight.
Table 3: Minimum Insulation, Fault and Creepage Levels for the Power Transformers
Highest System System fault Lightning impulse voltage at 60s power frequency Creepage over external
system nominal level sea level withstand test at sea level insulation for line terminals
voltage Um voltage Un (phase-to-neutral) according to IEC
(kV r.m.s.) (kV r.m.s.) (kA) (kV peak) (kV r.m.s.) (mm)
Neutral
Neutral Line terminal terminals Heavy Very heavy
Line terminal
terminal (Induced) (Separate pollution pollution
source)
36 - 12 33 - 11 40 170 170 75 75 900 1400
145 132 31.5 650 250X 275 95X 2900 4900
Bushing insulation All bushings shall have insulation levels 10% in excess of transformer’s requirement.
Non-Uniform insulation: X : Partially graded insulation
Note: Phase-to-phase values specified in this table for all transformer windings shall be designed to withstand the appropriate tests voltages
and shall be tested as specified in 5.6.2.
44 Section VII. Schedule of Requirements
3.7 Voltage Variation and Control

3.7.1 Tapping Ranges
The on-load tap changer of a range of +5 % to -15 % of the HV voltage in 16 steps of 1.25
% shall be installed in the HV series winding. The make shall either be MR Germany or
equivalent.
3.7.2 On-Load Tap-Changing Equipment

On-load tap-changing equipment shall:
a. Either is MR Germany or equivalent.
b. Comply with IEC 60214;
c. Be of the Dr Jansen type; and
d. Be designed for over 100, 000 operations prior to contact replacement or
overhaul.
e. Be a vacuum bottle type
3.7.3 Current Ratings

The rated through current of the tap-changer as defined in 4.17 of IEC 60214, shall not be
less than that resulting from the highest value of continuous maximum load in the tapping
winding of the transformer.
The tap changer shall be able to operate at the emergency and overload ratings of the
transformer without damage. Tap changing shall be inhibited during transformer overload
conditions above 1.2 p.u. but shall be designed to operate beyond conditions of 1.5 p.u.
3.7.4 Short-circuit Currents

In addition to the requirements of 8.3 of IEC 60214 for on-load tap changers tap changing
equipment shall be capable of carrying the same currents, due to external short-circuit, as
the HV transformer winding.
3.7.5 Insulation Level

Notwithstanding the requirements of 8.6 and table V of IEC 60214, the on-load tap
changer equipment, including all insulating and barrier boards, shall withstand the impulse
and dielectric test voltages applicable to the HV winding.
3.7.6 Design of the Tap-Changer

The current breaking contacts of diverter switches shall be easily replaceable. Current
breaking switches (e.g. diverter and selector switches as distinct from tap selectors and
change-over selectors) shall not operate in the insulating oil of the main transformer.
Each body shall have its own oil conservator compartment, oil and gas-tight system,
separate maintenance free dehydrating breather and oil level indicator that shall be clearly
labelled to relate it to the corresponding oil body.
The protective functions provided for diverter switch and if applicable for the selector
switch compartments, shall include low oil level (may be omitted if a surge relay, that
fulfils this function, is provided) and oil surge. These functions shall be by either two
protection devices or alternatively one device with two sets of contacts.
3.7.7 Buchholz Relay for Selector Compartment

Where tap selectors and changeover selectors are contained in compartments separate
from current breaking switches, those compartments shall be protected by the Buchholz
relay serving the main transformer tank.
3.7.8 Strength of Tap-Changer Compartments and Insulating Barriers

Tap-changer compartments and insulating barriers shall have adequate strength to resist,
without suffering significant permanent distortion or damage of any sort, the forces
resulting from the application of a full internal vacuum at sea level.
3.7.9 Driving Mechanism, Control and Indicating Equipment

The driving mechanism shall be enclosed in a ventilated IP55 cubicle provided with a
230VAC socket, anti-condensation heater, 110 VDC drives and controls. The automatic /
manual mode of the on-load tap-changer shall be possible remotely, from the AVR control
cubicle and SCADA.
3.7.10 Design of Driving Mechanism: Synchronism and Limit Stops

The driving mechanism shall be designed to ensure that the diverter switch or selector
switch contacts do not remain in an intermediate position should the power supply for the
driving unit fail. The design shall include means to ensure that tap-changers fitted to units
operating in parallel, remain in step.
Mechanical and electrical stops shall be provided to prevent the mechanism from
overrunning end position.
3.7.11 Manual Operation

For maintenance and emergency operation of the tap-changing equipment, detachable
handle shall be provided for manual operation. Adequate provision shall be made to
prevent the diverter switch or selector switch contacts being left in an intermediate
position when operated manually.
To prevent power operation with the handle in position, a normally closed contact in the
control or motor circuits shall be provided that opens when the handle is inserted. The tap-
changer driving mechanism shall be accessible from ground level.
The tapping positions shall be indelibly marked to correspond with the data given on the
rating-and-diagram plate and these markings shall be legible by a person operating the
driving mechanism at ground level.
3.7.12 Electrical operation

Control relays shall only respond to control initiation pulses of 150 ms duration or longer.
All controls shall be rated 110 VDC. A tap-changer drive motor rated at 110 VDC. Only
motors with continuously rated starting windings will be acceptable.
3.7.13 Tap-in-progress indication

A "tap in progress" indication contact shall be provided.
3.7.14 Circuit-breaker for motor protection

A circuit breaker fitted with thermal overload protection and a separate DC shunt trip coil
shall be provided. The trip coil shall be provided with a contact to break its own current if
the coil rating exceeds 50 W. The trip coil rating in watts shall be stated on the OLTC
drive schematic diagram.
3.7.15 Protection of tap changer during system faults

A self-resetting contactor shall be provided in the motor circuit for overcurrent blocking of
the tap-changer drive under system fault conditions. The contactor shall be fitted with an
operating coil, and normally closed contacts capable of interrupting motor starting
currents. Contactors with normally open contacts that require the coil to be continuously
energized shall not be accepted.
Note: - In the case of drive motors, with a starting or running current that will not at any
time exceed 5 A, this contactor will not be required.
3.7.16 Local Control

"Raise" and "Lower" push-buttons or a control switch for the local control, mechanically
or electrically interlocked, shall be provided in the drive motor unit and the AVR control
cubicle, and shall be connected to separate terminals for use in the remote control scheme.
3.7.17 "Raise and Lower" Motor Operating Contactors

"Raise and "Lower" contactors for controlling motor direction shall be provided
3.7.18 Step-by-Step and Parallel Operation

The manufacturer shall provide and install all the appropriate equipment and circuitry
inside the driving mechanism to perform within the mechanism box the full step-by-step
and parallel mode function.
3.7.19 Tap Position Indication, Supervision and Monitoring

Two sets of BCD coded voltage free contacts shall be provided. One set shall be used for
tap position indication, while the other for parallel mode out-of-step checks. The contact
state shall be as indicated in the table below:
Table 4: Contact state at each tap position

Position 20 10 8 4 2 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 0 0 0 1 0 0
5 0 0 0 1 0 1
6 0 0 0 1 1 0
7 0 0 0 1 1 1
8 0 0 1 0 0 0
9 0 0 1 0 0 1
10 0 1 0 0 0 0
11 0 1 0 0 0 1
12 0 1 0 0 1 0
13 0 1 0 0 1 1
14 0 1 0 1 0 0
15 0 1 0 1 0 1
16 0 1 0 1 1 0
17 0 1 0 1 1 1
18 0 1 1 0 0 0
19 0 1 1 0 0 1
20 1 0 0 0 0 0
21 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 = contact open 1 = contact closed
These may take the form of either a change-over switch that change position indication at
the end of each tap change operation or a multi-position rotary switch with as many
contacts as there are taps on the transformer. These switches shall be of the break-before-
make type.
3.7.20 Maximum and Minimum Tap Position Indicators

Maximum and minimum tap position indicators arranged for manual resetting shall be
fitted to the driving mechanism to register the operating range encountered in service.
3.7.21 Operation counters

Externally visible mechanical counters (e.g. cyclometers) shall be provided to register the
number of tap-change operations. These recorders shall have at least five digits and shall
have no provision for resetting. These counters shall be suitable for at least 106
operations. This shall be supported by a type test certificate.
3.7.22 Tap Changer Outline Drawings and Schematic Diagrams

The main features of tap-changers, including the fittings and protective devices specified,
shall be indicated on the transformer outline drawings.
Transformer on-load tap changer drive schematic diagrams showing the rating in watts of
the VDC shunt trip coils fitted to the driving motor circuit breakers shall be included in
plant manual. These shall include chart showing the relative timing of all contacts during
both a regular tapping steps and transition step.
3.7.23 Tap Position Numbering

The tap positions shall be numbered so that an increase in tap position number represents
an increase in the controlled or outgoing voltage. Controlled secondary voltage is defined
as the voltage that is changed as a result of the change in tapings.
Note: Transition steps that give the same outgoing voltage should all take the same tap
position number, distinguished in each instance by a lower case letter; e.g. 9(a), 9(b) and
9(c) where there are three transition steps.
3.7.24 Tap-Change Scheme

An automatic voltage regulation scheme shall be implemented. The scheme shall
accommodate the parallel operation of at least two transformers using both same tap
position and circulating current schemes.
Circulating currents scheme shall ensure that the circulating currents between the
transformers are kept to a minimum. The regulated voltage setting, dead band setting,
circulating current setting and time delay shall all be adjustable.
The following control functions shall be provided on plant panel and to SCADA for tele-
control:
a) Auto/Manual operation
b) “Raise”
c) “Lower”
d) Master/Slave/independent operation
The following indication shall be provided on plant panel and to SCADA for tele-control:
a) tap position
b) Tap change in progress
c) Tap change failed
d) Transformers out of step
Tap-change shall be programmed for high speed switch mode when system voltage falls
below 95% or above 105% and inhibited if the system voltage falls below 80% or above
120%.
3.8 Transformer Tank

3.8.1 Plant Mass
The transformer mass shall be the largest factor that determines the vehicle design. The
maximum transformer mass shall as much as possible be restricted to approximately 40,
000 kg in order to allow the preferred vehicle to be utilized.
3.8.2 Transformer Dimensions:

The transformer Neutral connections will be by means of a laterally mounted polymer /
silicon composite bushing to achieve the preferred 4300m overall height (maximum height
< 4600mm).
The maximum transformer width is defined by the vehicle limitations (see annex II and
III) and shall not exceed 3.2 meters.
Note: Since the conservator is part of a closed system, it need not necessarily be
positioned on the top of the power transformer tank, and may be located on the side of the
tank.
3.8.3 Materials and Welding

Unless otherwise approved, metal plate, bar and sections for fabrication shall comply with
BS 4360: Welding shall comply with BS 5135. Welds exposed to the atmosphere shall be
continuous. Dye-penetrant tests shall be carried out on load bearing joints. All sharp edges
shall be rounded in the manufacturing process prior to coating.
3.8.4 Corrosion Protection and Paint Finish

The interior and exterior surfaces of the plant shall be either abrasive blast-cleaned or
pickled, rinsed and dried immediately, prior to coating, shall be free from rust, grease, oil
and moisture. Abrasive blast cleaning shall only be used where the thickness of the steel
plate is 3 mm or greater.
Special attention shall be given to the surface preparation of the welded areas of the covers
and tank rims of sealed transformers. All spatter, slag and flux shall be removed and the
areas cleaned back to bare metal immediately. After the surfaces have been blast-cleaned,
a coating shall be applied before contamination or oxidation of the surfaces can occur.
3.8.5 Coating of Interior Surfaces

The interior surfaces of the tank, the cover and the cooling equipment shall be clean and
dry immediately prior to filling the transformer with oil. Interior surfaces (other than those
of cooling tubes and headers) above a line that lies at least 50 mm below the oil level that
corresponds to an oil temperature of 20°C shall be corrosion- protected by varnishing,
priming or painting, using materials that are not affected by, or will not adversely affect
the electrical or chemical properties of the insulating oil.
3.8.6 External Surfaces: Color, Corrosion Proofing and Finishing

All external surfaces, including the oil conservators shall be finished with an outer coat of
enamel of color of light pebble grey - RAL7032.
3.9 Tank Construction

3.9.1 Shape
The shape of the transformer tank and fittings, including the under base shall be such that
no water can be retained at any point on their external surfaces. Furthermore, the lid on the
inside shall be shaped to ensure that all free gas generated inside the transformer escapes
to the conservator by way of the gas and oil actuated relay.
3.9.2 Cooling Corrugations

Corrugated tanks shall not be accepted.
3.9.3 Guides for Core and Winding Assembly

Guides shall be provided inside the transformer tank to correctly locate the core and
winding assembly in the tank.
3.10 Tank Strength and Oil Tightness

3.10.1 Rigidity
The plant and associated components shall have adequate mechanical strength and rigidity
to permit the complete plant, filled with oil, to be lifted, jacked and hauled in any
direction, and to be transported without structural damage or impairment of the oil
tightness of the plant and transformer, and without the necessity for the special positioning
of sliding rails in relation to the plant. Tank stiffeners shall not cover welded seams, to
enable the repair of possible oil leaks. The plant as a whole shall be suitable for transport
by low-bed or beam wagon.
3.10.2 Internal Pressure and Vacuum

The transformer tank, complete with all fittings and attachments normally in contact with
the transformer oil, and filled with oil of the specified viscosity, shall withstand the
pressure and the leakage tests. When empty of oil they shall withstand the vacuum test.
In the case of type tests for strength and oil tightness the fittings (e.g. pressure relief
valves) may be tested separately. The ability of the tank to withstand overpressure shall be
coordinated with the pressure relief valves.
3.10.3 Magnetic Flux Effects

The tank and cover shall be designed so that local heating due to stray flux in any
structural part shall not exceed the top oil temperature limit specified for the transformer,
by more than 10°C. Heating due to stray flux, shall also not cause local temperature
elevations of more than 15°C relative to the oil temperature at that level. Thermometer
pockets shall be located so as to avoid errors in temperature indication due to the heating
effects resulting from stray flux.
3.10.4 Under Base

The under base shall be suitable for the movement of the plant in any direction, by sliding
on greased rails, and shall be provided with four hauling eyes of appropriate diameter, as
near as possible to the extremities of the length and width of the tank with not less than
100 mm working clearance above them.
Fabricated bases shall not retain water. The position of the axial and transverse center
lines shall be accurately stamped onto the tank at the base level, on both sides and at both
ends, and indicated by means of a red enameled mark at each point.
Table 5: Minimum thickness of tank base plates mild steel

Length of tank (m) Minimum plate thickness (mm)
Fabricated bases,
Not exceeding 2.5 10
Exceeding 2.5 12
Flat bases,
Not exceeding 2.5 12
Over 2.5 but less than 5.0 20
Over 5.0 but less than 7.5 26
Exceeding 7.5 32
3.10.5 Jacking Pads

Four or more suitably and symmetrically placed jacking pads shall be provided in
positions that shall be accessible when the transformer is on the trailer. Each jacking pad
shall be designed to support, with an adequate factor of safety at least half of the total
mass of the plant filled with oil, allowing maximum possible misalignment of the jacking
force in relation to the center of the working surface.
3.11 Pressure Relief Devices

The pressure relief device shall be supplied and fitted laterally to the transformer, and
shall be a spring operated device. The device shall:
a. Maintain oil tightness under oil pressure equal to the static operating head of oil plus
20kPa;
b.Attain full opening in not more than 2.5ms when subjected to an internal pressure
impulse equal to the static operating head of oil plus 50 kPa;
c. Be capable of withstanding full internal vacuum at sea level (101.4 kPa);
d.Fitted with operation indicator plainly visible from ground level with manual resetting;
e. Equipped with normally open contacts that to give indication that the device has
operated, and
f. Have anopening diameter of at least 100 mm.
The device shall be positioned as close as possible to the center phase. A combined
weather guard and oil deflector shall be fitted to ensure the free deflection of the oil
towards the ground.
Despite any testing requirements in this specification the overpressure device shall not be
influenced to generate invalid trip signals by tank vibrations and the magnetic fields
generated during normal operation and through faults.
3.12 Main Tank Covers

3.12.1 Shape
The main cover of the transformer tank may be flat, domed or of the "bell type". Positive
provision shall be made to guide any gas that may be developed toward the Buchholz
relay. This provision shall take into account the possible slopes of the trailer on which the
transformer will be mounted.
The effectiveness of guiding gas in the transformer shall be tested by injection of a known
quantity of gas into bottom drain valve furthest away from the Buchholz relay. In order to
avoid the undesirable and possible dangerous entrapment of gas in the transformer, this
test shall be carried out prior to the final vacuum treatment of the transformer oil.
3.12.2 Lifting
Lifting lugs or eyes shall be provided, and the cover so arranged that it may be lifted and
handled without permanent distortion.
3.12.3 Support
The cover may be supported from, but shall not support, the core and winding assembly.
3.12.4 Gas Venting

The transformer cover, and generally the internal spaces of the transformer and all relevant
oil connections, shall be designed to provide venting of any gas in any part of the
transformer to the gas and oil actuated relay.
3.12.5 Cover Identification

The main tank cover shall have indelibly stamped into its edge, the maker's serial number,
which shall also similarly appear in the adjacent position on the edge of the main tank
flange.
3.12.6 Thermometer Pockets

In addition to the pockets required to house the detecting elements of the dial-type, top oil
temperature indicators specified, a similar thermometer pocket fitted with a captive
flanged screw plug shall be provided and suitably positioned for use with a mercury-in-
glass type check thermometer to verify top-oil temperatures. Thermometer pockets shall
be located so as to avoid errors in temperature indication due to the heating effects
resulting from stray flux.
3.12.7 Currents Flowing In Tank Cover

To allow for the effect of induced loop currents and capacitive surge currents, the tank
cover shall be fixed to the transformer in such a way that good electrical contact is
maintained around the perimeter of the tank. Special care shall be taken in the vicinity of
high current terminals.
3.12.8 Welding Of Cover

Joints, other than those that may have to be separated during transport or for maintenance
in service, shall be welded. The main tank/cover joint shall be welded. A fire-proof gasket
shall be included to prevent foreign matter entering the transformer during welding or un-
welding.
The welded joint shall be designed to permit removal of the weld with minimum damage
to the mating flanges and to leave them suitable for re-welding.
3.13 Gaskets: Types, Material, Re-Tightening and Welding

3.13.1 General
a) All gasket joints shall be designed, manufactured and assembled to ensure long term
leak and maintenance free operation.
b) Gasket joints that need not be removed for normal maintenance or transport shall be
welded.
All costs to maintain the system leak free shall be for the Contractor's account during the
guarantee period. All gasket joints except these specifically excluded below, shall be of
the O-ring and groove type. The O-rings shall be of nitrile rubber or better. The joints that
may be excluded from being O-ring types are:
a) Bolt-on type tap-changers and selector tanks that have to be removed for transport or
maintenance. In these applications rectangular cord and groove joints where the nitrile
rubber cord is not joined but passed twice around the perimeter with the loose ends at
the bottom, are acceptable.
b) Alternatively, a flat nitrile rubber gasket with stoppers to prevent over-compression will
be acceptable.
3.13.2 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be of nitrile rubber or better material. All gaskets or O-rings shall be
replaced after they have been disturbed but designs shall nevertheless be such as to be
forgiving should this not be done.
3.13.3 Attachments to the Transformer Tank

Attachments to the transformer tank shall only be fixed by bolting them to the prepared
flat surface of a flange facing, either integral with or welded to the tank and sealed by a
gasket or O-ring to the mating flange of the attachment. Joints dependent on the sealing of
screw threads and direct welding of fittings to the tank will not be accepted.
3.13.4 Pipe Joints

Oil pipes above 15mm bore shall have flanged gaskets and bolted joints. Flexible
compression joints will not be accepted unless specifically approved. Joints dependent on
the sealing of screw threads will not be accepted.
3.13.5 Drilling Of Pipe Flanges

Except where otherwise stated, the drilling and bolting of pipe flanges and the mating
flanges of fittings shall comply with BS 4504 or DIN 2631.
3.13.6 Access Openings and Covers

An appropriate number of suitably proportioned hand holes and manholes shall be
provided for easy access to the upper portions of the core and windings assembly, the
lower / inner ends of bushings, internal current transformers and the oil side of their
terminal boxes.
3.13.7 Manhole Orientation:

All the manhole covers shall have locating studs to ensure that they are replaced correctly
and are not interchangeable. All bolted parts and assemblies shall be supplied and fitted
with suitable locking devices/fasteners e.g. self-locking nuts, to inhibit equipment from
vibrating loose, whilst in transit or in service.
3.13.8 Handles
Manhole covers shall be provided with stout handles to facilitate their removal.
3.13.9 Lifting Lugs

Covers with a mass greater than 25 kg shall be provided with symmetrically arranged
lifting lugs.
3.14 Valves and Oil Sampling Devices

3.14.1 Isolating Valves
Suitably dimensioned isolating valves shall be provided:
g) At each point of connection to detachable cooling apparatus; and
h) At each point of connection to tap-changer compartments, cable disconnecting
chambers and cable sealing boxes supplied from the transformer tank.
3.14.2 Filtering and Drain Valves

Not less than two suitably dimensioned double-flange valves shall be provided. One valve
shall be located at the top of the tank adjacent to the oil conservator, and another at the
bottom of the tank on the opposite end to give a cross current of oil during filtration. The
lower valve shall be a combined drain and filtering valve and, as such, shall be positioned
so that it drains, as far as possible, all the oil from the transformer tank.
The tap-changer diverter chambers shall be fitted with suitably dimensioned drain valves
for maintenance purposes. If inaccessible from ground level, they shall be piped down to
1.0 m above ground level, clamped along the framework of the plant.
3.14.3 Oil Sampling Devices

An oil sampling device consisting of a flange and drain plug or other approved device
shall be provided in the following locations where applicable:
a) At the bottom of the transformer tank, bolted on gasket onto the free flange of the
suitably dimensioned drain valve.
b) At the free flange of the main and diverter conservator drain valve.
c) On the free flange of the tap-changer diverter chamber; and
d) At the end of the main Buchholz relay sample pipe.
These points shall all be numbered on the sampling point with the number corresponding
to the same point on the valve function plate.
Although it is not intended to take regular oil samples from bushings /CVT a detailed
description shall be provided in the plant manual for the recommended method and
procedures and all the necessary precautions, in the event that this becomes necessary.
3.14.4 Strength and Oil Tightness

Valves and oil sampling devices shall be of adequate strength to withstand the hydraulic
and mechanical loads imposed upon them during testing, processing and transporting of
the plant and in service. Pewter and similar low strength materials will not be accepted.
Valve discs, wedges, wedge facing rings, seats and seat rings, stems and spindles shall be
of approved non-corrodible material.
3.14.5 Valve Stem Seals

Valve stem seals shall be capable of adjustment in service without draining the
transformer oil. In this connection, and generally, aluminum (or aluminum alloy) threads
shall not mate with threads of brass valve stems.
3.14.6 Padlocking
Suitable means shall be provided for padlocking valves in both the open and closed
positions.
3.14.7 Blanking Plates

All valve entries communicating with the atmosphere shall be sealed using bolts onto
gasket blanking plates, or captive screwed caps, or plugs as the case may be.
3.14.8 Valve Function Plate

A schematic diagram plate indicating all valves, vent plugs and sampling points shall be
provided in the same manner as the rating and diagram plate indicating the position of
each, the total number, the function and the required position during operation.
3.14.9 Valve Position Indication

The position of each valve, i.e. fully open or fully closed, shall be clearly and
unambiguously visible on inspection. Where this is not so, e.g. in the case of lever
operated valves, the "open" and "closed" positions of the lever in relation to a clearly
recognizable part of the transformer shall be depicted on the valve function plate.
3.14.10 Labelling of Oil Sampling Devices

All the oil sampling points shall be numbered the same as on the valve function plate with
exception of the two routine sampling points that shall also be labelled as follows:
Sampling Point Label

*Buchholz relay (Main 1) Transformer oil - Routine sampling point
*Diverter conservator Tap-changer oil drain valve - Routine sampling point
3.15 Gas and Oil Actuated Relays (Buchholz)

A gas and oil actuated relay suitable for operation in transformer oil as specified over the
temperature range from 115 °C to –10 °C, shall be interposed in the connecting pipe
between the oil conservator and the transformer tank in such a manner that all gas from
the tank must pass through the relay as it rises to the oil conservator. Contacts shall be
provided to close as follows:
a) The gas alarm signaling contacts shall be closed by the oil level falling to a
predetermined point in the relay due, either to the deficiency of oil, or to the presence
of gas in the relay;
b) The gas tripping contacts shall close on a further lowering of the oil level to a point
before the gas escapes to the conservator.
c) The surge tripping contact shall close when there is a surge of oil through the relay
towards the conservator with a rate of flow not less than that stated in table 6.
Table 6: Gas and oil actuated relays oil flow rates for closure of surge contacts
Transformer total oil Relay nominal Limits of min. steady oil flow rate
content size (mm/s)
(litre) (mm)
Up to 1000 25 Between 700 and 1300

1001 to 10000 50 Between 750 and 1400
10001 to 50000 75 Between 900 and 1600
Above 50000 75 Between 1500 and 2500
3.15.1 Relay Stability

The relay shall withstand the contact tests. No mal-operation of the relay shall result from
starting or stopping the transformer oil circulating pumps under any oil temperature
conditions. Stability, in this regard, shall not be achieved by the use of pipe or relay
aperture baffles to the impairment of sensitivity to oil surges.
3.15.2 Magnetic Influence

Despite the testing requirements of this specification, the relay shall not operate for
through fault conditions or be influenced by the magnetic fields around the transformer
under normal or external fault conditions.
3.15.3 Mounting and marking of relays

Pipe mounting flanges and relay lengths between flange facings shall, unless otherwise
approved comply will be given to relays that are, interchangeable. Each relay shall bear
clear indication as to which is the conservator end.
3.15.4 Windows
Unless otherwise approved, two graduated windows shall be provided in opposing sides of
the relay and so arranged that the oil level in the relay may be clearly gauged. The internal
surfaces of the relay shall be finished in glossy white, oil resistant enamel.
3.15.5 Gas Release and Oil Sampling Cock

An oil tight gas release cock, terminated in a threaded (6 mm) air connection fitted with a
captive screw cap, and communicating by a small bore non-ferrous tube to the top of the
relay body, shall be located approximately 1.0 m above ground level, clamped along the
framework of the plant. The tubing shall be protected against physical damage by
appropriate routing, fastening and/or protective conduit.
3.15.6 In-Situ Testing

The Buchholz relay shall have an internal test nozzle for simulating the gas alarm, gas trip
and surge trip signals by injecting gas into this nozzle. The nozzle shall be piped down to
a height of 1.0 m above ground level in the same manner as the gas release cock.
Alternatively, an approved mechanical device that operates the float mechanism and not
just the switch contacts may be provided.
3.15.7 Oil Tightness and Strength

The relay shall withstand the internal pressure and vacuum conditions specified without
damage and without leakage of oil, either externally or into its terminal box, and, in the
case of the application of vacuum, without ingress of air.
3.15.8 Electrical Connections, Terminals and Terminal Box

The terminal box cover gasket shall be confined to the perimeter of the cover where
sealing is required, i.e. the central area of gasket material over the terminals shall be
removed. A suitable watertight and weather resistant cable entry shall be provided.
The alarm signaling and the tripping contacts shall be electrically separate and
independent, and shall be externally connected.
3.15.9 Devices for the Protection of Relay Contacts

The relay contacts shall be protected from effects of cable capacitance or electromagnetic
relay inductance by means of inductors or diodes; these shall be fitted in the relay terminal
box, or the marshalling box on the transformer. Such designs shall be subject to the
Purchaser's approval.
3.15.10 Type and Routine Testing

The Buchholz relays shall meet the requirements of the tests specified in IEC. The
standard test card bearing the manufacturer's serial number for each relay, shall be
included in the plant operating manual.
3.15.11 Assembly, Operating and Maintenance Instructions

Original and fully detailed instructions for assembly, operation and maintenance of the
relay shall be included in the plant’s manual.
3.15.12 Floats
The buoyancy of the floating elements shall be due to their specific gravity and shall not
depend on the sealing of a hollow float. The materials shall not be affected by hot
transformer oil.
Figure 2: Buchholz relay outline drawing and sizes

3.16 Transformer Cores

The magnetic core and the magnetic return paths shall be made of laminations of non-
ageing, cold-rolled, grain-oriented, silicon steel of high permeability (high-by type)
without burrs, or better approved means. Each lamination shall be insulated with high
quality insulation coating. Unless specified otherwise in the technical data sheets the
magnetic flux density in legs and yokes of the core shall not exceed 1.7 Tesla at rated
voltage and frequency.
The core and its clamping plates shall form a rigid unit structure which shall maintain its
form and position under the severe stresses encountered during the envisaged movements
and short circuits. Care shall be taken to secure uniformly distributed mechanical pressure
over all the laminations to prevent setting of the core and to limit noise and vibrations to a
minimum under service conditions
3.16.1 Transformer Core Clamping:

The mechanical design of the transformer should place emphasis on the clamping of the
transformer core to limit the adverse effects of frequent transportation. The Supplier
shall prescribe the frequency of inspections of the core related to the application
(movement of unit etc) in order to ascertain the mechanical integrity of the core. The
manufacturer shall also submit the maximum permissible acceleration force the
transformer can withstand during transportation (typically 0.5g).
3.16.2 Electrical Continuity

Where the core laminations are divided into sections by insulating barriers or cooling
ducts parallel to the plane of the laminations, tinned copper bridging strips shall be
inserted to maintain electrical continuity between sections.
3.16.3 Insulation of the core

The insulation between the core and the clamping structure, including core bolts and/or
bands and buckles, shall withstand a test voltage of AC. 2 kV or DC. 3 kV for 60 s.
Designs requiring core bolts are not favored but if used this fact shall be clearly
highlighted in the bid documentation and, if accepted, core bolts shall be of nonmagnetic
material to avoid local hot-spots, and class F insulation sleeves shall be used.
All bolted parts and assemblies shall be supplied and fitted with suitable locking
devices/fasteners e.g. self-locking nuts, to inhibit equipment from vibrating loose, whilst
in transit or in service.
3.16.4 Core Earthing

The core shall be earthed to the core clamping structure at one point only, through a
removable external link suitably situated, and protected to allow for testing.
3.16.5 Core Clamping Structure

The bottom core clamping structure shall be in electrical contact with the top core
clamping structure through the tie bars, by way of the tank, or by means of a connection
placed on the same side and end of the core as the removable core earthing link.
The copper earthing connection between the core clamping structure and the tank, shall be
flexible, (e.g. laminated, stranded or braided), tinned at the ends, and shall be located on
the same side and end of the core clamping structure as the removable core earthing link.
Care shall be taken to ensure that contact resistance between mechanical members that
form part of any intentional current paths, be it circulating or to earth, is not detrimentally
affected by any painting.
There shall be no sparking, that may upset Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) online
monitoring system of the transformer, between bolted mechanical members during inrush
or other transient conditions. A drawing detailing the specifics of the earthing design shall
be part of the plant’s manual.
3.16.6 Cross-Sectional Area of Earthing Connections

No core earthing connection shall have a cross-sectional area smaller than 80 mm2, with
the exception of the connections inserted between laminations, which may be reduced to a
cross-sectional area of 20 mm2, where they are clamped between the laminations.
3.16.7 Core Mechanical Construction

The core and core clamping structure shall be of adequate strength to withstand, without
damage the stresses to which it may be subjected during handling, transportation, and
service. All nuts shall be effectively locked using locking plates, or standard machined
lock nuts or better approved means. Pining of bolt-ends and/or threads alone or the use of
tempered pressed steel nuts will not be acceptable. Nuts and bolts of insulating material
shall be fixed by gluing or other approved means.
3.16.8 Mechanical supports

Where the core and winding assembly is attached to the transformer cover plate, it shall
also be supported by the tank bottom. Hand holes shall be provided in the attachment to
the cover plate, for regulation of the mechanical distances. Members to support the cover
or side walls during vacuum shall be adequate to withstand transport movements without
damage.
Special parts for the above functions that are removed after vacuum shall be considered
part of the transformer and shall be handed over to the Purchaser. Drawings detailing the
designs of these parts as well as a description of their use shall be included in the plant
manuals.
3.16.9 Lifting Facilities

Lifting lugs or other means shall be provided for lifting the core and windings and, when
lifting, no undue stress shall be imposed on any core bolt or its insulation or on the tank
cover plate. Unless otherwise approved in writing, continuous (no joints) vertical tie rods
or plates shall be provided between the top and bottom core clamping structures.
3.16.10 Cooling Arrangements

Due to the high output-to-mass ratio requirement for a mobile transformer, typically the
unit shall be of the directed-oil-flow type (ODAF - Oil Directed, Air Forced). The
transformer shall be continuously rated at the nominal power of 25MVA, and at an
ambient temperature of 45oC.
3.16.11 Heat exchangers:

The transformer shall be cooled using suitably sized oil/air heat exchangers. The
exchangers must be fabricated from suitable material in order to minimize mass, and
improve efficiency (in consideration of heat transfer coefficient).
Susceptibility to vibration and fatigue must be considered in the construction and

mounting arrangement. The oil coolers shall be designed for easy maintenance such that
suitable shut-off valves are installed at each end of all inlet and outlet oil cooler pipes.
The auxiliary transformer shall provide the power for the fan and oil pump. Permanent
direction indicators for cooling fan rotation and oil flow shall be provided. Failure of the
fans or oil pumps shall result in alarms. The transformer will consequently be de-rated to a
suitable ONAN (Oil Natural, Air Natural) rating. Supply for the fans and oil pump must be
directly from the AUX TX, and the supply must have a three phase AC fail protection
relay (phase fail, phase rotation).
3.16.12 Hot Oil Connection Point

Hot oil to the transformer oil cooling apparatus shall be drawn off, as far as practicable,
from the highest point in the transformer tank to eliminate stagnant oil volumes below the
cover- plate.
3.16.13 Electrostatic Charging Tendency (ECT)

The manufacturer shall guarantee that the transformer will be free of any deleterious
electrostatic charging tendency throughout its life, under all operating conditions and in
particular with all cooling and oil circulation systems simultaneously in operation. The
cooling type shall be ODAF or equivalent taking into account that the power transformer
shall be of compact design.
The Purchaser will not accept any restrictions on the maximum number of cooling
systems/pumps that may be operated simultaneously, irrespective of the cooling demand.
Furthermore, the Purchaser will not accept any restrictions in the type of oil that may be
used in the transformer.
The manufacturer shall submit evidence or tests to prove that there is no electrostatic
charging tendency in the design of his transformers.
3.16.14 Oil and Winding Temperature Measurement and Settings

Thermometers as described in section (4.2.18), graduated in °C over the specified
temperature range, and unless otherwise approved, fully compensated for the effects of
ambient temperature, shall be provided for registering the temperature of the transformer
top-oil and hottest part of the windings
The instruments where applicable shall be fitted with a maximum temperature indicator
arranged for manual resetting, and with alarm signaling and tripping contacts that can be
manually set to close at predetermined temperatures which, unless otherwise specified,
shall be:
Alarm - 95°C Trip - 105°C
The current transformers for operating the winding thermometers shall be built into the
main transformer tank and shall be located so as to reflect the maximum hot-spot
temperature of the respective windings. In the MV delta-winding, the current transformer
shall be located electrically inside the delta connection.
Each winding shall be provided with a separate winding temperature thermometer and
optical sensors as described in section (4.2.18). Adjustable two bank cooler /pump control,
alarm and trip contacts that can be set to close at a predetermined temperature shall be
provided. The alarm contact circuits of these indicators shall be paralleled, and the trip
contact circuits paralleled and each brought out to a pair of terminals.
With the supplementary forced cooling, an additional thermal or auxiliary relay shall be
provided to automatically start the oil pump and fans for cooling the transformer. These
contacts shall be self-resetting. Alternatively, the start signal may be derived from a
current relay with suitable hysteresis characteristics to avoid hunting. Unless otherwise
specified, the cooler /pump control, alarm and trip settings shall be:
Cooler /pump I - 65°C Cooler /pump II - 75°C Alarm - 110°C Trip - 115°C
(Forced cooling)
Unless otherwise approved, the operation of the temperature thermometer shall not require
any external electrical power supply.
The Purchaser requires low maintenance, reliable instrumentation with fixed settings.
Analogue temperature indication as well as maximum temperature indication may be
waived if alternative proposals are found acceptable.
The instrument shall be mounted in the specified control cabinet, by means of an anti-
vibration mounting. Terminals and links shall be provided in the marshalling box of the
cooler controller for checking the output of the current transformer and/or the functioning
of the heater coil by means of an external supply.
3.16.15 Contactors
Contactors shall not be mounted directly on the back plate of winding temperature or oil
temperature indicators, as vibration can cause these indicators to read incorrectly.
3.16.16 Construction Details

Pipework and coolers shall be arranged to permit free access to oil conservators,
mechanism boxes, terminal and marshalling boxes and any items requiring inspection or
maintenance in service. All joints between tubes and the header shall be welded outside
the header to reduce the possibility of corrosion in the seams.

3.16.17 Detachable Supplementary Radiators
Detachable radiators shall be provided with:
a) Lifting lugs,
b) Drain valves or plugs, at the lowest points,
c) Vent plugs, at the highest points, and
d) Flanged and bolted isolating valves at both points of attachment to the transformer
tank or cooler bank.
3.16.18 Cooler Control and Settings

Forced cooling equipment for system transformers shall be designed for automatic
two/double bank operation by a winding temperature thermometer or current level
contacts set at predetermined temperatures/currents. Generally, the manufacturer's
standard settings for the starting of fans and pumps shall be used, otherwise a setting of
65°C or 0.6 pu current shall apply for the first bank, and 75°C or 0.7 pu current for the
second bank.
3.16.19 Cooler Control Equipment

All the necessary automatic control, motor contactors, protective devices, and switches for
the forced cooling equipment shall be housed in a, IP55 rated cabinet.
This cabinet shall be mounted using an anti-vibration mountings and as specified in this
document. Hinged door(s), handle(s), locking facilities, a separately fused 230 V single-
phase heater and switch, and a separately fused lamp with door switch shall be provided.
The heater shall be rated and located so that none of the apparatus in the cabinet will
suffer damage due to prolonged operation of the heater at high ambient temperatures. The
cooler control equipment shall include:
a) an isolating switch rated to carry and break full-load current for each group of fan and
pump motors;
b) a "manual"/"auto" change-over switch;
c) a magnetic contactor for each group of fan and pump motors. Contactor coil leads shall
be wired to the terminal board. A set of normally open contacts shall be provided to
initiate an alarm circuit if the contactor is tripped by its overload element.
All such contacts of the various groups shall be paralleled and wired to a pair of
terminals in the control cabinet. Magnetic contactors shall maintain supply to motors at
supply voltage down to 0,85 pu of the rated supply voltage at their terminals.
Tripping shall only occur on a controlled basis and there shall be automatic restarting in
the staggered mode if the voltage recovers while the transformer is in service; and
d) provision for disconnection of all cooling pumps and fans on the closure of a pair of
contacts provided by the purchaser on the master tripping relay controlling the isolation
of the transformer on the occurrence of a fault.
e) The ratings of these contacts will be:
 Make and carry continuously: 1250W at maxima of 5A and 660 V.
 Make and carry for 0,5 sec: 7500W at maxima of 30A and 660V.
 Break: 100 W resistive
 50 W inductive as defined in BS 142: L/R = 40 ms.
The arrangement for disconnection of the oil pumps and fans shall not be self-
resetting. The cooler failure relay is to monitor all three phases and the cooler supply
failure alarm to have a 4 s to 10 s timer fitted to prevent unnecessary signaling.
A change-over relay shall be provided in the control scheme. A contact of the trip
relay, on the cooler control protection will energize the operating coil of this change-
over relay which in turn shall isolate the contactor control circuits.
A reset push button shall be provided in the marshalling box for resetting the change-
over relay. The operating coil of the relay shall be continuously rated, or a make
contact of it shall be wired in series with the operating coil and a break contact in
series with the reset coil.
Where a Contactor is supplied for this purpose the operating coil shall be suitable for
operation by way of the above mentioned contacts and shall operate and reset correctly
between 80 % and 120 % of the d.c. auxiliary supply voltage.
The contactor shall have two sets of normally closed contacts, one of which shall
isolate the fan and/or oil pump motor control circuit(s) and the other shall be available
as a circuit breaker close inhibit signal. An N/O contact is to be provided for alarming
purposes. All contactors shall comply with the provisions of IEC 60947:
f) for staggering the starting times of oil pumps and fans or of individual groups of fans as
required;
g) for overload and single-phasing relays;
h) for winding temperature and oil-temperature indicators, that shall be visible through a
window in the door of the cabinet if installed in the same cabinet;
i) for links for testing winding temperature relay, and interposing current transformer;
j) for fuses, links and terminal boards to make a complete assembly; and
k) for labelling of all apparatus, that shall be inscribed indelibly in black lettering on a
white background and that will not discolor in long term service.
3.16.20 Oil Pumps

Each oil pump and motor shall be completely enclosed so that both stator and rotor
windings and the bearings are immersed in oil. It shall be possible to remove the pump
and motor for maintenance without removing oil from the transformer or coolers.
Oil flow indicators with alarm contacts shall be provided. Oil flow indicators shall be able
to withstand a reversal of the pumps without damage. In the event of accidental reversal,
the flow indicators shall indicate "no flow". Provision shall be made to verify the direction
of rotation by an approved method when the pump is in its normal service position. It
shall be possible and allowed to operate all pumps simultaneously without any restrictions.
3.16.21 Fans
Fan blades and fan ducting shall be of aluminum alloy, stainless steel, and galvanized steel
or other corrosion-resistant material and shall be designed to keep noise and vibration to a
minimum. All fans shall be provided with galvanized wire-mesh guards. The rotation and
air flow directions shall be clearly and indelibly indicated by appropriate arrows.
3.16.22 Motors
All motors shall be suitable for direct starting and continuous running from the 400/230
VAC supply voltage. Three-phase motors are preferred but single phase motors of 0.5 kW
and less will be acceptable.
All motors shall comply with IEC 60034 and shall be of the totally enclosed weather-
proof type. Three-phase motors shall be of the single cage squirrel cage type. Bearings of
all motors shall be of the ball or roller bearing type. With the exception of oil-pump
motors, the bearings shall be grease lubricated.
Each motor shall be equipped with a terminal box arranged to accommodate the incoming
cable provided by the Contractor. A suitable weatherproof cable box shall be provided to
terminate the cable. Motors shall be provided with starters, overload protection (three
phase where applicable) and in the case of three phase motors, single-phasing protection.
All motors shall be labelled indicating V, kW and A rating.
3.16.23 Maintenance
Fans/pumps/motors shall be installed to facilitate their easy removal in the event of
failure. Although very low maintenance is desired lubrication and servicing instructions, if
required, shall be clearly stated in the plant manual. Labelling shall be provided at each
pump or fan.
4 Switchgear
4.1 General Detail
The switchgear shall be fully gas insulated and suitable for operation in an outdoor
tropical environment. The scope of delivery of the switchgear shall include all the
necessary accessories, even if not mentioned specifically, as well as the installation and
commissioning ready for operation.
The control and protective equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant
specification and shall be installed in the MIB. The compartments into which the
switchgear shall be divided shall be such as to ensure that:
a) The quantity of gas to be evacuated and replaced when maintaining any item of
equipment is minimized. To minimize the quantity of gas that may be lost even through
normal leakage, excessively large compartments shall be avoided. Interconnection of a
number of separate compartments by pipework for the purpose of using a common gas
density monitor shall only be undertaken if the resulting volume of gas monitored is also
not excessive.
b) Compartments having small volumes shall be avoided where possible to limit the
pressure rise due to internal fault arcs.
c) The compact gas insulated switchgear shall be of single or three-phase enclosure design.
The arrangement of the compact gas insulated switchgear and any adjacent equipment shall
be such as to ensure:
a) Clear personnel access between the switchgear and local control panels along the full
length of the switchgear.
b) Reasonable access available to all parts to carry out normal service and maintenance
checks and operations.
c) Access available for removing and replacing individual switchgear components including
its compact enclosure, e.g. circuit breaker, without having to remove other equipment.
d) Sufficient earth switches or positions for connecting temporary earths are available so
that all primary connections which could be electrostatically charged can be earthed
during maintenance and extension work even when complete assemblies with the normal
earthing switches and disconnectors are removed.
e) Sufficient clearance in air for fitting and locating of HV test cable and/or bushing and the
switchgear HV and cable DC test voltages.
f) Earth switches which are fully insulated and connected to earth through a bolted link are
provided in sufficient positions to enable current injection of current transformers and
timing of circuit breaker main contacts to be performed.
Evidence in the form of written procedures and drawings shall be submitted at the time of
tendering to prove that items c), d), and e) will be achieved.
4.1.1 SF6-Insulated Switchgear Construction

A local control and monitoring panel pertaining to the bay shall contain interlocking, local
control and indication, gas monitoring and status indication. The protection panel
containing the relays, instruments, meters and operation devices shall be located in the
control cubicles.
Overpressure occurring in an enclosure shall be relieved by means of resetting plate valves

venting into the atmosphere. The valves shall be dimensioned to ensure that the maximum
pressure in the enclosure after operation does not cause the enclosure to yield or burst with
the maximum internal arc fault current.
The performance of the switchgear shall be in accordance with relevant IEC/VDE

standards for gas insulated metal-enclosed switchgear. The rated values shall be according
to the requirements in the relevant section. Enclosures shall be designed in accordance with
pressure vessel regulations in force in Uganda where applicable and such that they will be
acceptable.
4.1.2 Configuration:
The configuration of the components in the HV CMT-GIS and MV GIS shall be for a
single busbar connected transformer bay application in accordance with UETCL
application.
4.1.3 Switchgear vibration performance:

The switchgear shall be suitably resilient to transport vibration (i.e. suitable for “high-
seismic activity”). The maximum expected level of acceleration during transport shall be
0.5g.
4.1.4 Indication and Verification of Switch Positions

Indicators shall be provided on all circuit breakers, isolators and earth switches to clearly
show whether the switches are open or closed. The indicators shall be mechanically coupled
directly to the main contact operating drive rod or linkage and shall be mounted in a position
where they are clearly visible from the floor.
4.1.5 Breaker Mechanism Status:

Provision is to be made in the design for a local alarm panel to be fitted and wired such
that a signal indicating the status of ALL (HV and MV) the circuit breakers mechanisms
(charged / discharged), is initiated immediately in the driver’s cab once the trailers are
connected to the truck tractor. This will provide a check to ensure ALL breaker
mechanisms have been fully discharged, prior to the substation being moved in transit, to
or from any given site.
Note: Fully discharged applies to both the opening and closing spring mechanisms.
4.1.6 Operational and Maintenance Access:

Access to operating mechanisms, control cubicles, gas-filling points, viewing facilities,
and density meters must be possible for personnel, preferably standing at ground level.
Note for information: The trailers are regarded as a live chamber when the mobile
substation is commissioned and in operation, and consequently access to the HV breaker
will be yielded and prohibited.
4.1.7 Earthing:
Enclosures shall be multi-point earthed. The earthing philosophy and other
countermeasures shall prevent unacceptable transient voltages from appearing across
sections of the GIS, control circuits and transformer to CMT-GIS connections.
Transformer earthing shall be achieved by means of an integral earthing switch installed
on the line side of the circuit-breaker of the CMT-GIS as indicate in figure 1 under 1.1 of
this section
4.1.8 Secondary Terminals:

Secondary terminals on the circuit breaker mechanism and/or marshalling cubicle (to
which control cabling will be terminated) shall be in accordance with IEC and UETCL
requirements. All the panels shall be supplied complete with internal panel heaters
adequately rated for the application.
4.1.9 Sulphur Hexafluoride Gas (SF6)

The SF6 gas shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60376, and sufficient quantity shall
be provided to fill all SF6 equipment supplied under this Contract plus an additional 10 per
cent. The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped to, and stored on site, shall
comply with the requirements of local regulations and bye-laws.
4.1.10 Internal Gas Treatment

Permanent gas treatment elements shall be provided inside the gas enclosures where
necessary to remove impurities and moisture from the gas.
4.2 HV Circuit-Breaker, Disconnector and Earthing switch

The circuit breaker, disconnectors and earthing devices on the HV side of the transformer
shall be “compact mixed technology SF6 gas insulated switchgear” (CMT-GIS). The
CMT-GIS shall be in accordance with IEC CMT-GIS standards. The switchgear shall
have ONLY one set of bushings, doubling as the CVT on the line side for the purposes of
air insulated connections.
On the transformer side, the switchgear shall be suitably connected with the transformer
HV line terminals such that the only readily accessible electrical parts of the assembly are
the switchgear incomer bushings /CVT on the line side and transformer bushings. The
CMT-GIS and transformer bushings and connections shall be rated for maximum
operating voltage of 145kV, and a continuous load current of at minimum 1250A.
The required current transformers shall be accommodated within the CMT-GIS.
4.2.1 HV Circuit Breakers

The three-phase circuit breakers shall be of the SF6 type and shall comply with IEC 62271
or equivalent standards. They shall also be suitable for the operation of power transformer.
Indication devices shall be provided which indicate the ON-OFF position of circuit
breakers directly driven from the mechanical operation device. For signaling and
interlocking a cam switch driven by the operating device with spare contacts of any type
shall be foreseen.
After loss of control power, the mechanism shall be capable of performing an “OFF”
operation. The interrupters and their supports shall be maintenance free for a period of
min. 15 years. Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following additional measures:-
a) The spring charging shall be possible by both motor-operation and emergency hand
charging.
b) If the circuit-breaker is opened and the springs charged the circuit-breaker can close
and trip.
c) If the circuit-breaker is closed and the springs charged there shall be sufficient energy
to trip, close and then trip the circuit-breaker.
d) Mechanical indication shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring.
e) Under normal operation, motor recharging of the operating spring shall commence
immediately and automatically upon completion of each circuit-breaker operation. The
time required for spring recharging shall not exceed 20 seconds.
f) It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker while the spring has not enough energy
to close and immediately open the circuit breaker.
g) Local alarm that signals status of (HV and MV) circuit breakers spring mechanism
(charged / discharged) in tractor cabin, immediately the trailers are connected to the
truck tractor.
The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for operation from a power
supply as stated in this Specification and shall operate satisfactorily over the ambient
temperature range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range
stipulated in IEC 62271.
All operating coils shall be connected so that failure of insulation to earth does not cause
the coil to become energized. Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with double
pole MCBs with auxiliary contact in each circuit on each unit and shall be independent of
each other and all other circuits.
Table 7: HV Circuit Breaker Rating

Application HV Switchgear Ratings
Mobile Mobile System Rated continuous Short Circuit
TRFR Operational highest (nominal) current Rating
Size Voltage Un voltage Um (3 sec)
25MVA, 132kV 145kV 1250A 31.5kA / 3sec
4.2.2 HV Disconnector / Earthing Switch

The disconnector and earthing switch shall be motor-operated and shall practically switch
under zero-current conditions. The driving energy shall be provided by the 110 VDC
supply. In the event of a supply failure, emergency hand-operating facilities must be
available. Mechanical and electrical interlocking conditions shall prevent any mal-
operation:
a) The isolator must not be operated either electrically or mechanically when the circuit
breaker is in the “ON” position,
b) The circuit breaker must not be able to close when the isolator has not reached one of
its end positions.
c) In case the transformer is earthed on any side, no feed connection to the transformer
from the other side (one without earth) shall be possible by interlocking.
d) The manual operation devices shall be interlocked by a key device.
e) The switching positions shall be indicated on the mimic diagram at the pertinent control
cubicle.
f) Earth switches which are fully insulated and connected to earth through a bolted link are
provided in sufficient positions to enable current injection of current transformers and
timing of circuit breaker main contacts to be performed while the adjacent circuit is in
service.
4.2.3 HV Bushings and Connections:

The bushings and CVT of the CMT-GIS on the line side shall be of polymer / silicon
composite outdoor type having a minimum specific creepage of 25mm/kV. The connection
between the CMT-GIS and the transformer line terminals shall have a suitable mechanical
support, if necessary, to prevent undue mechanical forces on the CMT-GIS and
transformer as well as clashing during fault conditions.
The connections on the bushings should be a tinned copper stem with the following
dimensions: 26mm diameter, minimum 125mm long.
4.2.4 Vibration suppression jig:

Suitable lightweight jigs (glass-fiber, aluminum etc.) shall be provided that can be installed
onto the CMT-GIS line bushings / CVT connections, as well as surge arrester connections
whilst the substation is in transit, in order to dampen vibrations induced by the road
surface and thereby reduce fatigue of the equipment.
The jig shall be stowed under the deck of the trailers when the mobile substation is in use.
4.3 MV Circuit-Breaker, Disconnector and Earthing switch

4.3.1 MV Circuit-Breaker
The switchgear shall comply with IEC and UETCL requirements and in line with the
technical schedules. The 33 kV switchgear shall be gas insulated switchgear (GIS)
equipped with vacuum circuit breakers and in accordance with the relevant single line
diagrams.
The transformer line terminals and switchgear shall be air insulated, while connection
between the switchgear and outgoing feeds shall be by connex plugs to trail power cables,
as described in section (6.0). The switchgear and equipment are to be arranged so that
sufficient space for maintenance and inspection exists.
4.3.2 Type of MV Circuit-Breaker

The MV circuit breakers shall be of indoor compact, fixed pattern (GIS) type, situated
within an appropriately IP-rated (IP65) enclosure for outdoor use. The arrangement shall
be a bus coupler (incomer) breaker with two adjacent feeder/outgoing panels for cable
termination (total three panels).
Transformer 2 sets of outgoing supply trailing cables
Figure 3: bus coupler / incomer bay arrangement
The three-phase circuit breakers shall be of the vacuum type and shall comply with IEC
62271 or other approved standards. They shall also be suitable for the operation of power
transformers. The drive mechanism for the circuit breaker shall be electrically operated;
however, emergency hand operation must also be possible. Single-phase switching
operations shall not be acceptable.
Indication devices shall be provided which indicate the ON-OFF position of ALL circuit
breakers directly driven from the mechanical operation device. For signaling and
interlocking a cam switch driven by the operating device with spare contacts of any type
shall be foreseen.
The circuit breakers provided for outgoing feeders shall be suitable for three-phase auto-
reclose. After loss of control power, ALL mechanism shall be capable of performing an
“OFF” operation. The interrupters and their supports shall be maintenance free for a
period of min. 15 years.
Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following additional measures: -
a) The spring charging shall be possible by both motor-operation and emergency hand
charging.
b) If the circuit-breaker is opened and the springs charged the circuit-breaker can close
and trip.
c) If the circuit-breaker is closed and the springs charged there shall be sufficient energy
to trip, close and then trip the circuit-breaker.
d) Mechanical indication shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring.
e) Motor charged mechanisms shall be provided with means for charging the springs by
hand and also a shrouded push button for releasing the springs. An electrical release
coil shall also be provided.
f) Under normal operation, motor recharging of the operating spring shall commence
immediately and automatically upon completion of each circuit-breaker operation. The
time required for spring recharging shall not exceed 15 seconds.
g) It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker while the spring has not enough energy
to close and immediately open the circuit breaker.
The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for operation from a power
supply as stated and shall operate satisfactorily over the ambient temperature range when
the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated in IEC
62271. All operating coils for use on the D.C. supply shall be connected so that failure of
insulation to earth does not cause the coil to become energized.
Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with an MCB with auxiliary contacts in
each circuit on each unit and shall be independent of each other and all other circuits.
Locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the circuit-breaker can be
prevented from being manually operated. It shall not be possible, without the aid of tools,
to gain access to the tripping toggle or any part of the mechanism, which would permit
defeat of the locking of the manual trip.
Note: It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanism so as to render
inoperative the electrical tripping.
4.3.3 Ratings:
The MV circuit breakers shall be rated in accordance with the application duty in the table
below:
Table 8: MV circuit breaker rating

Application MV Switchgear Ratings
Mobile Mobile System Rated continuous Short Circuit
TRFR Size Operational highest (nominal) current Rating
25MVA, Voltage 11kV,
Un 33kV voltage36kV
Um 1500A – TX 40kA/
(3 sec) 3sec
750A - Feeders
4.3.4 Internal arc rating and venting:

The circuit breaker shall be rated A-FLR for 1000ms. Any arc venting or pressure relief
shall be directed downwards and away from the location the operator by making use of
suitable designed ducting from the circuit-breaker pressure relieve devices to the outside of
the weatherproof enclosure.
No venting is allowed to be done inside the weatherproof enclosure. Details of the ducting
shall be provided at tender stage.
4.3.5 Weatherproof enclosure:

The MV switchgear shall be secured and fitted within a totally weatherproof enclosed
rated to IP65, but so designed as to facilitate external operation of the circuit breaker. All
the circuit breaker panels shall be supplied complete with internal panel heaters adequately
rated for the application (where applicable).
4.3.6 SF6-Insulated Switchgear Construction

The gas compartments shall be gas-tight metallic material. The insulation material
carrying the conductors and sealing the gas chambers shall be of material, which does not
lose its properties by aging. The interrupter shall be vacuum quenched. The outer surface
shall be painted according to the description in the corrosion protection.
The compartments shall be factory pre-assembled and mounted on self-supporting rigid

frames. The construction of the frame shall consider the space for cable interconnection.
The construction shall allow free accessibility to the cable compartment. It shall be
possible to remove the switchgear compartment in a short period of time without
disconnection of the bus bars.
4.3.7 MV Terminations:
The transformer bay switchgear shall be integrated to the transformer line terminals. For
the MV switchgear, connex plugs and bushing of suitably rated plug-in (connex) screened,
separable type, interfacing with type C connex plugs shall interface the outgoing cables
through the connex bushings MV feeder switchgear to the outgoing overhead feeders.
All accessories for medium-voltage power cables shall be rated up to 40kV. The type C
connex bushings and plugs shall be of UV-stable material or cycloaliphatics, suitable for
outdoor applications.
Note: The outgoing trail cables shall be connected to the switchgear by plug in
terminations.
The performance of the switchgear shall be in accordance with relevant IEC/VDE

standards for gas insulated metal-enclosed switchgear. The rated values shall be according
to the requirements in the relevant section. Any gas compartment shall at least be
equipped with one overpressure release device.
For earthing, a copper strip or bar of sufficient current carrying capacity (minimum cross-
section area of 80 mm2) shall be installed along and connected to the switchgear.
4.3.8 Isolator/Earthing Switch

All feeders and incomers shall have three position isolator / earthswitch. The isolator /
earthswitch shall be motor-operated and shall practically switch under zero-current
conditions. The driving energy shall be provided by the 110V D.C. supply. In the event of
a supply failure, emergency hand-operating facilities must be available.
Strong interlocking conditions shall prevent any mal-operation: The isolator must not be
operated either electrically or mechanically when the circuit breaker is in the “ON”
position,
The circuit breaker must not be able to close when the isolator has not reached one of its
end positions. The manual operation devices shall be interlocked by a key device. The
switching positions shall be indicated on the mimic diagram at the pertinent control
cubicle.
4.3.9 Earthing:
Each panel shall also be supplied with mechanically interlocked, integral earth switches,
and fitted to ensure both feeder and transformer earthing is achievable.
4.3.10 Terminations:
The connex bushings shall be installed on the feeder switchgear such that the only readily
accessible electrical parts are the outgoing cable connex bushings and plugs. These plugs
shall be 40 kV rated plug-in (for connex applications) screened, separable type, interfacing
with type C connex bushings.
All accessories for medium-voltage power cables shall also be rated up to 40kV. The type
C connex bushings and plugs are to be of UV-stable material or cycloaliphatic, suitable for
outdoor applications.
Note: Bidders shall take note at bid stage that the required current transformers shall be
accommodated within the specific switchgear panels which are offered.
The successful Bidder shall allow at least (14) fourteen days for the submission and
feedback on his design, protection and wiring drawings and diagrams.
5 Power and Auxiliary Cables

5.1 General
5.1.1 Standards
All cables, accessories and materials shall be in accordance with the latest editions
(including all amendments) of IEC and ISO Standards and National Standards.
5.1.2 Dimensioning
All cables shall be suitable for the following operation:
a) on a system earthed either direct through neutral points surge arrestors.
b) under the loads specified and such sudden variations of load and voltage as may be met
with under working condition on the system
c) in the climatic conditions prevailing all over Uganda.
5.1.3 Labels and Identification for Cables

When completely laid, each cable shall have permanently attached to it at each end and at
intermediate positions, non-corrosive metal plates upon which the identification number of
the cable, voltage rating, conductor size and make shall be engraved or stamped.
Cable identification numbers shall comply with the cable schedule which shall be prepared
by the supplier according to the cables actually laid. These cables shall indicate the cable
numbers, cable sizes, voltage, number of cores, conductor size, terminations, and the
connections at each.
5.1.4 Cable Entry and Connections

Unless otherwise specified, cables shall enter vertically from below. Where cable stands
are provided, these shall be equipped with suitable cable saddles vertically aligned with
the cable gland positions or plugs and spaced to suit the cable manufacturers
recommendations but in any case not more than 1 m apart. Copper strip used for the
laminae of flexible connections shall not exceed 0.5 mm in thickness.
5.1.5 Single Core Cables and Cables with Insulated Sheaths

Suitable 10 mm earthing terminals fitted with all required washers, nuts, lock nuts and
removable copper earthing links shall be provided on the interfacing equipment and on the
insulated cable glands required for single-core cables, for the purpose of bridging the
gland insulation.
Stud holes shall not break through the metal of the gland or cable box to the inside.
Notwithstanding the requirements of BS 2562; where a higher insulation level is required
for the glands for cables having anti-electrolysis finish, the gland insulation shall
withstand a test of d.c. 5 kV for 60 s.
5.2 Design Criteria for Power Cables and Accessories

5.2.1 Conductors
All conductors shall be of stranded copper. The conductor shall be clean, uniform in size,
shape and quality, smooth and free from scale, spills, splits, sharp edges and other harmful
defects. They shall be circular shaped, stranded or solid bunched and multiple stranded, as
required, to suit the cable specification and shall comply with the requirements of IEC
60228 where applicable. No joints will be allowed on cables and correct lengths must be
used.
5.2.2 Conductor Screening

Conductor screening shall be employed at rated voltages above 1.8/3.0 kV for cables
insulated with XLPE, and shall consist of a layer of extruded semi-conducting material
having a smooth even surface in intimate contact with the cable insulation and the
conductor, but easily strippable from the conductor surface.
A concentric screen of copper wires and tape applied overall. Full details of the method used
for stripping the screen shall be provided with the tender and plant manual. The section of
the copper screen shall withstand the maximum single phase short circuit current specified.
5.2.3 Insulation
Power cables shall be insulated with one of the following materials except where the type of
cable is definitely specified in detail in the Schedules:
 Up to 3.3 kV between phases Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
 Above 3.3 kV and up to 33 kV Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
.
5.2.4 Identification of Cores
The cores of single, twin, three and four core power cables shall be identified by numbers or
colors as follows:
Number/Colour
1 core cable black
2 core cable 0 (zero) black

1 (one) red
3 core cable 1 (one) red

2 (two) yellow
3 (three) blue
4 core cable 0 (zero) black

1 (one) red
2 (two) yellow
3 (three) blue
Greater than 4 core cable 0 (zero) white

1 (one) white
2 (two) white
3 (three) white………..
The numbers shall be indelibly printed continuously on the whole length of the individual
core.
5.2.5 Laying up and Fillers

The cores of all twin and multicore cables shall be laid-up together with suitable fillers,
wormed circular and binding tapes applied overall. The individual cores of SL type cables
shall be compounded and taped over the lead before laying-up.
The fillers for XLPE cables shall be non-hygroscopic. The direction of lay of the cores shall
be right-hand for all twin and multicore power cables. The term "right-hand" has the same
meaning as for screw threads. All finished cables shall be circular.
5.2.6 Manufacturer's Identification

The manufacturer's identification shall be provided throughout the length of the cables by
means of a tape under the sheath printed with the manufacturer's name. Alternatively, the
manufacturer's identification may be embossed on the outer PVC sheath together with
identification and voltage markings.
5.2.7 Amour
For ease of handling, all cables shall NOT be armored but the Contractor shall ensure that
adequate support and protection is in place for all cables utilized on the plant.
5.2.8 Protective Coverings

Cables shall have extruded PVC over-sheath.
5.2.9 Voltage Marking and Identification

The extruded plastic over-sheaths of cables shall be embossed in the voltage designation, the
conductor size, the words «Electric Cable» and the year of manufacture. The manufacturer
may also include his name in the embossing.
5.2.10 Testing
Notwithstanding that cables are manufactured to IEC or equivalent standard all cables,
accessories and materials shall be subjected to and withstand satisfactorily the test
requirements detailed in this specification subject to any exceptions stated therein.
All materials shall withstand such routine tests as are customary in the manufacture of the
cables and accessories included in the Contract.
5.2.11 Current Carrying Capacity and Design Parameters

The maximum continuous current carrying capacity and maximum permissible continuous
conductor temperature, and the factors for determining such rating and temperature shall be
based on IEC 60287 and subsequent amendments.
5.3 Trail Power Cables:

The cables shall be rubber-sheathed XLPE 400mm2 single core non-armored trailing
cables in accordance with IEC, with each run suitable for 15MVA Current Rating, at 11kV
Voltage Configuration.
5.3.1 Type and quantity:

For all applications, the cables shall be single core, XLPE insulated, copper stranded
conductor cables with a cross-sectional area of 400mm2 for the Power Transformer and
Feeders, and 95mm2 for the AUX TX. The cables will be rated for an operating voltage of
11/33kV (i.e. 40kV). The quantity of cables per phase is as denoted in the technical
schedules.
5.3.2 Cable routing and support:

There shall be a suitable cable route (to facilitate easy access to circuit breaker cable
terminations on the side of the trailers). Suitable mounting brackets with cable clamps and
racking must be provided for mechanical support from the trailers. Cable clamp details are
as follows:
a) The distance from the MV feeder connex bushings to the first support clamps shall
be 800mm.
b) 6 x double polypropylene cable clamps aligned directly below each bushing (50-75
mm diameter range).
c) A single 50-75 mm polypropylene cable clamps shall be provided in the center of
the double clamps for the AUX TX cable.
5.3.3 Power Cable Termination Details:

The cables will interface with type C connex bushings fabricated from UV-stable
material (cycloaliphatic, or otherwise approved), for rated nominal current of 1875A in
accordance with IEC by means of plug-in screened separable connectors.
The bushings and power cable must be rated for the higher nominal operating voltage of
the transformer application, which is 33kV (i.e. 40kV). All accessories shall comply with
IEC. The installation shall also include a bolted, clamp-type earth terminal, to which the
cable earth screen conductor can be appropriately connected.
There shall be a separate earth bar (A copper earth bar of minimum cross-sectional area of
80mm2) for each phase. A suitable number of type C connex bushings shall be provided
to connect the cables and plug-in surge arrestors onto the outgoing feeder MV circuit
breaker. The number of connections applies to both the medium voltage feeder switchgear.
Table 9: MV Trailing cables and cable terminations application guide

Mobile TRFR No. ofVoltage No. of 95mm2 No. of No. of
application details Connex rating XLPE 400mm2Rubber 400mm2Rubber
bushings/ph of cable Cables/ph Cables/ph Cables/ph
(TRFR- AUX (Feeder) (Transformer)
25MVA11kV- 1 TX)
19/33kV 1 per phase of1 per phase of 2 per phase of
33kV 33kV 33kV 33kV
(Switched)
Note: the single cable will be terminated in a configuration on a single 1250 / 630A plugs
for feeder and AUX TX
5.3.4 Cable termination enclosure:

The cable termination enclosures for the feeder cables should comply with IEC,
Enclosures for cable terminations in air for rated AC voltages of 7.2 kV and up to and
including 36 kV.
The enclosures shall be fitted with humidity control.
5.3.5 MV Outgoing Feeder Cable and Reel Details:

The feeder cables and metallic reels / drums shall be part of the plant. Each feeder shall
require one set of trail cables, made up of three single core cable (one cable per phase).
The cable length for each run of trail cable shall be at least 100 meters on independent reel.
The cable reels maybe suitably fitted on the MV trailers (second trailer). To facilitate
installation, removal and storage of the MV trailing cables, a galvanized steel cable reeling
drum set comprising the following salient features, shall be provided:
a) Each reel is to be fitted into a dedicated lifting frame and operated independently. The
cable will be deployed manually, and be rolled up via an electrical winch.
b) Each reel is to be fitted with a ‘parking’ brake to ensure transportation of the coiled
cable without unravelling.
c) The reels must be fitted with a facility built into the central hub for the location and
protection of the cable termination.
d) The reels will be of a ‘spoked’ design as opposed to a “solid disc”, with
suitable weatherproof bearings.
Each cable of reel shall be suitably terminated with:
a) One end with outdoor XLPE terminations for outdoor electric pole mounting
applications, and end lagged with a tin coated copper lug of appropriated sizing and
rating.
b) The Circuit Breaker end with connex XLPE terminations for indoor applications, of
type C connex bushing sizing and 950 A current rating.
The terminations shall be robust enough to encounter several reeling and unreeling
operations.
5.4 Design Criteria for PVC Insulated Concentric Cables

All PVC insulated concentric cables with copper conductors shall be 600/1000 V grade and
shall be manufactured and tested to IEC or equivalent standard and to all applicable
requirements of this specification dealing with power cables and accessories.
5.5 Design Criteria for Multicore Cable and Accessories

5.5.1 General
All PVC insulated multicore auxiliary cable shall be 600/1000 V grade with stranded copper
conductors of not less than 2.5 mm2 cross-sectional area, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed,
galvanized and PVC sheathed overall, and shall comply with all applicable requirements of
this specification for power cables.
5.5.2 Core Identification

The Contractor shall submit cross-sectional drawings of auxiliary cables marked to indicate
the method adopted for core identification.
5.5.3 Over-sheaths
PVC over-sheaths shall be in accordance with the requirements of the section on Power
Cables and embossed with the legend "Electric Cable-Aux".
5.6 Design Criteria for Multi-Pair Cables

5.6.1 General
Multi-pair cables for feeder protection, telecommunication and data transmission shall have
copper conductors, be polyethylene insulated (for the individual cores), and black Polyvinyl
chloride PVC sheathed overall.
The polyethylene insulation shall be in accordance with IEC or equivalent standard and the
core insulation shall be coded as specified in section 6.2.5.
The insulated cores shall be twisted together to form a pair. The length of lay of the
conductors forming the pairs shall differ for adjacent pairs. The length of lay of the pairs
shall be such that cross talk is minimized.
The arrangement of pairs shall be in accordance with the conventional construction for this
type of cable. In the case of seven pair cables, six pairs shall be laid around a center pair and
in each succeeding layer, the number of pairs shall be increased by six pairs over the number
in the proceeding layer to provide a uniform structure. No filler shall be used in these cables.
Binding tapes constructed from suitable materials shall be applied with open spiral or
overlap as required between layers, where necessary, and over the laid up structure to
provide a compact uniform formation. The extruded inner bedding sheath shall be black.
The cables shall be provided with an extruded over sheath of black PVC compound.
5.6.2 For Analogue Measurands

Twisted cores in pairs to provide good protection against internal and external interference
shall be used. Minimum core – earth voltage shall be 150V, while core – core voltage shall
be 250V.
Cable Characteristics:
Rated Voltage :450/750V
No. of cores and area, mm2 :8 x 2 x 1
Outside diameter, mm :14
Mass, kg/100m :23
Conductor material : Stranded annealed copper
Common core sheath : Plastic tape and PVC (PVC- insulated and
PVC – sheathed control cable with common
screened cores)
Screen : Annealed copper wires
Fire resistance class : F3
Conductor insulation : polyethylene insulation with core number
identification
Electrical data at +20C

Loop resistance :80.8/km
Continuity conductor resistance :18.8/km
Insulation resistance :2000M
Pair capacitance at 1 kHz :90 nF/km
Capacitance, core screen at 1kHz :130 nF/km
Pair inductance at 1 kHz :680 H/km
Attenuation at 1kHz :1.4 dB/km
Attenuation at 100kHz :8 dB/km
Cross talk attenuation at 1 kHz :120 dB/km
Characteristic impedance at 1 kHz :350 
5.6.3 For Digital Inputs/outputs

be 250V.
Cable Characteristic:
Rated voltage :450/750V
No. of cores and area, mm2 :24 x 1
Outside diameter, mm :15.5
Mass, kg/100m :30
Conductor material :Stranded annealed copper
Common core sheath :Plastic tape and PVC (PVC- insulated and
PVC – sheathed control cable with common
screened cores)
Screen :Annealed copper wires
Fire resistance class :F3
Conductor insulation :polyethylene insulation with core number
identification
Electrical data at +20C

Loop resistance :80.8/km
Continuity conductor resistance :18.8/km
Insulation resistance :2000M
Capacitance between adjacent cores at 1 kHz :100 nF/km
Capacitance, core screen at 1kHz :150 nF/km
Inductance between adjacent cores at 1 kHz :680 H/km
Attenuation at 1kHz :1.4 dB/km
Attenuation at 100kHz :8 dB/km
5.6.4 For 240 VAC and 110 VDC Distribution

PVC insulated, aluminum-sheathed and plastic cable with green/yellow earth continuity
core (area: 1.0mm2). Maximum core – earth voltage shall be 450V and core – core voltage
shall be 750V.
Cable Characteristics
Rated voltage :450/750V
Outside diameter, mm :9.7
Mass, kg/100m :16
Conductor material :Stranded annealed copper
Earth Conductor material :Stranded annealed and tinned copper
Fire resistance class :F3
Conductor insulation :polyethylene insulation with core number
identification
Filling : PVC
5.6.5 For Cross Connections

be 250V.
(i) For Analogue Measurands
No. of cores and area, mm2 :2 x 1 (Twisted yellow/blue
insulated pair)
Conductor material : Stranded annealed tinned copper
Conductor resistance at +20C : 35/km
Insulation resistance at +20C : 500-km
(ii) For Digital inputs/outputs
No. of cores and area, mm2 :1 x 1
Conductor material : Stranded annealed tinned copper
Conductor resistance at +20C : 35/km
Insulation resistance at +20C : 500-km
5.7 Installation of Cables

Cables will be installed either on trays or racking cleated to steelworks. The handling of
the cables shall at all times be undertaken by adequate staff suitably trained and supplied
with all the necessary plant, equipment and tools. The arrangement of the cables and all
methods of laying shall be approved by the Project Manager and shall be planned to
provide an orderly and neat formation, free from unnecessary bends and crossing, which
will permit the removal of any one cable without undue disturbance to adjacent cables.
5.7.1 Segregation
The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services.
Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire risk areas and to minimize the risk of
damage from any source. Control cables shall be separated from power cables.
5.8 Galvanizing
All metal cable trays, cable ladders, racks and steelwork shall be galvanized or otherwise
protected by a method IEC or equivalent standard. The protective finish shall be to an
approved specification. No welding shall be carried out after the protective finish has been
applied.
5.8.1 33 KV Connections to Feeders

The contractor shall ensure that the proposed cable takes into consideration the load
conditions, thermal rating of cables, voltage drop and short circuit conditions.
The cable connecting the feeder lines shall be a single core copper XLPE cable system as
follows:
Capacity per 33 kV cable

Feeder Connection
25 MVA 3 x (1 x 400 mm2)

5.8.2 33 KV Connections to Power Transformer
The cable size shall be able to meet all the requisite operating parameters including the load
conditions, thermal rating, voltage drop and short circuit conditions ..
The cable connecting the power transformer to circuit breaker lines shall be a single core
copper XLPE cable system as follows:
Capacity 33 kV cable
Connection
25 MVA 3 x (2 x 400 mm2)
5.8.3 33 kV Connections to AUX TX

Connection to the AUX TX shall be with single core copper XLPE cable system as follows:
Capacity per 33 kV cable

AUX TX Connection
Min. 160 KVA 3 x (1 x 95 mm2)

5.9 Low Voltage Power Cable Connection

Supply, installation and connection of all necessary LV power cables including all necessary
glands, racks, clips, cleats, trays, supports and re-installment, etc. to interconnect all the
equipment shall be included in this procurement.
5.10 Supply, Installation and Termination
The Contractor is to include all cables, cable identification, tags, glands, ferrules,
numbered ferrules, lugs and strapping. Any additional brackets, fasteners etc. for fixing
the cable shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
The termination of these cables includes the making off, glanding, bunching cores neatly,
attaching all number ferrules and lugs and connecting to the correct terminals.
The cable cores are to be properly terminated with the correct "lipped blade lug" and only
lugs supplied by "Bowthorpe-Hellerman-Deutsch" or equivalent shall be used. Crimping
shall be done with the proper ratched isolating lug crimper.
RSF1 terminals - 2,5mm2 wire use blue lug FVWSAH-2

- 4,0mm2 wire use yellow lug FVWSAH-5,5
SAK terminals - 2,5mm2 wire use blue lug FVWSAH-2,5B30

- 1,5mm2 wire use red lug FVWSAH-1,25B30
All cables must be marked at both cable ends according to the cable numbers as indicated
in the wiring schedule provided by the Contractor. These marks will be permanently
attached with either letter punched copper labels or durable, high quality UV protected
plastic cable markers and Bidders should allow for these costs in their bid prices.
5.11 Small Wiring and Terminations

5.11.1 General
All wiring shall be stranded and have insulation incapable of supporting combustion.
Wiring insulation shall be oil and moisture-proof, and, where affected by temperatures
above that of the ambient air, shall have thermal characteristics at least equal to class 'A' of
IEC 60085.
All auxiliary circuits shall withstand a test voltage of 2 kV r.m.s. to earth and to all other
circuits.
The minimum size of wiring other than for light current apparatus shall be 1.5 mm2 copper,
except for current transformer secondary’s, which shall be not less than 2.5mm2. It shall be
flexible 660/1000 V grade wire.
All wiring shall be neatly run and securely fixed in suitable cleats in such a manner that,
wherever practicable, wiring can be checked against diagrams without removing cleats.
Cleats shall be of porcelain, non-corrosive metal, or approved moulded insulating material

and preferably of the limited compression type. Wiring passing out of the cubicles and
wiring between compartments shall be run in non-corrosive, high impact, flexible tubes,
galvanized steel tubes or robust pressed ducting. Mineral insulated copper sheathed cables
shall not be used.
Wherever practicable, wiring shall be accommodated on the sides of the cubicles and wires
for each circuit shall be separately grouped. Back of panel wiring shall be so arranged that
access to the connecting stems of relays and other apparatus and to contacts of control and
other switches is not impeded. Where provision is made for addition of equipment not
required initially, means shall be adopted for supporting and terminating wiring during the
interim period.
All wiring shall be taken to terminal boards and wires shall not be jointed or teed between
terminal points. Stranded conductors shall be terminated using crimped terminations. Bus
wires shall be fully insulated, and shall be run separately along the top or bottom of cubicles.
MCBs shall be provided to enable all circuits in a cubicle, except the lighting circuit, to be
isolated from the bus wires.
Wherever practicable circuits in which the nominal voltage exceeds 125 volts shall be kept
physically separated from the remaining wiring. The nominal voltage of each circuit shall
be marked on the associated terminal boards. Except for the lighting circuit the nominal
voltage of AC circuits brought into relay or control cubicles shall not exceed 125 volts.
Lighting circuits in excess of 125 volts shall be fully shrouded throughout.
D.C supplies and AC voltage transformer supplies shall be fed through separate from the
main supply MCBs or the bus wires to each protection or other main group. There shall not
be more than one set of supplies to the apparatus comprising each such group.
Wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall have suitable oil-resisting insulation. The
bared ends of stranded conductors shall be sweated together to prevent creepage of oil along
the wire. There shall be no possibility of oil entering connection boxes for cables or wiring.
Where the use of conduits is adopted the runs shall be laid with suitable falls and the lowest
parts of the run shall be external to cubicles or boxes. All conduit runs shall be adequately
drained and ventilated.
5.11.2 Termination of Wiring

Where insulation is stripped from the wires in order to make connections, the conductors
shall be left clean and undamaged. Only the required minimum length of insulation shall
be removed, preferably with a thermal stripping device.
5.11.3 Termination of Internal Wiring and Terminal Boxes

All wiring connected to the terminals of auxiliary apparatus within a tank shall be
terminated at the terminals of a terminal box on the tank wall or cover plate. These
terminals, or tags permanently attached to them, shall be indelibly marked with the
terminal marking of the corresponding terminal of the internal apparatus and also the
wiring designation.
The terminal marking tags used and the terminals themselves shall be so fixed to their
respective barrier board that there is no possibility of the internal connection or the
terminal slackening, or of the removal of the terminal marking tag during the process of
applying or removing the external connection.
5.11.4 Identification of Wiring

All wiring shall be of a uniform color. Numbered ferrules shall be fitted to all internal
wiring and to multicore cable tails. Ferrules shall be of insulating material of IEC standard
colors with a glossy finish to prevent adhesion of dirt. They shall not be affected by damp
or oil and shall be clearly and permanently marked and shall not be easily detachable from
the wire.
All equipment boundary/interface terminals and the equipment wires connected to those
terminals shall have a unique wire/terminal number in accordance with the drawings. The
wires shall be marked with black letters impressed on a white background or black letters
on a yellow background providing that the color selected is consistent throughout the suite
of panels.
Interlocking "slip-on" types of ferrules are preferred and shall match the size of wire onto
which they will be fitted. For heavy conductors and very light wiring where the preferred
type of marking ferrules is not available, other methods may be approved.
Ferrules shall be arranged to read upright on cable terminal strips and to read from
terminal to insulation in the case of relay apparatus and instrument connections. Ferrule
numbering throughout shall be in accordance with IEC 60391, Marking of Insulated
Conductors. The system of marking to be used shall be dependent remote end marking.
5.12 Terminal Boards

Terminal boards shall have separate terminals for incoming and outgoing wires. Not more
than two wires of 4mm2 each shall be connected to any one stud type terminal. Insulating
barriers shall be provided between adjacent pairs of terminals. The height of the barriers and
the spacing of the terminals shall be such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy
access to terminals. Sufficient spare terminals equivalent to a minimum of 10% of those
used shall be provided in addition to those required for future functions.
All connections shall be made to the front of the terminal boards. Current shall not be
carried through the boards by the studs, except in the case of oil-tight terminations. No live
metal shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards.
Terminations shall be grouped according to function and labels shall be provided on the
fixed portion of the terminal boards showing the function of the group. Covers of insulating
material, preferable transparent, shall be provided on terminal boards on which connections
for circuits with a nominal voltage greater than 125 volts are terminated.
Terminal boards shall be mounted vertically at the sides of the cubicle, and set obliquely
towards the rear doors to give easy access to terminations and to enable ferrule numbers to
be read without difficulty. The bottom of terminal boards shall be spaced at least 200 mm
above the cable crutch of incoming multicore cables.
Current carrying parts shall be non-ferrous and plated. All plating shall be compatible with
other parts and terminations. Screws into steel shall be steel, stainless steel or phosphor
bronze. All plating shall comply with BS 1706 and BS 3382 Parts 1, 2 and 5.
The minimum external creepage distance between adjacent terminals and between
terminals and earth shall be not less than 8 mm when determined in accordance with BS
142 annex G. Terminal covers or shrouds shall be of insulation material, self-
extinguishing or resistant to flame propagation.
5.13 Mounting of Terminal Blocks

5.13.1 Dimensions
The dimensions of mounting rails shall be in accordance with DIN 46277 parts 1, 2 and 3.
5.13.2 Retaining
The units shall be spring retained on the assembly rail and when mounted and wired as in
service, shall be close fitted to avoid the accumulation of foreign matter between adjacent
units. End barriers or shields shall be provided for open sided patterns.
5.13.3 Replacement
It shall be possible to replace any unit in an assembly without dismantling adjacent units;
it shall be permissible however to loosen any clamping device. Screw retention of any
component from the rear of the mounting rail is not acceptable.
5.14 Type of Terminal Block

5.14.1 Spring loaded
A rail mounted screw clamp/spring loaded insertion isolating type terminal block suitable
for the reception of hooked blade type wiring lugs shall be provided (See Figure 4). The
terminal blocks shall be of the type that compresses the terminations between two plates
using terminal screws. Terminals shall also be spring loaded such that the action of the
spring is independent of the action of the terminal screw.
a) Terminal screws shall be captive within the mouldings and the heads shall not project
above the moulding when fully released. Each terminal shall accept up to two hooked
blade type terminations.
b) Terminal entries shall be shrouded so that no current carrying metal is exposed when
hooked blade terminations are fitted.
c) Springs shall be aged and shall withstand corrosion that might affect performance
during their working life. Springs shall not carry current.
d) Cross connection facilities shall be provided for communing two or more adjacent
terminal blocks, without interfering with the terminal openings.
5.14.2 Heavy-Duty Stud Type

a) For use in circuits up to 500 V maximum, at maximum continuous current ratings of
30 A for M5, and 50 A for M6 stud sizes (See Figure 5).
b) Two terminal studs shall be provided for each way, and these shall be of sufficient
length to accommodate two ring tongue or flanged spade terminations in addition to a
full nut and all necessary plain and spring washers.
c) M5 studs shall be of phosphor bronze or stainless steel. M6 studs shall be of brass,
phosphor bronze or stainless steel. Solid studs only shall be provided. Studs that are
slotted or drilled to receive the conductor are not acceptable.
d) Loose links, where provided, shall be secured by a nut and washers, and shall be tin
plated copper or brass.
e) Barriers of insulation material, self-extinguishing or resistant to flame propagation and
substantially non-hygroscopic shall be provided between terminal ways. These barriers
shall project at least 3 mm above the studs.
Figure 4: General mounting of terminal block
Figure 5: General arrangement of stud type terminal block
5.14.3 Terminal Boxes

All junction boxes, terminal boxes or cubicles shall be constructed of galvanized steel. All
main equipment shall be arranged so that it is accessible from the front of the box or cubicle.
5.14.4 Clearances
The clearance between adjacent terminal boards and from the sides of the case shall not be
less than 100 mm. The minimum clearance between terminal boards and the top and bottom
of the case shall be 150 mm.
5.14.5 Venting and Draining

Cubicles arranged in a vertical plane, shall be provided with a vent and drain hole covered
by a fine mesh of non-corrodible wire, fitted at the lowest point. This fitting shall be flush
inside to allow total drainage.
5.14.6 Earthing Terminal

An earthing terminal consisting of a stud with a M16 stainless steel or brass bolt shall be
provided in each cubicle on both the inside and outside.
5.14.7 Cable Entry

All cables shall enter cubicles at the base via removable gland plates with appropriate cable
glands. Conduits shall be run wherever practicable, enter cubicles near the base.
Means shall be provided to drain water off the surface of the gland plate. The back, sides
and front of the cubicles shall project at least 50 mm below the gland plate to prevent
moisture draining onto the plate and cable glands.
5.14.8 Wiring and Termination

All secondary wiring within panels, racks, boards, etc. shall be in accordance with the
pertaining IEC recommendations and shall be carried out for the fully rated distribution
voltage (2 kV AC, 1 min. test voltage).
The minimum cross-section of each copper wire shall be as given below:

 2.5 mm2 for current transformer circuits
 2.5 mm2 for all power consumers such as motors, heaters etc. to 10A
 1.5 mm2 for all control and instrument wiring 110 V service voltages
 0.6 mm2 for telephone wiring.
Wiring shall be neatly run in PVC rigid plastic wire ways clear of any metal panels and
filled no more than 70% or bundled with no bunch containing more than twelve wires. All
secondary wiring shall enter the terminal block at one side only.
The panel wiring shall terminate in one or more terminal blocks accommodated at the side
or bottom of each panel or compartment. Internal wiring between instruments or other
devices not using the terminal block shall be permitted within the same compartment only.
Terminal blocks shall be numbered consecutively, beginning with 1, from left to right or top
to bottom, and shall consist of single "insertion" type terminals of non-tracking, non-
inflammable synthetic plastic, line up in one row.
All terminals shall have isolating links and two separate pressure clamping plates suitable
for connection of incoming and outgoing conductors, respectively. The following categories
of terminals shall be used:
a) Terminals for power circuits for 10 mm2, 6mm2, and 2.5 mm2 size.
b) Terminals with short-circuit facilities for current transformer circuits of 6 mm2 size.
c) Terminals for wiring of 1.5 mm2 and 0.6 mm2 size with bridging facilities for the
neighboring terminal where required.
Parallel connection shall only be made by bridging. In one connection point only one wire is
allowed to connect. For each cubicle and each type of terminal a 10% quantity of spare
terminals shall be supplied. Insulating barriers shall be provided between each pair of power
circuits and between the terminal categories, the height and the spacing being such as to give
adequate protection to the terminals.
6 Earthing System
6.1 Trailer Earthing
6.1.1 General:
All equipment shall be appropriately earthed (grounded) directly to the integral steelwork
of the trailers, for an asymmetrical fault current magnitude of 40kA for 3 second. Where
necessary, galvanized steel straps or similar, may be used for earthing equipment to the
trailers superstructure.
All equipment must be earthed, at minimum, at two points for redundancy purposes. Each
point should be capable of carrying the full fault current for 3 second.
Six main portable earth attachment points shall be provided on the plant for the purpose of
connecting flexible earth leads to an existing substation or tower earth electrode or
earthing spikes.
For information: It will generally be unfeasible to establish adequate earthing for moderate
to high fault levels, in order to limit ground potentials to within safe limits for operational
personnel in the vicinity. Therefore an “equipotential” surface is to be established around
the trailer’s in-service position e.g. diamond mesh fence on ground surface.
A floating perimeter fence (not connected to trailers) will restrict access to the area of
potentially high ground surface potentials. The perimeter fence shall be stowed under the
deck of the trailers when the mobile substation is not in use.
Furthermore, the trailers shall be design to always be connected to adjacent power line
structures where practicable.
The earthing system shall be designed to minimize the dangers from step, touch and
transferred potentials which can occur under maximum fault conditions. The Contractor
shall submit calculations in support of his design. These voltages should not exceed 65
Volts. Prior to commissioning the Contractor shall carry out earthing tests to confirm the
values obtained at pre-determined points do not exceed 65 volts.
6.1.2 Earthing Attachment Points:

Six portable earth attachment points shall be provided for the purpose of connecting
flexible earth leads to an existing substation or tower earth electrode or earthing spikes.
6.1.3 Operational Earthing:

Earthing of HV line, transformer and trailing cables shall be provided through the integral
earthing devices (switches) of the HV and MV switchgear.
In addition to the integral earthing, external earthing points for portable earths shall be
required. These earthing connection points shall comply with IEC, and shall be indicated
on the general arrangement drawing of the mobile transformer. For air insulated
connections between equipment, earthing pegs, in accordance with IEC, shall be installed
to facilitate portable earthing connections.
6.1.4 Cable Earthing:

There is to be a separate copper earth bar of 80mm2 cross sectional area for the earthing of
the cable screens.
6.2 Provisions for Earthing

6.2.1 Transformer Tank Earthing
At a height not less than 300 mm from the base of the transformer tank and near each end
of each of the two major sides of the tank (i.e. in four positions). These provisions shall
take the form of earthing pads integral with the tank walls; where the pads are attached by
welding, such welding shall be continuous around the perimeter of the pads. Earthing pads
shall be stainless steel.
Provision shall be made for connection to the earthing pads of four copper earthing straps
each 50mm x 3mm, laid one upon another and clamped in position by a heavy clamping
plate fastened by not less than two M16 studs or set screws with hexagonal heads and
fitted with lock washers, spanning the width of the copper straps. The conductivity of
these connections shall not be less than that of the connection provided at the neutral
terminals of the transformer.
6.2.2 Transformer Neutral Earthing

The HV and MV neutral earthing shall be solidly earthed to the system, and protected by a
neutral surge arrestor.
A stainless steel pad having the same clamping arrangement as the transformer earthing
pads and integral to the transformer tank shall be provided for each transformer neutral
terminal for earthing.
a) This pad shall be mounted as near as possible to its corresponding neutral terminal in
order to ensure a short and steady connection to earth.
b) The conductivity of this connection which is to be made using two copper earthing
straps of 50 mm x 3 mm each laid one upon the other shall not be less than that of the
connection provided at the neutral terminals of the transformer.
6.2.3 Surge arrester earthing (line and neutral surge arresters)

The surge arrester mounting brackets shall not be used as the earth path for surge arrester
discharging to earth via the transformer tank (i.e. copper earth tails shall be used for surge
arresters).
a. Where brackets are to be fixed to the tank, stainless steel pads (similar to the
transformer tank earthing pads) integral to the tank shall be used.
Note: Bolted down surface contact areas of transformer surge arrester support brackets
and earthing pads shall be free of any paint or metal spray coatings.
b. All tank attached apparatus, including control cubicles, mechanism boxes, fans, and
pump motors shall be bonded to their supporting structures.
c. Earthing pads shall also be provided on each end of the supporting structures for all
separately mounted cooler banks, heat exchanger, switchgear, cable boxes, and oil
conservators.
6.3 Core Earthing

6.3.1 Core
The core shall be earthed to the core clamping structure at one point only, through a
removable external link suitably situated, and protected to allow for testing.
6.3.2 Core Clamping Structure

The bottom core clamping structure shall be in electrical contact with the top core
clamping structure through the tie bars, by way of the tank, or by means of a connection
placed on the same side and end of the core as the removable core earthing link.
6.3.3 Cross-sectional area of earthing connections

No core earthing connection shall have a cross-sectional area smaller than 80 mm2, with
the exception of the connections inserted between laminations, which may be reduced to a
cross-sectional area of 20 mm2, where they are clamped between the laminations.
6.4 Cable Earthing

The Contractor shall connect all cable sheaths and armor, supporting steelwork and the
metal enclosure of sealing boxes, joints etc., to the main earth bar by suitable branch
connections. The cross sections of the connections shall not be less than 80mm2.
33 kV single phase trail cables shall be only earthed at the one end of the cable at the
switchgear.
The earth strip or insulated cable and connections thereto shall be laid along the cable
ducts or route, and/or fixed to steelwork by means of clamps or claw type cleats, as
appropriate. The spacing of fixings shall not be greater than 1 m.
All joints and connections in copper strip shall be made with tinned surfaces to prevent
oxidization and shall be riveted and soldered or, where specially agreed by the Contract
Manager, welded or brazed in an approved manner.
6.5 Equipment Earthing

Proper earthing of mast, antenna and equipment is to be provided by the Contractor and
shall be included in the Bid. Equipment earthing includes:
a) A 10mm2 bare copper conductor from the mast earth rod to follow the coax
downlead, to the equipment enclosure.
b) A 35mm2 bare copper conductor from the equipment enclosure(s) and surge
protection modules to the common equipment earth. All earth cables to be as short
as possible.
The total resistance to earth of the plant shall be less than 1 Ohm
6.6 Earthing and Earthing Devices

All metal parts other than those forming part of an electrical circuit shall be connected to a
high conductivity copper earth busbar, which shall run the full length of plant, and be
bolted to the plant main frame.
At the position where joints occur the earth busbar shall be tinned. The earth busbar shall
be rated to carry current equal in magnitude and duration to that associated with the short
circuit rating of the equipment.
The cases of all instruments, relays or other associated components mounted on the
switchgear shall be connected to the earth busbar by conductors of not less than 2.5 mm 2
cross-sectional area.
When components are provided for mounting separately each shall be provided with an
earthing terminal of not less than 30 mm2 cross-sectional area.
Earthing devices or earthing pads shall also be provided on HV switchgear bushings to

provide safe earthing of the circuit for maintenance work.
7 Control Plant and Supervisory Systems

7.1 Equipment Controls
7.1.1 HV switchgear control circuits:
The control circuits provided for the HV switchgear shall be in accordance with UETCL
specific requirements.
In addition to the requirements of the aforementioned, local “open”/”close” controls

for HV circuit-breaker, disconnector and earth switch, shall be provided by means of a
hand-held control unit with at least a 30 meters control cable (“umbilical”), through
sockets for the cable that shall be accessible from ground level.
7.1.2 MV switchgear control circuits:

The control circuits provided for the MV switchgear shall be located in a separate control
cubicle which is not adjacent to the MV breaker, preferably shielded by other equipment
on the trailers.
Local control of the MV breaker should also be similar to that of the HV switchgear, and
by means of the same 30 meters control cable (“umbilical”). The position of the similar,
but MV control socket for the cable control shall be accessible from ground level.
7.1.3 Time delay and alarm:

The “Close” control commands for both the HV and MV circuit- breakers shall be time
delayed for 30s, or the device should allow setting of the delay from zero to 60s. The time
delay period shall be specified on the control panel by means of a label. An audible alarm
shall be activated once the “close” signal has been initiated. The audible alarm shall be
clearly audible at a distance of 100m (no less than 50 dB(A) at 100m, or 90 dB(A) at 1m).
7.1.4 Mimic panel:

A complete mimic panel of the substation showing indication of all control points shall be
included and mounted on the front face of the switchgear control panel and on the
protection and mimic cubicle.
7.2 Control cubicles

Control cubicles shall be housed in a weatherproof, drip proof, dustproof and vermin-proof
enclosure with an IP65 rating, with adequate ventilation, draining facilities and humidity
control. Any divisions between compartments inside the cubicles shall be perforated to
assist the natural air circulation.
The cubicles doors shall be fastened with integral handles. Provision shall be made for
padlocking each cubicle door.
7.2.1 Dimensions and Quantity:

There shall be six control cubicles each with internal dimensions of 800wide x 600mm
deep with height to accommodate 38U on a 19” swing frame. The swing frame must be
suitable for 100kg mass. The panel numbering will typically be as follows:
1. MIB
2. Substation mimic and transformer protection scheme

3. Tap-changer scheme and metering,
4. Tele control
5. AC/DC distribution board and charger
6. 110VDC Battery banks
The panels must include 38 U mounting frames at the rear for mounting scheme back
plates.
Figure 6: Control cubicles

1 2 3 4 5 6
MIB Protection AVR RTU and AC/DC Battery
and Mimic control and telecommunications Distribution and
Metering Battery Charger
To be 1. Substation 1. AVR 1. Power Supplies 1. DC Module To house
supplied Mimic 2. Metering 2. Processor Cards 2. AC Chop-110VN32
complete, by 2. IED (for 3. DI input Cards over cells.
the 3. Control billing) 4. Communications 3. Charger (Position
manufacturer Module (e.g. Modems, 4. AC Module and
radio) 5. AC Supply dimensions
Module to be
Note: as per Note: as per finalized in
Note: as per UETCL Note: as per UETCL Note: as per design
UETCL requirement UETCL requirement UETCL stage).
requirement
7.2.2 Mounting and Position: requirement requirement
The cubicles in enclosure should preferably be mounted adjacent to one another Note:facing
as perto
UETCL
the outside of the trailers, to facilitate operation and minimize secondary cabling. If this is
not possible, panels 2 and 3 above must be at minimum grouped together. requirement
The control cubicle(s) shall have suitable shock absorption mountings installed to
minimize vibration of the unit and associated equipment whilst in transit or in service. The
cubicle shall be strategically positioned in the general design layout of the mobile unit so
as to afford maximum protection from explosion for operating personnel standing in front
of the cubicle, should any of the power plant equipment fail catastrophically.
Note: All cubicles and MV switchgear shall be housed in a weatherproof, suitably (main
and backup – minimum, two units – with each unit capable of sufficiently cooling the sizing
and equipment in the panel cubicle) air conditioned, drip proof, dustproof and vermin-proof
enclosure with an IP65 rating, with adequate ventilation, draining facilities and humidity
control.
7.2.3 Fabrication Details:

The outer housing of all cubicles shall be of a weatherproof construction (IP65) and
shall be manufactured from stainless steel (3CR12). The panel doors shall be top-hinged
with lifting handles, suitable gas lifters and locking facility.
The control cubicle shall incorporate all the necessary protection, control, indication and
metering gear installed on 19-inch swing-frame racks.
Ventilation to this equipment shall be achieved by means of a suitably rated fan and
"Donaldson" type air filter combination, built into the cubicle housing. The cubicle shall
be designed and manufactured with a “double-layer” outer wall filled with a 25 mm thick
layer (minimum) of suitable thermal insulating compound e.g. polyurethane foam,
between the two enclosure walls, to improve moderation of the air temperature within the
unit and reduce internal condensation. The cubicles are to be powder-coated white to
minimize solar heating.
7.2.4 Miscellaneous:
The control cubicle chambers shall be fitted with:
a) a suitably rated, thermostatically controlled panel heaters (maximum rating: 40W) to
ensure a moisture-free environment is maintained for the satisfactory operation and life
of the electrical protection and control equipment installed within;
b) adequate LED lighting controlled via a limit switch (N/O contact) that is activated
(contact closed) when the cubicle door is opened;
c) a separate compartment suitable for four, full- size, standard, lever-arch files for all
pertinent maintenance documentation, drawings, information etc;
d) Simplified schematic block diagrams of the complete substation, OLTC control,
transformer fan and pump control and secondary supply chop-over scheme, must be
available on laminated quick reference cards affixed by means of a flexible cable to the
inside of the panel housing.
7.3 Equipment Configuration

7.3.1 General
All control plant equipment (excluding enclosures) i.e. protection, metering, battery and
charger, RTU and communications equipment should be as per the UETCL system
automation requirement unless otherwise specified. the Supplier shall be responsible for
the sourcing, installation, and integration thereof.
The Contractor / Supplier shall be responsible for the provision of the applicable control
plant equipment, compatible with the existing UETCL system automation. The control
plant shall be compatible with IEC 61850 and IEC 60870 -5-103 substation protocols.
7.3.2 Control and Monitoring Equipment

The transformer feeder as well as the feeders shall be equipped with motorized circuit
breakers, isolators and earthing switches and shall be controlled locally and from the
SCADA system.
7.3.2.1 Control and Indication

Positively driven mechanical indicating devices shall be provided on all equipment to
indicate whether the primary equipment is in the open or closed position. Care shall be
exercised in the design and fitting of these indicators to ensure that the indicating device
and associated apparatus do not interfere with the correct operation of the circuit-breaker,
isolator or earth switch. Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with the necessary
auxiliary contacts and internal wiring to facilitate indication, which may take the form of
two indicating lamps and a discrepancy control switch.
7.3.2.2 Auxiliary Switches

Positively driven auxiliary switches (contacts) shall be provided on all circuit-breakers for
indication, control and interlocks. Auxiliary switches shall be strong, have a positive
wiping action when closing and shall be mounted in an accessible position clear of
operating mechanisms.
They shall be designed to make, break and carry without undue heating the current of their
associated circuit or a current of five amperes d.c., whichever is the higher. Not less than
four spare auxiliary switches - NO and NC - shall be provided with each circuit-breaker
and isolator.
All auxiliary switches shall be wired via secondary disconnecting devices to a terminal
board on the front of the fixed portion arranged in the same sequence for each individual
unit of the same type.
7.3.2.3 Control Switches

Control switches for electrically operated circuit-breakers, isolators and earth switches shall
be of the discrepancy type and shall be arranged to operate clockwise when closing the
circuit breakers and anti-clockwise when opening them.
The control switches shall be so designed as to prevent them from being operated
inadvertently, by requiring two independent movements to effect operation. The control
switch shall be so designed that when released by the operator it shall return automatically
to the neutral' position after having been turned to the "closed" or "open" position and shall
at the same time interrupt the supply of current to the operating mechanism of the circuit-
breaker.
Switches for other apparatus shall be operated by shrouded push buttons or have handles of
the spade type.
Control, reversing, selector and test switches shall be so mounted, constructed and wired as
to facilitate the maintenance of contacts without the necessity for disconnecting wiring.
7.3.3 Indications and Alarms

Indicators and alarms shall operate reliable at voltages down to 70 percent of nominal. A trip
circuit supervision scheme shall be provided for each circuit and shall be arranged to
monitor the continuity of the circuit-breaker trip coil and as much of the associated tripping
circuitry as possible whether the circuit breaker is open or closed and shall fulfil the
necessary technical requirements of the control circuit.
7.3.3.1 Indication System

Indications shall be of LED type, and shall operate from the DC supply. The annunciations
shall be grouped, each group containing the alarms and indications associated with the
particular switchgear, concerned. There shall be two push buttons for each group of
annunciations, one for "Accept" and the other for "Reset". When an alarm is originated the
lamp shall flash, and an audible alarm shall sound.
On operation of the "Accept" key the lamp shall cease to flash and shall give a steady
illumination and the audible alarm shall cease, unless already cancelled by the common cut
off key. The audible alarm shall cease after a defined time.
A distinction shall be made between functions by the use of the following colours:-
Red ... ... ... Trip/Apparatus in close position

Amber ... ... ... Alarm
White ... ... ... Indication
Green ... ... ... Apparatus in open position
The lettering should show white on a dark background or black on an illuminated

background. In the former case the amber or red shall show as a bar of approximately 3 mm
below the inscription. Smoke /fire alarms shall also be included in the annunciator group,
and the facial surround shall be colored red.
The duration of the flash shall be such that the legend may be easily read and the speed of
flashing shall not exceed three per second. An alarm whose initiating device does not reset
until the abnormality is remedied shall remain illuminated until the initiating device is reset,
when it shall be extinguished without the use of the reset key.
Annunciations which arise from signals of short duration (fleeting alarms) shall not restore
when the initiating contact restores. It shall be necessary to operate the reset key to clear
these. The reset key shall not be effective until after the alarm has been accepted. If a
fleeting alarm is re-operated after acceptance but before resetting, the annunciation shall
return to the flashing condition.
The annunciation circuit shall be readily adaptable for use with a fleeting or persistent
initiating signal. Facilities shall be provided for lamp test. The lamp test shall include a test
for all spare windows, which shall be identifiable as such under test conditions. For each
annunciator a test push button is to be provided.
Facilities shall also be provided to extend a common plant alarm into a remote supervisory
system at SCC. As a minimum requirement the following signals shall initiate the audible
and visible alarms at the plant:
a. Circuit-breaker tripped
b. Trip circuit supervision 1 failed
c. Trip circuit supervision 2 failed
d. Battery charger failed
e. Low battery voltage

f. Transformer gas or surge relay operated
g. winding temperature alarm and trip
h. oil temperature alarm and trip
i. Transformer overpressure
j. Tap-changer surge relay operated
k. Transformer automatic voltage control panel V.T. supply failed.
l. Circuit Breaker low gas pressure
m. Smoke / fire on plant
n. Bucholz alarm and trip for main tank and OLTC
o. PRV alarm and trip for main tank and OLTC
p. Oil level low alarm and trip
q. SF6 stage 1 alarm
r. SF6 stage 2 lockout
s. Differential trip
t. REF trip for HV and LV
u. Close block alarm
v. isolator interlock release
7.3.3.2 Indication Lamps

All indicating lamps and lamp holder assemblies shall be suitable for continuous operation
at the maximum site ambient temperature. To reduce heating and fouling of the panels,
lamps which are continuously alight shall have the minimum consumption consistent with
the good visibility of indications in a brightly-lit room. Indicating lamp glasses on control
and relay panels, shall conform to the following standard color code:-
Red ... Circuit-breaker closed

Green ... Circuit-breaker open
White ... Indications normally alight
Amber ... Alarm indications (on which action is necessary)
7.3.3.3 Alarm Indication System

The alarm indication equipment shall be constructed in such a manner that every incoming
alarm signal initiates an acoustic signal and simultaneously illuminates the section of the
annunciator. After recognition of the alarm it shall be possible to set the alarm by a push
button from flash light to steady light and stop the acoustic signal.
The cause of the alarm having cleared, the acoustic and visible alarm indication shall be cut
off; automatic cut-off of the alarm indications is not permitted but the acoustic signal shall
be limited to duration of some seconds. A new incoming signal shall be distinguishable
from signals which are already displayed.
With regard to the System Control Centre (SCC) extension, any incoming signal shall be
additionally available at the RTU cubicle and cabled further on to the RTU for transmission
to the SCC at Lugogo. The auxiliary equipment shall be provided with alarms for
malfunctions and the collected alarm shall be integrated into the alarm system of the control
panel. The miniature circuit breakers (MCB's) shall be provided with alarm contact and off-
switching shall be indicated.
7.3.4 Instruments
All instruments and apparatus shall be capable of carrying their full load currents without
undue heating. They shall not be damaged by the passage of fault currents within the rating
of the associated switchgear through the primaries of their corresponding instrument
transformers. All instruments and apparatus shall be back connected, and all cases shall be
earthed. Means shall be provided for zero adjustment of instruments without dismantling.
Relay reset devices must be either through cover push buttons or operated via a push-up to
reset slider. All voltage circuits to instruments shall be protected by suitably rated miniature
circuit breakers in each unearthed phase of the circuit placed as close as practicable to the
instrument transformer terminals, or where instruments are direct-connected, as close as
practicable to the main connection.
All power factor indicators shall have the star point of their current coils brought out to a
separate terminal, which shall be connected to the star point of the instrument current
transformer secondary windings.
Kilowatt-hour integrating meters shall comply with the requirements of IEC Standard 60521
Class 0.2 Meters. These meters should be read direct without multiplying factors for kWh
and maximum demand indicators and shall be remotely accessible via PC and remote
interrogation and upload of data from the System Control Center (SCC).
7.3.5 Protection of Secondary Circuits

Each secondary circuit shall be adequately protected.
7.3.5.1 Anti-Condensation Heaters

Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided inside each cubicle. They shall be shrouded
and located so as not to cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
Any major items of electrical equipment which are liable to suffer from internal
condensation due to atmospheric or load variations are to be fitted with anti-condensation
heating devices suitable for automated electrical operation, with AC distribution voltage
single phase, of sufficient capacity to raise the internal ambient temperature by 5oC. The
electrical apparatus so protected is to be designed so that the maximum permitted rise in
temperature is not exceeded if the heaters are energized while the apparatus is in operation.
Where heaters are fitted, a suitable terminal box and control switch, with indicating lamp, is
to be provided and mounted on an accessible position. All such equipment, whether fitted
with a heating device or not, is to be provided with suitable drainage and is to be free from
pockets in which moisture can collect.
7.3.6 Earthing Arrangements

All control and relay panels shall have a continuous copper earth bar of a sectional area of
not less than 80 mm2 run along the bottom of the panels, each end being connected to the
main earthing system. All metal cases of equipment on the panels shall be connected to this
bar by Copper conductors having a sectional area not less 2.5 mm2.
Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in

themselves, and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible
position. Each separate link shall be suitably labeled. The links shall be of the bolted type,
and have provision for attaching test leads.
7.3.7 Transducers
The transducers shall be freely programmable for V, A, MW, and MVAr applications (a
minimum of four programmable ports). In addition, following standards and rules or
approved equivalents shall be applied: DIN 19 207 to 19 215 and DIN 43 700 to 43 836.
The output measuring signal will be 0-10 mA or +/- 10 mA (for W and VAr), 0-20 mA (for
V and A), and linear and over a wide range independent of the burden in the output circuit.
Power supply shall be 110VDC but preferably have no requirements for auxiliary voltage.
 Temperature range -20 to 70oC.
 Linearity error, hysteresis and repetivity together +1% maximum
 Temperature effects lower than 0.03%/oC
 Installation protection degree IP 65 located in 19" rack, which needs to be properly
ventilated.
 Input rating shall be 1 A and 110 VAC.
The transducer will be provided with secure elements to short-circuit the current input and
open the voltage input if the module is not inserted. The wiring between the transducer and
the RTU cubicle will be wired via sheathed (screened) cable in order to eliminate any
possible interference. It shall be possible to measure the input of the transducer during
service.
The transducers for tap changer position indication to SCADA shall be provided with
characteristics similar to the ones already implemented in the existing UETCL system.
7.3.7.1 Transducers Additional Properties

a) Shall be freely programmable for V, A, MW and MVAr
b) The output shall be galvanically isolated from the input
c) Voltage transducer shall be rated 0….20mA max. and 110VAC
d) Current transducers shall be rated 0….20mA max. and 1 amp
e) Watt transducers shall be rated -10…0…+10mA (110VAC / 1A)
f) Vars transducers shall be rated -10…0…+10mA (110VAC / 1A)
g) The primary burden of the transducers shall not exceed 0.5 VA.
h) The minimum accuracy class shall be 0.5.
i) Insulation level shall be 2 kV for 50 Hz and the impulse withstand will be 5 kV
peak
7.3.8 Meters and Energy Management

The minimum size of indicating meters will be 90 x 90mm with a maximum of 90° needle
deflection. All ammeters shall be rated for 1A, but the indication scale shall be calibrated
to indicate the primary current flowing through the current transformer. The faceplates for
the other ratios of the current transformers must also be included.
The instantaneous, average and maximum current values must be displayed on the amp
meter. The maximum current value must be hand reset. An ammeter must be provided
for each phase and current leads shall not be switched.
The voltage meter must be rated for 110 V but the indication scale will be calibrated for
132 kV, 33 kV and 11kV. One voltage meter with a selector switch can be provided for
each voltage, with the MV meters selectable by means of an automated system that is
integrated with the MV voltage tap selector switch (OLSS) or Off Circuit Tap Switch
(OCTS) interlink.
All energy meters provided by the Contractor shall be provided with summation CT's
where necessary. In all cases, the meter and CT accuracies shall be such as to guarantee a
final reading within 0.2s accuracy, for revenue metering. Where more than one incomer is
to be summated, a single meter with the required summation CT's shall be provided. In all
cases, the meters shall be correctly calibrated in accordance with the VT and CT ratios and
shall be mounted in an accessible position on the front of the panel, so as to allow the
reading of the meter without opening the front panels. The additional requirements of the
system are as follows:
a) Programmable digital system.
b) Accumulate power flow to both feeders.
c) The data relayed to the SCC.
All mentioned instruments and meters shall be supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned, by the contractor / supplier.
7.3.9 Labels for Switching Devices and Wires

Labels are required for all circuit-breakers, isolators and earthing switches. The necessary
numbers and text to be written in English has to be submitted for review by the Purchaser.
On each entry to a terminal a non-fading and loosening plastic label indicating the counter
connection of the switching device or the pertaining cable number respectively shall be
provided.
7.4 Supervisory Systems

7.4.1 Tele-control Equipment:
The tele-control RTU unit shall be included in the procurement. Supply to this unit shall be
provided from the main 110V DC system, and shall also include appropriate
telecommunications equipment in the telecontrol panel. Also suitable routing for
microwave antenna and fibre optic cables (must be considered in the layout design) shall
be provided. All shall be in line with UETCL existing schemes and systems.
7.4.2 Plant Tele Control

The transducers for analogue input shall be able to measure up to 20% above the nominal
value. The Contractor shall provide screened auxiliary cables and connections from the
switchgear etc. to the RTU cubicle, which is necessary to interface the SCADA system to
the power system through the RTU.
The supply, installation, termination and commissioning of all the control/signal cables and
SCADA equipment shall be included in this Contract. The following requirements must be
met:
a) NO and NC potential free contacts shall be provided per breaker, isolator, and
earthswitch for signaling, indicating and controlling purposes.
b) Tap position signaling and control including tapping time information will be realized
through potential free contacts have to be mounted on this equipment.
c) In addition, all signal and alarm relays s be provided with additional potential free NO
and NC contacts.
 Each NO and NC auxiliary contact has to be connected to terminal strips.
 Instrument transformers shall have suitable cores or terminal for connection of
transducers supplied under this contract for remote indication purposes.
 One general switch for the whole plant facilitates for local switch-over from SCC
control to local (substation) control shall be provided. The position of this switch shall
be wired for transmission to the SCC.
 Detailed requirements for the telecontrol and supervision of the substation concerned
are shown on the attached point data sheets.
7.4.3 RTU Cubicle

All plant control and monitoring signals associated with the RTU are to be marshalled
through the RTU cubicle using BCU technology. The complete wiring, configuration,
testing and commissioning of all Control equipment shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
Generally, the cubicles shall be sized to accommodate the full complement of cables and
instruments without overcrowding of gland plates, trunking and racks. The orientation shall
allow for easy access for connection and all labelling shall be clearly visible.
7.4.4 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)

The RTU is to be designed, supplied, installed, programmed and commissioned,
complying with the following:
a) BCU Technology
b) Data concentrator with ports for serial communication to all the relays, including
future relays and two spare.
c) Provision must be made for binary inputs from potential free contacts for all
switchgear and future equipment.
d) Provision must be made for analog inputs from -10 to 10mA transducers from all
feeders and future feeders.
e) Provision must be made for outputs to control all switchgear and future switchgear.
f) Future expansion at this plant.

g) Protocol must include IEC 60180, RP570 and IEC-60870 (60870-5-101 for
communication ports, 60870-103 for plant side, 60870-5-104 for gateway).
h) Interrogation of protection relays must be done from the control center and remote
site
i) Commissioning includes the verification of all indication and control between the
equipment control room and SCADA.
j) The cabinet must be a glass front cabinet with internal fans and sockets (AC and
DC).
k) A “door open” alarm is to be provided.
For information: The following data shall be available remotely through the RTU -
battery voltage, battery charger voltage and load current. The RTU shall be active and
operational to monitor the DC systems when the substation is not in service.
The Contractor shall also conform to the requirements listed in the technical schedules and
annexes.
8 Protection Equipment
8.1 General
The control system shall contain all operating and interlocking controls, the miniature circuit
breakers for the drives and the potential transformers as well as a sufficient number of
connection terminals where applicable.
The Bay Control Units shall provide operating controls for each switch positions, and shall
be indicated exactly in a mimic diagram.
Furthermore, each bay shall be provided with adequate maintenance and supervisory
equipment, indicating instruments, miniature circuit breakers for the protection of the
secondary windings of the potential transformers as well as the switchgear drives and a BS
socket with earth contacts.
For testing purposes, the current transformer facilities have to be incorporated in such a
manner that measuring instruments and relays may be connected without danger and
without opening the secondary circuit of the current transformers.
For connection of the remote control equipment and tele-measuring devices, similar
provisions on each different connection point (terminal block of panels) shall be made.
The supply voltage shall be 110 V DC for protection, control and communication systems.
8.1.1 Testing Facilities

When current transformers and protective relays are fitted, facilities shall be provided for
primary and secondary injection tests to be carried out. These facilities shall be such that
wires and connections need not be disconnected for the tests to be carried out. The designs
and connections to the test facilities, shall be submitted for review prior to testing of the
equipment..
8.1.2 Transformer protection

The transformer protection scheme shall be free-issued and in line with UETCL existing
Protection schemes.
For information: The transformer protection scheme shall include differential either
33kV or 11kV configuration, three-phase HV Over Current, HV and MV Restricted Earth
Fauth (high impedance), HV and MV Earth Fault (IDMTL or DTL), Buchholz Pressure
and Level, Conservator Oil level, Tank Pressure, High Temperature, and OLTC Over
Current blocking.
If critical alarms are not acknowledged and/or resolved (e.g. Buchholz, Oil level, High
Temperature, Protection not healthy, and DC fail), the scheme should initiate a trip of both
HV and MV circuit breakers (master trip) after a set time delay.
8.1.3 On-load tap-changer

The on-load tap-changer protection scheme shall be free issued.
8.1.4 Feeder protection

The feeder protection scheme shall be free-issued and in line with UETCL existing
Protection schemes.
For information: The feeder protection scheme shall include the following: line distance
protection, three-phase MV overcurrent, MV Earth Fault (IDMTL or DTL), and MV
Sensitive Earth Fault (IDMTL or DTL).
8.1.5 Measurement
For Information: The measurement for SCADA indication will be derived from the Bay
Control Units. All shall be in line with UETCL existing schemes and systems.
8.1.6 Alarm, Control and Tripping Contacts

Alarm and tripping contacts shall be provided with electrically independent and unearthed
circuits and shall be insensitive to vibration and earth tremors. This insensitivity shall not
depend on the method of mounting, but shall be an inherent feature of the contact
assembly. Auxiliary relays shall not be used.
8.1.7 Alarm and control contacts

Contacts providing alarm output shall be rated as follows:
Make and carry for 200 ms 5A @ d.c. 250V
Carry for 1 s 2A @ d.c. 250V
Carry continuously 1A @ d.c. 250 V
Break (inductive L/R 40 ms) 20 W @ d.c. 250 V
8.1.8 Tripping contacts

Contacts providing trip outputs shall be rated as follows:
Make and carry for 200 ms 5A @ d.c. 250V
Carry for 1s 2A @ d.c. 250V
Carry continuously 1A @ d.c. 250 V
Break (Inductive L/R 40 ms) 20 W @ d.c. 250 V
8.1.9 Wiring and Termination

All secondary wiring within panels, racks, boards, etc. shall be in accordance with the
pertaining IEC recommendations and shall be carried out for the fully rated distribution
voltage (2 kV AC, 1 min. test voltage). The minimum cross-section of each copper wire
shall be as given below:
- 2.5 mm2 for current transformer circuits
- 2.5 mm2 for all power consumers such as motors, heaters etc. to 10A
- 1.5 mm2 for all control and instrument wiring 110 V service voltages
- 0.6 mm2 for telephone wiring.
Wiring shall be neatly run in PVC rigid plastic wire ways clear of any metal panels and
filled no more than 70% or bundled with no bunch containing more than twelve wires. The
ends of each wire core and all secondary panel wiring shall be clearly identified.Internal
wiring between instruments or other devices not using the terminal block shall be permitted
within the same compartment only.
The protection cubicle shall have a 10% quantity of spare terminals supplied. Insulating
barriers shall be provided between each pair of power circuits and between the terminal
categories. The height and the spacing shall give adequate protection to the terminals.
8.2 Measuring Instruments

Ammeters and voltmeters to be supplied shall be of flush-mounted design, dust and
moisture-proof, and shall be equipped with moving system of 0.1 accuracy class, for
connection to either the 110 V or the 1 A on the secondary side of the instrument
transformer or to the transducers.
Measuring instruments indicating DC values shall have a moving coil mechanism of the
same accuracy. Indicating instruments fitted into switchboards or control panels shall be of
square pattern with quadrant scale, equipped with non-reflecting panes and adjustment
facilities. Being associated to the mimic diagram the arrangement of these instruments shall
comply with it.
All indicating instruments must basically withstand without damage a continuous overload
of 40% referred to the rated output value of the corresponding instrument transformers The
instruments must be short-circuit proof, the ammeter shall subsequently not be damaged by
the passage of fault currents.
Active power indicators and reactive power indicators shall, as far as specified, operate bi-
directionally enabling power flow and reactive measurements for both directions.
The main and check kWh 3phase four wire meters, shall be of square or rectangular form,
and compatible to the existing CEWE Prometer 100 or ELSTER metering systems, and
shall be installed in the cubicles for AVR control and Metering. The method of the
mounting of the meters on the panels shall be the same as for the other instruments. The
form of the meters shall be flush with the face. They shall be programmable solid-state type
and of 0.2s accuracy class and be supplied with a MD indicator and a contact for submitting
impulses to the SCADA system.
Alarm annunciators shall be provided to indicate mal-functions of the system. An

illuminated section with the clearly legible inscription of the kind of alarm shall be
provided. The annunciators shall be recognizable to the pertaining feeder and for general
alarm in the center of the board.
8.3 Protective Relays and Associated Apparatus

8.3.1 General
Protective equipment shall be designed to disconnect faulty circuits with speed and
certainty without interference with healthy circuits. They shall also be so designed that
when properly applied, incorrect operation of the circuit breakers does not occur as a
result of transient phenomena not arising from a faulty condition of the section of feeder
or plant associated with each set of relays but which may occur during fault periods due to
disturbances on the system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the correct operation of the protective
equipment and shall submit for review the recommended relay settings supported by
design calculations for all protective equipment being supplied.
8.3.2 Standards
All equipment must be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with the requirements
of the latest published standards:
IEC 60255
IEC 60068
IEC 61850
IEC 60870
Unless otherwise specified in this specification.
8.3.3 Warranty
The Contractor must submit to the Purchaser a Letter of Warranty that all material used in
the manufacture of the proposed equipment will withstand Uganda’s climatic conditions.
8.3.4 Relays
All relays shall be contained in rustproof cases. All metal bases and frames of relays shall
be earthed except where the latter must be insulated for special requirements. All relays
essential for protection shall be mounted on the front only of relay panels. Where relays
are accommodated in the rear of panels they shall be mounted so as to be accessible for
inspection and wiring.
The relays shall be so arranged that replacements can be effected quickly and with the
minimum amount of labor. Relay equipment incorporating electronic devices shall be
arranged to plug in and shall have positive means for retaining them in the service
position. Equipment incorporating telephone type relays shall have similar facilities.
The contacts of all relays shall be capable of making the maximum current, which can
occur in the circuit, which they have to control. They shall also be capable of breaking
such currents unless provision is made for breaking the current on contacts elsewhere in
the circuits. The following are minimum requirements:
Carry continuously : 5 A DC
Make and carry : 30 A for 0,2 sec
Break : 75 W
Relays shall not be affected by mechanical shock or vibration or by external magnetic

fields consistent with the plant movement or method of mounting. The contacts shall be
capable of repeated operation without deterioration. All relays which are connected to
complete either the tripping circuit of circuit-breaker or the coil circuit of an auxiliary
tripping relay shall be provided with operation indicators which wherever possible shall be
of the mechanical type.
Indicators shall also be provided on such additional relay elements as will enable the type
or phase of the fault condition to be identified. Each indicator shall be capable of being
reset by hand without opening the relay case and it shall not be possible to operate the
relay when resetting the operation indicator. Each indicator shall be designed so that it
will not move before the relay has completed its operation except for the indication disc
relay where the indication may show just before the trip contacts are made. Indicators
shall be clearly visible from the front when operated and concealed at all other times.
All protective relays, which initiate tripping, shall have not less than two independent
pairs of contacts of which one shall operate the tripping relay or circuit-breaker trip coil
without the interposition of auxiliary contactors and without the use of reinforcing
contactors. Where relays are required to operate with a time delay the delaying apparatus
shall not be of the dashpot type.
Relay directional elements which are designed to be energized normally by voltage and
current when carrying any current between zero and 15 times rated current shall take up
such a position that the contacts are open when the voltage coil is not energized.
All relays used for tripping shall operate when the supply voltage is reduced to 40%
below, or raised to 150% of rated voltage. All relays shall be capable of withstanding
voltages up to 150% of rated voltage. All relays shall be suitably marked with the
following information:
a) Function of relay
b) Phase identification of the current supply
c) Characteristic curve where appropriate
d) Rated current and voltage of the relay coils
e) Rated making capacity of tripping contacts.
Note: Items (a) and (b) above shall be visible from the front without removing the cover.
All relays other than auxiliary relays shall be provided with a cardholder and card, the
latter having space for the user’s reference number and bearing the following information
relating to the actual service connection of the relay:
a) Current transformer ratio including all ratios of multi-ratio transformers
b) Voltage transformer ratio
c) Ratio in use where multi-ratio current transformers are employed.
d) Value of an external resistance or impedance.
Rectifiers used in or in association with protective relays shall be of the selenium or other
approved type. In order to minimize the effect of electrolysis operation indicator coils and
d.c. relay operating coils shall be so placed in the circuit that they are not connected to the
positive pole of the battery except through contacts, which are normally open.
Withdrawable pattern relays shall be designed so that when in the withdrawn position the
associated current transformers shall be automatically short-circuited and the associated
tripping circuit disconnected. Secondary injection testing facilities must be provided.
Each terminal at the back of the case must be numbered. Provision must be made for a
relay identification label on the back of the case.
The current rating of all terminals must be 10 A continuously and 200 A for 1 second.
The minimum insulation between all terminals and the case earth must be 5 kV rms for 1
minute and 3.5 kV rms for 1 minute between adjacent terminals. The auxiliary supply for
all the relays will be 110 V DC.
Identical relays must be used for the same function on identical panels throughout the
plant.
8.3.5 Testing Facilities

All fixed and moving portions of the panel shall be provided with facilities to enable
applied high voltage tests to be carried out. Provision shall also be made for temporarily
completing the auxiliary circuits when the circuit-breaker is isolated to enable the
functioning of the circuit-breaker to be tested.
When current transformers and protective relays are fitted, facilities shall be provided for
primary and secondary injection tests to be carried out. These facilities shall be such that
wires and connections need not be disconnected for the tests to be carried out.
In addition, one configuration and testing laptop complete with interfacing cabling, relay
configuration software for protection, communication, control, and voltage control setting,
shall be supplied together with the plant.
8.3.6 Relays, MCB's and Ancillary Apparatus

Relays associated with the three phase shall be marked with the appropriate phase
identification, and the MCB's shall also be suitably labeled. The use of permanently
energized relays shall be kept to a minimum and where approved these shall be of a type
having a low burden to prevent drain on the station battery.
Isolating MCB's shall be provided on each panel to facilitate the isolation of all sources of
electrical potential, to allow testing or other work to be carried out on the panel without
danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other panels.
All MCB's shall be equipped with one NO and one NC auxiliary contact for status
monitoring and alarms signaling at plant and to SCADA.
All MCB's shall be accommodated within the cubicle. MCBs shall be grouped and spaced
according to their function in order to facilitate identification and with labels. Links in
current transformer circuits shall be of the bolted type. Ancillary equipment shall be
adequately labelled.
Resistance boxes shall be so mounted inside the cubicle that their adjustment screws are on
a vertical and accessible face. Resistances shall be provided with stud terminals. Setscrews
shall not be used.
8.3.7 Name Plates

Each relay must be provided with a fixed name plate in front for with information about the
relay.
8.3.8 Requirements
General: The relay protection must be designed for polluted and humid
environments and fulfil their duties for the climate in Uganda
Design: The relay protection must have a modular and digital design. The
manufacturer of the relays must have a supply record of 35years for
numerical relays.
Settings: It must be possible to do all settings both from the relay front panel and
with a PC through connection in the front panel of the relay
Relay keyboard: The relay must have a complete number keyboard in the front panel for
settings and downloading of measured values on the front panel display
Relay functions: The relay must contain all the specified functions. However if required, it
must be possible for UETCL to enable or disable any extra functions in the
relay without change of hardware.
Front display: The measured service currents and/or service voltages must be visible at
the front display of the relay. In order to see all values at the same time, a
four-line front display must be used.
Trip log: The relay must store a record of the fault-trip values, such as currents,
voltages, operating time etc. The values must be available at the front
display of the relay.
Power supply: The relay’s power supply must accept a rated operating voltage from 110
VDC without the use of external resistors and without external
reconnections
Output relays: Tripping must appear on separate output relays. At least two of the output
relays must have change-over contacts. The watchdog relay must have a
normally closed contact.
AC inputs: All relays must be rated 1A. They must accept rated frequencies from 15-
60 Hz.
Opto inputs: The relay must be supplied with isolated opto inputs accepting a rated
operating voltage from 110 VDC without the use of external resistors and
without external reconnections.
Configuration: There must be an off line configuration plug for PC connection located at
the front panel of the relay.
Users manuals: The users manuals must be user-friendly and divided into one general
hardware and software description and one setting manual describing only
the specified functions and necessary settings for the different types of
relays
8.4 Interlocking System

The interlock system shall prevent all incorrect operations of the isolators and earth
switches, and must meet the following requirements:
 Operation of the isolators only under the condition that the circuit breakers are switched
off.
 The HV earthswitch to have mechanical and electrical interlocking against the HV
isolator.
 The earthswitch interlocked in the MV switchgear shall be between the busbar isolator
and earth switch, and shall be achieved by the use of a three position switch.
 Failure of the auxiliary power supply shall not lead to the release of an interlock.
 Electrical interlocks shall be provided to avoid any incidence of earthing live on either
side of transformer.
 Tripping of the HV transformer circuit breaker shall inter-trip all MV circuit breakers.
8.5 Instrumentation
8.5.1 General
The Plant instrumentation and control shall be incorporated in the Bay Control Units.
8.5.2 HV Transformer Bay Control Section

Mimic diagram shall be complete with discrepancy control switches for the circuit breaker,
isolator and earthswitch.
Digital indicating instruments of flush pattern comprising of:

a) Multi-function instrument with an ammeter with reversible scale and individual
phase current measurement, a phase wattmeter of balanced load pattern with center
zero and reversible scale, a 3 phase VAr-meter with balanced load pattern, center
zero and reversible scale, and a voltmeter with suppressed zero
b) Push button for trip relay reset.
8.5.3 Transformer Voltage Regulation

The load tap changer of the transformer shall be automatically control in case of voltage
drop or rise. Both the sensitivity and time of response must be adjustable to avoid
multiplied tap changer operations in the case of short time voltage fluctuations.
Special consideration shall be given to allow for parallel operation of two to three
transformers. While operating the transformers in parallel, the voltage control of all
transformers shall operate in synchronism or one control unit shall work as a master unit.
Provision for Interlocking facilities with the MV bus section breaker shall be provided to
prevent mal-operation in so far as the tap changers of all transformers are not on the same
position. The instruments shall consist of:
a) An automatic voltage regulator
b) Paralleling device or function
c) Auto/manual selector switch
d) Master/slave/individual selection switch
e) Push buttons for raise/lower commands
f) Tap position indicators which shall be relayed to SCC
g) Necessary signal/control lamps for parallel operation
h) Alarm annunciator block
i) Supervisory switch (local/remote)
j) All necessary relays, MCB's, aux. devices, etc. necessary for proper function.
8.5.4 MV Feeder and Transformer Bay Control Section

Mimic diagram shall be complete with discrepancy control switches for the circuit breaker,
busbar isolator/earth switches.
Digital indicating instruments of flush pattern comprising of:

a) Multi-function instrument with an ammeter with reversible scale and individual phase
current measurement, and a voltmeter with suppressed zero
b) Push button for trip relay reset.
8.5.5 Relays
All metal bases and frames of relays are earthed except where the latter must be insulated
for special requirements. The manufacturer of the relays must have a supply record of
35years for numerical relays.
Indicators shall also be provided on such additional relay elements as will enable the type
or phase of the fault condition to be identified. Each indicator shall be capable of being
reset by hand without opening the relay case and it shall not be possible to operate the
relay when resetting the operation indicator.
Each indicator shall be designed so that it will not move before the relay has completed its
operation except for the indication disc relay where the indication may show just before
the trip contacts are made. Indicators will be clearly visible from the front when operated
and concealed at all other times.
All relays used for tripping can operate when the supply voltage is reduced to 40% below,
or raised to 120% of rated voltage.
All relays shall be marked with the following information:

a) Function of relay
b) Phase identification of the current supply
c) Characteristic curve where appropriate
d) Rated current and voltage of the relay coils
e) Rated making capacity of tripping contacts.
Items (a) and (b) above shall be visible from the front without removing the cover.
All relays other than auxiliary relays shall be provided with a cardholder and card, the
latter having space for the user’s reference number and bearing the following information
relating to the actual service connection of the relay:
a) Current transformer ratio including all ratios of multi-ratio transformers
b) Voltage transformer ratio
c) Ratio in use where multi-ratio current transformers are employed.
d) Value of an external resistance or impedance.
Withdrawable pattern relays are designed so that when in the withdrawn position the
associated current transformers shall be automatically short circuited and the associated
tripping circuit disconnected. Secondary injection testing facilities will be provided. Each
terminal at the back of the case will be numbered. Provision will be made for a relay
identification label on the back of the case.
All the settings of the relays are implemented as approved by the Contract Manager.
For circulation current protection employing high impedance voltage operated relays, the
points of injection for relay voltage settings tests shall be across the relay and stabilizing
resistance. The fault setting for this type of protection is to be established by secondary
injection where it is impracticable to ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection is
to be made across the appropriate relay bus wires with all associated relays, setting resistors
and CT's connected.
8.6 Transformer Protection System

The following protection, indication, control, and contacts for telecontrol shall be
provided for the transformer together with the switchgear connections, in alignment with
all winding connections,
Protection
a) Biased differential protection.
b) HV Non-directional overcurrent and earth fault protection.
c) MV Non-directional overcurrent and earth fault protection.

d) HV Restricted earth fault protection.
e) MV Restricted earth fault protection.
f) Buchholtz pressure and gas.
g) Oil temperature.
h) HV and MV Winding temperature.
i) 33 kV Sustained earth fault protection.
j) 33 kV Feeder Cable protection
k) 33 kV AUX TX Cable protection
l) SF6 indication and low gas lockouts
m)Circuit breaker inter-trip – all MV breakers must open when the 132 kV breaker is
opened
Controls and Indications

a) HV and MV circuit breaker, isolator and earth switch open.
b) HV and MV circuit breaker, isolator and earth switch closed.
c) Three-in-one ammeter for the MV and HV currents.
d) SF6 indications HV and MV circuit breaker
e) Supervision controls switch (Remote/Local).
f) HV and MV Voltage indication.
g) Main and check three phase energy consumption meters with maximum demand.
h) HV and MV remote control of the breakers, isolators and earth switches.
i) Automatic voltage control (including the parallel scheme).
Contacts for Tele control:

a) Breaker, isolator and earth switch status (open/close). (One changeover contact
will be allowed)
b) DC failed. (Contact close when DC fails)
c) Protection not healthy. (Contact close when protection is not healthy)
d) Protection operated. (A fleeting contact close when protection operates)
e) Supervision (Remote/Local).
f) HV and MV current indication (White phase).
g) HV and MV power and reactive power indication.
h) HV and MV breaker and isolator control (Trip/close).
i) SF6 indications.
j) Power flow indication.
k) HV and MV voltage indication.
8.6.1 Differential Protection

This protection shall trip for all the phase and earth faults inside the area and shall have to
rest stable for all faults outside the area limited by the current transformers. This protection
shall have compensated inrush-proof relays with low burden, lower than 1 VA. Proper
means shall be used to detect internal faults that could occur during the inrush period or
during tap changing. This relay shall be connected to the current transformers and shall be
programmed to match the vector groups of the two sides.
It shall be a three phase relay with small burden, absolute stability at fault currents bigger
than 10x In and an extremely short tripping time with two cycles at differential current equal
to 5 times the nominal current. The tripping contactor of the relay shall be fitted with
sufficient contacts; potential free normally open contacts of ample capacity to trip all the
circuit breakers which must be influenced for this protection.
The setting of bias and basic setting must be adjustable in steps in order to cover the
maximum mismatch between the HV and MV due to error of the CT's, range of regulation
of the tap changer, and AUX TX consumption. This protection should be wired to enable
the measurement of differential and restrictive current in service without any possibility of
causing open circuits on the secondary side of the current transformers. The protection shall
have a very low consumption.
It shall be possible to measure the differential current at the relay and the current before and
after each interposing transformer. It shall have an annunciator with a visible flag, which
will be reset by push button and shall be on the relay.
8.6.2 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

The restricted earth fault relay shall be operated from a completely separate set of line
current transformers of Class X with knee point voltage of not less than 169V (refer to the
current transformer table) installed in the power transformer bushings. Two current
transformers are necessary on the neutral-to-earth connection.
The aim of this protection is to cover a reasonable percentage of the winding with more
efficiency than the differential relay so that it would need to be extremely sensitive.
Therefore, all the random restrictions such as out-of-balance current due to tap changing,
current transformer unit mismatching and power transformer magnetization shall be
considered on the setting and/or dimensioning of the current transformer.
For this protection, 1 phase high impedance relay will be provided and all the aspects
regarding the periphery, such as stability of the protection, dimensions of current
transformer considering the peak short circuit current etc, and all the auxiliary equipment
such as interposing CT's, preliminary resistor, VDR resistor filter for harmonic and DC
component shall be considered for the tender.
Tripping of this protection shall activate all the circuit breakers surrounding the power
transformer and include all the material such as surge-proof inter-tripping relays if
necessary.
8.6.3 Standby Earth Fault Protection

This protection scheme shall be connected to the neutral CT of the transformer to operate as
a back-up protection of the in-feed protection. The relay shall be with the following setting
range:
a) Current: 5% to 20% of In in steps of 2.5%
b) Time: shall be a standardized inverse type so as to grade well with line protection
8.6.4 Overcurrent Protection

This relay shall be of the electronic type with standard IDMT characteristic capable of
current/time grading in order to coordinate with the existing downstream protection.
a) Phase current range shall be at least 50-200 percent in steps of not more than 25%.
b) Earth current range shall be at least 20-80% in steps of at least 10%.
c) The time setting shall be continuously variable or in small steps of 0.05 up to at least
1.0 using a time dial.
d) These setting ranges are to be checked with the coordination study and if necessary
will be changed.
e) Standard IDMT means a curve that can maintain inverse characteristic up to 30
times set current.
f) The IDMT relay shall have a variety of selectable curves i.e.
 standard inverse
 very inverse
 extremely inverse
 definite time with various settings of 0.5 sec up to 2.5 sec in max. steps of 0.5
secs..
g) The high set at the transformer infeed feeder shall be the low transient overreach
(90%) with a tripping time of less than 25 ms.
h) Reset time shall be less than 50 ms and greater than 90% of the operating current.
i) On the transformer bays and MV feeders, three pole overcurrent relays plus one pole
standby earth fault relay shall be provided.
j) The high set shall be able to be set to infinity.
8.6.5 MV Feeder Cable Protection

This protection shall detect faults on the 33 kV power cables on the MV feeders. The
protection shall be either current differential or equivalent instantaneous protection to be
approved by the Contract Manager. When a fault is detected, the connected MV circuit
breaker shall be tripped.
8.7 Feeder Protection System

The following protection, indication, control, and contacts for tele control shall be
provided for the feeders:
Protection
a) Non-directional overcurrent and earth fault protection.
b) Distance protection.
c) Auto-reclose.
d) A slave trip relay and slave close relay.
e) Remote control of the breaker.
f) 33 kV Cable protection
g) SF6 indication and low gas lockouts
h) Circuit breaker inter-trip - MV breakers must open when the 132 kV breaker is
opened
Controls and Indications

a) Feeder circuit breaker, isolator and earth switch open.

b) Feeder circuit breaker, isolator and earth switch closed.
c) Three-in-one ammeter for the MV kV current.
d) SF6 indications Feeder circuit breaker
e) Supervision controls switch (Remote/Local).
f) Feeder Voltage indication.
g) Main and check three phase energy consumption meters with maximum demand.
h) Feeder remote control of the breakers, isolators and earthswitches.
Contacts for Tele control:

a) Breaker, isolator and earth switch status (open/close). (One changeover contact
will be allowed)
b) DC failed. (Contact close when DC fails)
c) Protection not healthy. (Contact close when protection is not healthy)
d) Protection operated. (A fleeting contact close when protection operates)
e) Supervision (Remote/Local).
f) Feeder current indication (White phase).
g) Feeder power and reactive power indication.
h) Feeder breaker and isolator control (Trip/close).
i) SF6 indications.
j) Power flow indication.
k) Feeder voltage indication.
8.7.1 Distance Protection

The distance protection shall be capable of clearing all types of fault selectively,
independently of system earthing. The distance protection shall be of the solid state type. It
shall, in any case, coordinate in all aspects with the other end existing protection.
The relay shall have preferably at least three measuring systems for faults to ground and at
least one measuring element for all other cases (full scheme). The measuring elements must
be healthy phase polarized. Testing and checking of the adjustment can be accomplished
without removing the distance relay from the panel or disconnecting its terminal.
The starting elements shall be of under impedance independent type.
Three directional distance zones with two additional back-up steps, one of which shall be
directional and the other non-directional. The reach of each zone shall be individually
adjustable.
The longest feeder after the furthest end shall be covered with the third zone setting range
for all the service conditions. It is desirable to adjust the zero sequence current
compensation value vectorally and it must be possible at least to set this factor between 0 to
2 in small steps.
The relay shall be equipped with switch onto faults facilities. Voltage transformers shall be
supervised against imbalanced conditions by a device, which inhibits the operation of the
relay when the voltage balance is lost.
An operation indicator shall be mounted on the relay front with an LED indication which
identifies the phase affected and the zone in which tripping has occurred, together with an
additional indication of potential free relay contacts.
This protection shall be capable of working together with the existing distance protection in
a permissive under-reach and overreach transferred tripping scheme and all the necessary
elements shall be supplied. It shall be possible to set this protection on the stated schemes
for the shortest length.
The resetting of this protection shall be effected by hand and by SCADA, although the
protection should still be in operating condition if the indications are not reset. The pick-up
time for all faults shall be between 20 - 40ms.
This distance protection shall be suitable for provision of a three-phase auto-reclosing

scheme. The fault locator shall indicate the distance from the point of fault to the point of
installation of the fault locator and shall transmit the fault parameters to SCC in a manner
consistent with the supplied RTU and the DATA engineering at the SCC. The fault locator
shall be part of the distance protection relay.
8.7.2 Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection

Overcurrent relays with instantaneous elements for fast curve tripping and delayed
elements with an inverse or very inverse time characteristic capable of current/time
grading comprising three one-phase over-current and one earth fault relay.
The setting of the current range will be 50% to 200% in steps of 10% for the phases and
10% to 40% for the earth fault elements. These setting ranges are to be checked with the
coordination study and, if necessary be changed.
High set overcurrent elements with an additional time delay adequate for the coordination
with the selected fuses starting element shall be provided. Reset current shall be greater
than 95% of the operating current in the whole range. Visual indicators for phase and earth
trip and starting shall be provided.
8.7.3 Sensitive Earth Fault

The above should be able to protect against high impedance faults, broken line conductor
and faults to earth not involving earth conductor. The relay should have a very low current
setting 15 mA-0.2 A with a low basic burden and a proper thermal withstand dimension.
An additional long time delay adjustable between 0.5-6 sec shall be provided.
8.7.4 Auto-Reclosing
Auto-reclosing ON/OFF shall be provided.
8.8 AUX TX Protection

A Buchholz twin-float relay for gas and oil volume, oil temperature indicator and
protection, and over pressure relief device, shall be supplied. The auxiliary transformer is
to be fed through fuse equipped load break switch, the fuses shall be designed for the
short-circuit protection of the auxiliary transformer.
AUX TX protection shall also detect faults on the 33 kV power cables. The protection shall
be either be integrated in the current differential or equivalent instantaneous protection to be
approved by the Contract Manager. When a fault is detected, the HV circuit breaker shall be
tripped.
8.9 Energy Metering

Two (Main and Backup) revenue meters shall be provided for the Power Transformer MV
circuit and the metering CTs shall be installed at point in figure 8. The meters shall be
supplied with the modems and communication interfaces required to remotely download
billing data. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to test and commission remote
metering
8.9.1 Technical
At least two (2) quadrant energy meters, three phase four wire, compatible to the existing
CEWE Pro Meter 100 or Elster 1700 or Elster A1800 or Lyndis + GYR or of equivalent
standards for compatibility reasons with the central meter management system, shall be
provided comprising:
 Main meter (1) with active energy meter element operating in the first and
second quadrants and a reactive energy meter element operating in the third and fourth
quadrants.
 Check meter (1) with active energy meter element operating in the first and second
quadrants and a reactive energy meter element operating in the third and fourth
quadrants.
Energy meters shall be of class 0.2s or less. The main and check meters shall be supplied
from separate current and voltage transformer cores. The current and voltage transformers
shall be of class 0.2 or less. Current and voltage transformer ratios shall be programmable.
Energy meters shall be installed in the Metering and AVR cubicle. Meter readings shall be
visible from outside the cubicle. The meters, terminal blocks, and front covers shall be
sealed to prevent tampering.
The energy meters shall include pulsed outputs to SCADA, and a communications module
which enables remote interrogation and management. In addition local interrogation shall
be possible through connection to a computer.
Associated software shall be installed on the notebook computers provided by the

contractor, for plant control or protection system maintenance. Cables to connect the
energy meters to the notebook computers shall be provided.
The meters shall have a non-volatile memory so as to ensure no loss of data during power
failures, and shall be capable of storing at least 12 months of metering data.
The energy meters shall support multi-tariff metering and have the capability to freeze
billing readings on any selected date of the month.
All meters for commercial usage shall have programmable time of use bands (TOU). The
number of programmable pulsing relays for the each energy meters should not be less than
four (4).
9 Communication Systems
9.1 General
The multi-mode communication system shall be designed, supplied, installed,
programmed and commissioned, complying with the following;
a) Interlinking to the mobile RTU through Fiber Optical Modem with

Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer in the event of breaking into a transmission line that
has an optical fiber link.
Under this arrangement, the Contractor shall provide for two (a pair) of Fiber Optical
Modem with Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer for each mobile substation. One
modem shall cater for the mobile plant, while the other for the receiving /existing
UETCL substation, for each Mobile Substation.
The optical modems shall have a dual mode optical interface, duplex TX/RX ports,
wavelength of 1550nm and 1310nm, and range of SFP/ transmit signal of at least
80km.
b) Interlinking to the mobile RTU through GPRS Modem with Data/Voice/Ethernet

Multiplexer in the event of breaking into a transmission line in area with only
GSM/GPRS link.
c) Interlinking to the mobile RTU through wireless Ethernet radio in the event of
breaking into a transmission line that has no optical fiber link.
Under this arrangement, the Contractor shall provide for two set (a pair each) of
antenna masts with one mounted on MV Panel trailer, a pair of Ethernet radios of
range 902 to 928 MHz with a capacity of not less than 128 kbps, and a pair of
associated antennas and accessories. One set shall cater for the mobile plant, while
the other for the nearest receiving /existing UETCL substation.
d) Interlinking to the mobile RTU by direct interface into existing substations

communication systems in the event of running the plant from an existing substation.
e) The contractor shall also include Two (2) fairly sized Uninterrupted Power Supply
(UPS) Systems, for providing prolonged (minimum 4 hours) stable and reliable
supply, to both Mobile Plant and Existing Substation side communication (Ethernet
Radios, IP Phones and Modems) units, in the event of any system failure.
The Contractor shall design and consider all four integration scenarios to the existing
systems, with all powered by the 110VDC system, plus a suitability sized Uninterrupted
Power System to cater for both Plant and Mobile side supply interruptions.
9.2 Antenna mast:

The Supplier shall provide two (a pair) suitable stainless steel tube, retractable, telescopic,
polymer or composite (3500 x 100dia) with all mounting and installation accessories. They
shall have removable end caps at one end, while blanked off at the other, manufactured to
an IP55 rating, of appropriate length/height, and suitable for wireless Ethernet radio
communication antenna mounting.
They shall be complete and compatible to UETCL applications, and be suitable for manual
height adjustment to an appropriate height of communication in all possible application.
The trailer plant mast must be located on the MV-side of the substation (i.e. typically
toward the front of the vehicle). As the mast forms an integral part of the mobile unit, the
mast shall comply with the UETCL Operational Health & Safety Manual and HV
Operating Rules & Regulations (available for perusal) .
The second fully retractable station mast shall be provided the receiving substation
installation. A safe storage compartment shall be provided within the trailer plant, for the
securing and storage of this mast. The mounting and installation accessories shall take into
consideration that this mast maybe be mounted on a pole or gantry structure at the
receiving / nearest station.
The design of the mast shall be submitted to UETCL for review, and the submission shall
include all design calculations and assumptions made.
9.3 Ethernet Radio

The contractor shall supply an Ethernet radio that shall operate in the free frequency range
(license not required) and shall be compatible to the UETCL existing schemes and
systems. For information: The radios shall have in built multiplexers with V.24 (data) and
FXS (speech) interfaces, and shall be of range 902 to 928 MHz with a capacity of not less
than 128 kbps.
A safe storage compartment shall be provided within the trailer plant, for the securing and
storage of the two Ethernet radios, for each mobile substation plus one spare.
9.4 Fiber Optical Modem with Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer (Optical Modem)

The contractor shall supply an optical modem that shall be compatible to the UETCL
single mode fiber standard ITU-T G.655. For information: The modems shall have a dual
mode optical interface, duplex TX/RX ports, wavelength of 1550nm and 1310nm, and
range of SFP/ transmit signal of at least 80km.
.
storage of the two Optical Modems, for each mobile substation.
9.5 IP (V0IP) Phones

The contractor shall supply IP Phones that shall be compatible to the UETCL existing
schemes and systems. For information: UETCL operates a VoIP system to offer voice
service in the company using IT infrastructure. The system is based on Alcatel OmniPCX
Enterprise R.11. The contractor shall supply three (3) IP phones to be installed in each of
the mobile substations, and one as a spare.
.
storage of the three IP phones Modems
9.6 GPRS IP Modem (GPRS Modem)

The contractor shall supply GPRS modems that shall be compatible to the UETCL
existing schemes and systems. UETCL requires Two GPRS modems of each mobile
substation and shall be utilized where there is no optical fiber cable (OPGW or ADSS) on
the transmission line or substation of deployment. The contractor shall supply Two Sets
(4) GPRS Modems to be installed in the mobile substations, and one as a spare.
.
storage of the two GPRS Modems, specific to that plant.
10 Surge Arresters
Surge arresters shall be polymer-housed, metal-oxide arresters without spark-gaps,
supplied in accordance with IEC 60099 and the technical schedule for station class metal
oxide surge arresters without spark-gaps is included in this document.
10.1 General Protective Margin

A protective margin (PM) of at least 100% is required on all surge arresters.
Where: PM = [(BIL / Ures) – 1] x 100
PM is the percentage Protective Margin
BIL is the Basic Insulation Level of the transformer &
Ures is the residual voltage of the arrester at 10 kA for an 8/20 current impulse.
10.2 Temporary Overvoltage Capability

The temporary overvoltage capability (TOV) of the arrester at 3 seconds and with prior
duty as defined in IEC 60099-4 shall exceed the maximum prospective TOV of the system
(TOVsys), as defined below:
Where:
TOVsys = (Um / √3)] x EFF
TOVsys is the maximum expected TOV on the system
Um is maximum system voltage, taken as Un x 1.1
EFF is the Earth Fault Factor, which is taken as 1.4
10.3 HV Line Surge Arresters

Fixed HV, side-surge arresters shall be installed at the incoming bushings of the CMT-
GIS. The surge arrester must be appropriately rated to offer protection at the applicable
line supply voltage of 132kV. The connection the CMT-GIS and Surge arresters shall be
CENTIPEDE conductor (26mm, aluminum alloy AAC conductor).
Surge arresters shall be of the 10 kA metal oxide, gapless type enclosed in a HTV-Silicon
Rubber housing molded directly on the ZnO resistors. The design of equipment shall be in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 60099-4 and any additional requirements of this
specification. The testing of the equipment shall be in accordance with the requirements
of this specification.
The surge arresters shall be designed to facilitate inspection to ensure satisfactory

operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing and under sudden variation for
voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system. The arresters shall be
capable of relieving internal pressure without violently exploding or shattering.
The surge arresters shall be provided counters to show whether earth fault current has
passed through the arrester concerned. The indicator and counter shall be cabled to and
mounted in a weatherproof enclosure with glazed door in a convenient position.
Surge arresters shall be permanently installed.
10.4 Vibration Suppression Jig

A suitable lightweight jig (glass-fiber, aluminum etc.) is to be provided that can be
installed onto the surge arrester connections whilst the substation is in transit, in order to
dampen vibrations induced by the road surface and thereby reduce fatigue of the
equipment. The jig may be stowed under the deck of the trailer when the mobile substation
is in use.
10.5 HV Line Surge Arresters:

HV station class surge arresters shall be Polymer / Silicone Bushing type and installed on
the CMT-GIS in parallel with the HV bushings.
Table 10: HV Line Surge Arrester Application

HV Voltage Ratios [kV] Surge Arrester Application
132 Use 132kV Arrester only (Transformer Lightning Impulse
Withstand Level must be 650 kV)
10.6 Transformer HV Neutral Surge Arrester

The HV neutral terminal shall be solidly earthed, with the HV winding partially graded,
through a neutral surge arrester installed on the neutral of the primary winding. This surge
arrester must also be selectable as connected or bypassed.
Table 11: HV Neutral Surge Arrester Application

HV Voltage Ratios Surge Arrester Application
[kV]
The preferred configuration is to design the plant with the HV neutral solidly earthed
through the HV Neutral Surge Arrestor.
10.7 MV Surge Arresters:

MV station class surge arresters shall be connex plug type and installed within the MV
feeder circuit-breaker panels in parallel with the screened, separable cable connectors
feeder plugs.
Table 12: MV Line Surge Arrester Application

MV Voltage Ratios Surge Arrester Application
[kV]
33 Use 33kV Arrester only (Transformer and feeder Lightning
Impulse Withstand Level must be 170kV)
10.8 Transformer MV Neutral Surge Arrester

The MV neutral terminal shall be solidly earthed, with the MV winding non graded,
through a neutral surge arrester installed on the neutral of the secondary (MV) winding.
This surge arrester must also be selectable as connected or bypassed
Table 13: MV Neutral Surge Arrester Application

HV Voltage Ratios Surge Arrester Application
[kV]
The preferred configuration is to design the plant with the MV neutral solidly earthed
through the MV Neutral Surge Arrestor.
11 Plant Auxiliary Supplies

The auxiliary supply, battery, charger and distribution board shall be as per UETCL
existing schemes and systems. The station AC supply shall be through the auxiliary
transformer.
11.1 Auxiliary Transformer

The AUX TX shall be in general supplied in accordance with the IEC and specification for
auxiliary supply transformer.
11.2 Voltage and Resistor Selection:

There shall be a dual ratio AUX TX to match the power transformer MV ratios (i.e. 11,
33kV), selectable via an off-circuit tap switch (OCTS) interlink or off-load selector switch
(OLSS).
The neutral surge arrestors shall limit the secondary earth fault current to 360A
irrespective of the voltage level selected.
A single selector switch is preferred to allow the correct resistance and primary voltage to
be selected in accordance with the main power transformer secondary voltage. The switch
must be accessible from outside the AUX TX.
The AUX TX shall be rated for both MV ratios obviating the need for voltage selection. In
this case AUX TX may be insulated for the higher MV voltage, and employ a single
resistor for both voltage ratios. The resistor shall be rated at 360A at the lower MV ratio,
whilst rated for 10s at the higher MV ratio, where the current should not exceed 720A, e.g.
360A @ 11kV and 720A @ 33kV for 10sec.
11.3 Auxiliary Transformer Capacity

The AUX TX shall include a 160kVA min. auxiliary winding. The Aux supply must be
selectable by means of an OLSS (Off-load-switch-selector) or OCTS (Off-circuit tap
switch) interlink for either of the MV ratios of the main power transformer. The switch
shall be interlinked or interlocked to that of the power transformer.
11.4 Protection
A Buchholz, twin-float relay and oil temperature indicator shall be supplied.
11.5 Connections:
Connection to the AUX transformer shall be by 95 mm2 copper XLPE single core trail
cables, through connex, screened, separable plug bushings on the AUX TX and power
transformer for this connection. The plugs on the power transformer shall be clearly
labelled for the AUX TX. All must be rated at 630 A. The connections shall be protected
by a suitable protective cover/enclosure, where applicable.
Note: If the AUX TX is mounted on the goose-neck of the main trailer, a suitable flexible
arrangement for the cables shall be provided. The cables shall typically be rubber covered
to improve flexibility.
11.6 Auxiliary Supply Circuit Breakers:

The AUX TX must be fitted with two three phase MCB’s, rated at 50A and 100A. For
information, the 50A MCB is used for substation auxiliary supply and the 100A MCB is
used for the transformer fans and oil pump.
11.7 AC distribution modules

The AC distribution modules shall be as per UETCL existing schemes and systems. This
will include a single and three phase distribution modules and an AC supply module. The
supply is to be used for all auxiliary supply on the mobile substation. The MCB breaker
ratings and quantity will be finalized in the design phase between UETCL and the
manufacturer.
Typically: Single phase 14 x 20A (5kA C-curve) MCB’s, three phase is 2 x 32A, and 2 x
16A 5kA C-curve) MCB’s, and any other requirement as deem for the provision of a
complete solution.
For information: An auxiliary AC supply (400 V, three-phase, four-wire) shall be

provided from the auxiliary transformer. A central, main AC distribution board shall be
used to provide power to the different circuits.
An automatic changeover system using 2 contactors with electrical and mechanical

interlocking (to ensure only 1 Input supply active of “Main” and “Alternative” source e.g.
generator or any other external source). The Aux Supply shall be the “Main” or default
source, and cabled directly from the AUX TX.
The “Alternative” external power source shall be connected via a suitably rated three
phase, 100A, 6mm stud type terminal. This connection must be accessible from ground
level and shall include the necessary safety labelling.
11.8 110VDC Supply System

The battery charger shall be as per UETCL existing schemes and systems. For
information: The charger shall be of Industrial Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS)
modular type, rack-mounted type, rated at nominal voltage of 110V.
Please note that the same 110VDC bus shall supply the whole mobile station (both the 132
& 33 kV sides
The charger alarms should be configurable to switch out the transformer, in the case of
loss of supply.
The battery charger shall be according to battery capacity, rated output to supply 100% of
the full float and boost charge requirements. The battery charger shall be of the constant
voltage current limiting type or as specified by the battery manufacturer. The battery
charger shall regulate the battery voltage within 5% of the pre-set voltage. It shall be of
the voltage controlled type automatically adjusting the charging current between the
following values:
Maximum value:- The battery Ah capacity in 10 hours

Minimum value:- The battery Ah capacity in 200 hours
Each charger shall be designed for the specified auxiliary supply system. Chargers shall be
self-protecting in the event of continuous overload. Each charger shall be complete with
the following:
 Boost charge switch with automatic timer.
 Input a.c. supply switch and fuses.
 Output d.c. double-pole switch and fuses.
 Output d.c. ammeter, flush type, 72 x 72 mm.
 Output D.C. voltmeter, flush type, 72 x 72 mm.
 Charger failure relay to give remote alarm, local indication, and timed plant
shutdown.
 Voltmeter and auxiliary circuit double-pole fuses
 Cable gland plates.
Note: The size and weight shall be a major consideration.
11.9 110 V Battery Equipment

The 110 V battery bank shall be of sealed alkaline (NiCad) high performance, maintenance
free, minimum size and light weight type with stand and accessories having a capacity to
supply the requirements of the mobile substation, including DC emergency lighting load for
a minimum of 24-hour period, with the charger disconnected.
At the end of this period, the voltage level and remaining capacity shall be adequate for a
trip-close-trip cycle of all switchgear.
Each battery shall be fully insulated for use with an unearthed DC system, and cell cases
shall be manufactured from annealed glass or an approved clear plastic of ample strength.
The Contractor has to justify in his execution study of the final DC load of the mobile
substation according to the DC power demand of his equipment and to adapt the battery
capacity if necessary without price modification.
A set of main battery fuses in a fuse box to be mounted outside the battery cubicle shall be
provided with through-cubicle copper connections into the battery cubicle and entry cable
gland plate. Copper connections, connectors and fixings within the battery cubicle from the
batteries to the mounted fuse-box shall also be provided. The following equipment shall also
be provided:
 One cell testing voltmeter, scaled 3-0-3 volts.
 One set of commissioning and maintenance instructions.
 One cubicle thermometer scaled 0-500C.
The enclosure is to be supplied as specified under control cubicles. The cells shall be
housed in an IP55 rated cubicle, segregated from to the battery charger and AC/DC
distribution equipment. The enclosure shall be naturally ventilated via air filters.
Note: The size, weight and cycle shall be a major consideration.
11.10 DC distribution module

The DC distribution module will be free issued. For information: DC-rated MCCB's shall
be used in accordance with IEC 60947
11.11 DC Distribution Panel

DC feeders must be provided for each panel. MCCB's shall be installed, and an isolator
shall be provided for the neutral and negative of all DC feeders. Feeders, relays and
indication must be clearly labelled.
A bypass switch shall be provided to bypass and isolate the batteries for maintenance of the
batteries.
12 Instrument Transformers
12.1 Voltage Transformer
12.1.1 HV Voltage Transformers
Voltage transformers shall be the capacitive type, 132kV/110V three-phase, 25VA, Class
0.2 voltage transformer. They shall be of the fully metal-enclosed design. Voltage
transformers are required as shown on the single line diagram and shall be contained in the
line bushing.
The secondary side of the VT’s shall be protected by suitable miniature circuit breakers
with very short tripping time characteristics. The secondary circuits of voltage
transformers shall not be paralleled.
Voltage transformer secondary windings shall be earthed at the switchgear through a link,
which can removed for insulation testing. All voltage transformers shall have an output
rating adequate to cater for the burdens connected to them and shall be provided with a
rating plate, in English, which shall be clearly visible at all times.
They shall be designed and equipped to ensure that saturation or sustained ferro-resonant
oscillations do not occur for any system condition.
The HV voltage transformer shall have provision for external earthing by earth pad, and
earthing shall also be possible through the main switchgear earth bar. This earth
connection must make before the primary connections are made.
The secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall not be paralleled.
12.1.2 MV Voltage Transformer

The MV voltage transformer shall be rated 400/110V three-phase, 25VA, Class 0.2,
installed on the AUX TX, and used to supply energy metering, indications, on-board
meters, transformer protection IED and the Automatic Voltage Regulator relay (AVR).
For operation at the lower MV (11kV) ratio, an aux YNyn0 (voltage correction)
transformer shall be mounted in the transformer IED panel to supply the protection IED
and AVR relays.
This Aux transformer shall be selected to be “in circuit” when operated at the lower
(11kV) MV voltage ratio and bypassed when at the higher ratio, by means of an automated
system that is integrated with the MV OLSS (Off-load-switch-selector) or OCTS (Off-
circuit tap switch) interlink. Alternatively, the selection shall be by means of an automated
voltage selection switch.
12.2 Current transformers

All current transformers shall be the in-built ring type (CMT-GIS bushing, AUX TX and
MV switchgear internal current transformers).
12.2.1 Current Transformer Properties

All current transformers shall have adequate accuracy as indicated in technical data sheets,
saturation factor and rated burden. The type of construction and insulation shall
correspond with IEC 60044-1 and shall meet the requirements of the associated
switchgear and the existing network.
All measuring transformers are to be provided with an identification label giving type,
ratio, class, output and serial number. The location of the marking IEC standard shall be
close to or on the transformer itself.
Where multiple ratio secondary windings are provided, the mentioned label shall clearly
indicate the connection required for each ratio and shall be shown on the appropriate
diagrams with all details.
Current transformers shall be of the toroidal-core type and shall be placed around the
circuit breaker pole or around the plug-in terminations for outgoing cables in case of SF6
insulated switchgear.
Current transformers shall have a continuous thermal current rating of not less than the
corresponding rating of the associated switchgear, and a short-time current rating
corresponding at least to the relevant fault level of the switchgear.
For each current transformer all wires shall run to the terminal block, thus allowing to
form and earth the neutral and to change current direction/ratio there.
The magnetizing curves for each current transformer protection core shall be submitted for
approval during the design phase of the project.
In order to guarantee the correct protection relay operation, through-fault stability

calculations shall also be submitted showing the correctness of the chosen current
transformer core, i.e. rated output, accuracy class, rated accuracy limit factors.
Furthermore, the rated primary current, turns ratio, knee-point e.m.f. and resistance of the
secondary windings (corrected to the maximum service temperature) shall be submitted
for approval.
12.2.2 Current Transformers Requirements

These shall include the following:
a) CTs shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60185 and IEC 60044.
b) All CTs shall be the in-built ring type
c) The terminals shall be clearly marked by the letters P1, P2 and S1, S2 for primary and
secondary terminals respectively, terminal P1 being connected towards the busbar.
d) The design characteristics and construction of CTs used for protective gear circuits
shall be as described in this document.
e) CTs shall have an output rating adequate to cater for the burden connected to them and
shall be provided with a rating plate, in English, which shall be clearly visible.
f) The CTs shall have sufficient rating, terminal voltage and overcurrent performance for
the satisfactory operation of their associated equipment
g) All CTs shall be of the low reactance type.
h) CTs for statistical metering may also be used for other instruments and protection.
i) All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by means of
separate insulated leads to the MIB
j) Multi-ratio secondary windings labels shall be provided at the secondary terminal
board and in all connection diagrams, clearly indicating the connections and each ratio.
k) CTs for indication or metering shall have their secondary windings earthed at the
current transformer. The secondary windings of CTs for protection shall be earthed at
the panel, which accommodates the associated relay. Each earth connection shall be
made via a removable link.
l) When not connected to secondary equipment, all current transformers shall be short-
circuited.
m) Protective CTs shall not be turns compensated.
n) The following information related to protective current transformers shall be submitted
for approval:
 Magnetization curve.
 Secondary winding resistance.
 Secondary winding leakage reactance.
12.2.3 Shielding
An earth shield shall be fitted between the primary conductor and secondary winding. The
equipment shall be such that any circulating currents in the switchgear metal enclosures
shall not pass through the current transformer cores.
External conductors that may be provided for these purposes shall be rated for all normal
and short time currents.
Covers shall be provided where necessary to ensure that current transformer cores cannot be
accidentally short-circuited by the earth shield, metal-enclosure and any external conductors
when the switchgear is in service.
The earth shield shall be connected to earth or the metal enclosure at the end of the current
transformer furthest from the associated circuit breaker. This shall be designated the "P2"
end of the current transformer. The "P1" end of the current transformer shall be on the
circuit breaker side. Labels shall be provided on the current transformer assembly to
indicate the "P1" and "P2" ends.
The protection current transformers ratings are as specified in the technical, related
schedules and the specific protection relays.
All metering current transformers must be a Class 0.2 10 VA.

Note: Bidders should take note at bid stage that the required current transformers can be
accommodated within the specific switchgear which are offered. No alteration to the
specifications will be allowed during the contract period.
12.2.4 Current Transformer Positioning and Ratings

This shall be as described in table 6 and figure 4, below:
Table 13: 25MVA Transformer and AUX TX CT specifications (refer to fig. 4)

CT Turns ratio Rated Voltage Class PXspecification
Ns/Np kV Imag (mA) Min. kneepoint Rsec (Ω) (Max)
(Max) voltage (V)
1 200/1 132 500 200 0,8
2 600/1 33 330 300 1,2
3 1500/1 11 83 650 4,8
4 3000/1 MR 0.4 170 mA at 600 V on 750/1 2,4 at 750/1 ratio
ratio
5 125/1 0.4 500 150 0,4
6 200/1 132 500 200 0,8
7 200/1 132 500 200 0,8
8 600/1500/1 MR 33-11 Class 0,2S 10 VA @ 3000/1
600/1500/1 MR
(2 CTs for main &
check check
metering)
9 600/1 MR * Select 33 170 mA at 600 V on 750/1 2,4 at 750/1
ratio ratio
10 600/1 MR * 33 170 mA at 600 V on 750/1 2,4 at 750/1
ratio ratio
11 1500/1 MR * 11 140 mA at 600 V on 750/1 2,4 at 750/1
ratio ratio
12 1500/1 MR * 11 140 mA at 600 V on 750/1 2,4 at 750/1
ratio ratio
1. MR – refers to Multi – ratio / taps as per MV CT specification
2. CTs not in use to be shorted and earthed
3. The metering CTs at point 8 shall be Two in number
Figure 7: CT Positions on Plant
12.2.5 Number and Location

The number, ratings and location of current transformers associated with the plant, is as
specified in table 6. This shall be submitted for review and approval, during the design
stage.
12.2.6 Applicable Standard

Current transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60185 and IEC 60044. In
addition, all connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by
means of separate insulated leads to a terminal board mounted in the MIB.
Where multi-ratio secondary windings are required a label shall be provided at the
secondary terminal board clearly indicating the connections required for each ratio, which
connections must be made on this terminal board. The connections and ratios in use shall
be shown on all diagrams of connections.
Current transformers for indication or metering shall have their secondary windings
earthed at the terminal board. The secondary windings of current transformers for
protection shall be earthed at the protection and mimic cubicle panel, which
accommodates the associated relays. Each earth connection shall be made via a
removable link.
When not connected to secondary equipment, all current transformers shall be short-
circuited.
12.2.7 Transformer Short-Circuits and Overload

Current transformers shall be capable of mechanically and thermally withstanding the
same overcurrents and overload, for the same periods, as the associated windings of the
power transformer.
12.2.8 Insulation Levels and Short-Circuiting for Testing

Current transformers including the neutral bushing CT's shall withstand all dielectric tests
applied to the power transformer windings, and shall be in position and in circuit during
the power transformer voltage withstand and impulse tests.
All current transformers shall be shorted and earthed in the factory and delivered to site in
that condition.
12.2.9 Tests
The current transformer shall be tested and test certificates provided.
12.2.10 Protective current transformers

Protective current transformers shall be of the low reactance type on all ratios. The
nominal ratios for protective current transformers are specified in table 6. Protective
current transformers shall not be turns compensated.
The following information relating to protective current transformers shall be submitted

for approval:
 Magnetization curve;
 Secondary winding resistance; and
 Secondary winding leakage reactance.
Where more than one protective current transformer is provided in any one phase, the
current transformer designated "main protective current transformer" shall be located
furthest from the transformer windings. Both protective current transformers and current
transformers shall be given designations.
Where the current transformer for a winding temperature indicator is associated with a
delta-connected winding, it shall be located inside the delta so that it can detect all
overcurrent conditions of the delta winding, including those circulating current conditions
resulting from external earth faults on the associated power systems.
12.2.11 Data for rating and diagram plates

Where current transformers are built into the transformer, the combined rating and
diagram plate shall provide full details of the location of each current transformer, its
polarity, secondary terminal markings and also all the information required by BS 3938,
with the provision that no information is duplicated. The following symbols may be used
on rating and diagram plates:
a) IL = Secondary insulation level (d.c. 3 kV)
b) Hz = Rated frequency
c) Ith = Rated short-time current and rated time (kA-s);
d) Rs = Secondary winding resistance at 75°C;
e) N = Turns ratio
f) Vk = Knee point voltage
g) Im = Magnetizing current
h) Ip = Primary current
i) Is = Secondary current
j) VA = Output in (VA).
12.2.12 Terminal Markings

The system of marking used to identify the terminals for current transformers supplied
with the plane:
a) The polarity of the primary and the secondary terminals, or, where no primary
terminals exist as such, the orientation of the current transformer; and
b) The current transformer designation, viz.
 the connection in which it appears (e.g. a phase or neutral connection);
 the sequence relative to other current transformers appearing in the same
connection.
The current transformer winding (primary and/or secondary) and its polarity shall be
denoted by the letter P and/or S and the numerals 1 and 2 as specified in BS 3938.
The convention used shall always place P1 (and/or S1 ) nearer the external terminal of
the transformer and P2 (and/or S2) nearer the winding.
The winding alpha-numeric and the polarity alpha-numeric shall be prefixed by letters
denoting the phase or neutral connection in which the current transformers appear and the
alpha-numeric shall be prefixed by numerals giving the sequence of the current
transformers relative to other current transformers in the particular phase or neutral
connection.
These numbers shall be counted in the case of star connected windings, from the power
transformer external terminal towards the neutral point connection, and, in the case of
delta connected windings, in a direction from the external terminal through the particular
phase winding towards the junction with another phase.

13 Training and Testing
13.1 Onsite Training

The Supplier shall facilitate the onsite training and accreditation of UETCL personnel as
required. A list of skills required by personnel before training shall be included in the
training plan. The Contractor shall provide a complete and detailed schedule of the training
events but it is expected that formal training should last not less than 5 consecutive
working days nor more than 10 consecutive working days.
The Contractor shall advise the Purchaser of the minimum prerequisite level of education
required for the employees to successfully participate in the training program. As part of
the training, the program shall include as a minimum, the following:
a) on site preparation for transportation and delivery processes

b) commissioning and decommissioning procedure and precautions
c) fitting of accessories and their testing;
d) sensors and protective devices and their testing;
e) vacuum treatment, drying filtering and impregnation; and
f) all testing of the completed system to ensure that it is ready for service
g) operations and maintenance of the plant
h) other sectors as recommended by the manufacturer
Special emphasis shall be placed on quality control processes and the maintenance of the
oil and insulation system in the best possible condition to ensure maximum life for the
plant, as well the underlying theoretical aspects.
Each trainee shall be provided with a full set of procedures on completion of the training.
Where training is required for the use of special tools, the Supplier shall provide training
and accreditation after completion of the training.
Costing of user training shall be provided - separate from the unit cost of the substations.
13.2 Tests at Factory and On Site

The results of all the site tests done during commissioning shall be documented and a copy
of the results included in the plant manual. All routine test shall be carried out on site.
13.2.1 Manufacturer's Testing Capabilities

The manufacturer shall be fully responsible for performing all the required tests as
specified. The manufacturer shall bear all additional costs related to not being able to
undertake the tests at his own works as provided for in his bid.
13.2.2 Test instruments and apparatus

The testing apparatus and instruments shall be re-calibrated by an independent body. All
apparatus shall be arranged and operated with due regard to the safety of personnel and so
as to minimize damage to the test object in case of breakdown.
13.2.3 Test certificates

Three copies of test certificates in English shall be supplied to the Purchaser within 30
days of the completion of the works tests.
One copy shall be for documentation archiving, and the other copies of the test certificates
shall be incorporated into each maintenance/operating manual provided for the plant (two
manuals).
13.2.4 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)

FAT must be performed on the Switchgear, Power Transformer, Trailers, and Complete
Mobile Substation Control & Protection System. The witnessing shall be as follows:
UETCL must be notified at least 10 weeks prior to the testing in order to make the
necessary arrangements for overseas travel if applicable.
FAT tests shall be carried out by the Contractor on the Trailers, Transformer, AUX TX,
Surge Arrestors, Battery bank / Chargers, Switchgear, Relays, Protection, Control, and
Communication systems. These tests shall be done in accordance with IEC or other
approved equivalent standards for the operation of a mobile substation.
Copies of routine and inspections test certificates in English – witnessed by the appointed
UETCL representative shall be submitted, on completion of the work testing. Travel costs
– including air fare and ground transfers, full board accommodation, medical insurance,
upkeep, and daily allowance, for the appointed UETCL representatives shall be borne by
UETCL.
Any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of abortive or protracted visits by the
Purchaser's representatives, due to poor organization on the part of the manufacturer or
test failures, shall be for the Contractor's account
The Purchaser shall be notified as soon as possible of all test failures and corrective
measures. This shall take the form of abbreviated reports that shall, upon request, be
supported by more detailed reports. It is desirable that the Purchaser is notified of test
failures to allow in situ inspection if desired.
No dispatch of the plant from the manufacturer's works without the Purchaser's approval
of its testing and overall quality shall be allowed.
13.2.5 Testing on Power Transformer

The following applicable Type and Routine tests shall be carried out by the Contractor on
the Transformer, AUX TX, OLTC Tap changer, OLSS (Off-load-switch-selector) or
OCTS (Off-circuit tap switch) interlink, Instrument Transformers (Voltage and Current),
and Unit Controls.
These tests shall be done in accordance with IEC or other approved equivalent standards
for the operation of a mobile substation.
a) Voltage ratio (routine test) - shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60076-1.
b) Winding Resistance (Routine Test) shall be conducted in accordance with IEC
60076-1.
c) Impedance and load loss measurement (routine test) as required by IEC 60076. On
load losses the Purchaser contrary to IEC 60076-1 paragraph 9, will regard as a test
failure, if the measured value exceeds the guaranteed value.
d) Overload testing in short-circuit mode as per IEC 60354 table 15 and 16.
e) No-load loss and current measurements (routine tests) shall be measured as specified
in IEC 60076
f) Power frequency voltage withstand tests (routine test), which shall include separate
source voltage withstand tests as specified in IEC 60076 part 3, induced voltage
withstand test as specified in IEC60052 and IEC 60076, induced over voltages,
short-circuit current IEC 60214, and impulse voltage withstand.
g) Temperature rise tests (routine test) as specified in IEC 60076
h) Lightning and chopped impulse voltage withstands tests (routine test) as
recommended in IEC 60060 and IEC 60076, except where specified differently.
i) Tests applied to devices with alarm and tripping contacts as per IEC. These shall
include Contact life test, Power frequency (100 Hz) vibrations, Magnetic fields, and
Vibration, earth tremors and blasting as per IEC 60255-21-3.
j) Core assembly dielectric and earthing continuity tests as per IEC
k) Bushing tests as per IEC including the measurement of Capacitance & Tan Delta
l) Measurement of Capacitance & Tan Delta for Windings and SFRA Test
m) Oil tank tests to include routine oil leakage test, pressure relief valve test, tank
strength tests (internal hydraulic pressure withstand and vacuum withstand, dye-
penetrant testing)
n) Gas and oil actuated relay tests as per IEC
o) Oil Tests (BDV, PPM, and Tan Delta) before testing
p) Measurement of Insulation Resistance for Windings and Core
q) DGA Sample before and after Heat Run and after HV tests
r) Acoustic Noise Level and Sound Power Level measurement at 100% Voltage in
accordance with IEC 60551.
s) Check of Painting and Galvanized Thickness
t) Check of Unit Dimensioning
u) Power frequency voltage withstand tests (routine test) - applied to each transformer
winding as specified in IEC 60076 part 3.
v) Separate source voltage withstands tests - applied to each transformer winding as
specified in IEC 60076 part 3.
w) Induced voltage withstand test to each transformer winding as specified in IEC
60052 and IEC 60076.
x) On-load tap-changer tests - type and routine tests as specified in IEC 60214. They
shall include emergency duty conditions of this specification and
 8.1 of IEC 6021 4, Temperature rise of contacts,
 8.2 of IEC 60214, Switching tests, and
 8.4 of IEC 60214, Transition resistors.
 Short-circuit current, notwithstanding the values given in table III of IEC 60214
 Impulse voltage withstand
 Vacuum - full and unequalized vacuum
 Timing sequence
 Mechanical end stops
 Operation of the on-load tap-changer - complete cycles of operation.
 Un-energized operation test - Eight complete cycles
 Operation at reduced auxiliary supply voltage of 0,85 pu of the rated voltage
 Energized operation test.
 Operation test on load.
 Manual operation interlock test
 Limit switch check
y) Magnetizing harmonic current measurement
z) Bushing Cantilever loads for leak tests as per IEC 60137
aa) Transformer tank tests shall include:

 Routine oil leakage test to tank and fittings
 Pressure relief valve test
 Strength tests - Internal hydraulic pressure withstand
 Vacuum withstand
 Dye-penetrant testing
bb) Gas and oil actuated relay tests shall include:
 Oil-tightness
 Relay circuit insulation
 Alarm signaling
 Tripping
 Vacuum testing
 Contact life, vibration and shock
cc) Acoustic noise level measurement in accordance with IEC 60551.
dd) Short-circuit tests in accordance with IEC 60076-5.
13.2.6 Testing on Cables

PVC Insulated Multicore Cables
a) The cable sizes should be checked against cable schedules or cabling diagrams.
b) Checks on cable glanding arrangements shall be carried out.
c) Checks to be made on fuse type and sizes.
d) The following routine tests shall be carried out on every length of cable without
breakdown:-
 Voltage test- every length tested for 5 minutes at 3 kVrms a.c. The voltage shall
be increased gradually and maintained at the full value for 5 minutes.
 Insulation resistance - after completion of the voltage test and shall be not less
than 18 megohms per 1000 m at 20oC for 2.5mm2 cross sectional area conductors.
 Conductor resistance - The d.c. resistance of each conductor shall be measured.
 Armour resistance - The d.c. resistance of the armour shall be measured.
XLPE Insulated Power Cables

Tests shall be carried out on completed cable lengths of XLPE insulated power cables in
accordance with IEC 60502 and supplements and shall include the following:-
a) Measurement of electrical resistance of conductors.
b) High voltage test (Note: A.C. only).
c) Phasing.
d) Partial discharge test, (HV CABLES ONLY)
e) Conductor examination
f) Check of dimensions
g) Electrical test for 4 hours (HV CABLES ONLY)
h) Hot set test (HV CABLES ONLY).
i) Bending test, plus partial discharge test, (HV CABLES ONLY)
j) Dielectric power factor as function of voltage and capacitance measurement, and as a
function of temperature, (HV CABLES ONLY)
k) Heating cycle test plus partial discharge test, (HV CABLES ONLY)
l) Impulse withstand test, followed by power frequency voltage test, (HV CABLES
ONLY)
m) High voltage ac test, (HV CABLES ONLY)
n) Non-electrical tests as stated in IEC 60502.
13.2.7 Testing on Switchgear and Switchboards

In addition to the routine tests according to IEC 60298 the following tests according to IEC
60517 shall be performed:
 Partial discharge test
 Pressure test
 Gas leakage test
 Gas moisture test according to IEC 60480
The following checks shall be carried out to verify the integrity of the assembly in
addition to the individual circuits:
a) Insulation resistance of primary and secondary circuits.
b) The insulation impedance between busbars and between busbars to earth.
c) The continuity of all primary and secondary earth connections shall be proved.
d) Mechanical operation of all the components of each panel.
e) The operation of the primary switching contacts.
f) The operation of all auxiliary contacts.
g) The operation of all switching devices, indication lamps and auxiliary equipment.
h) Checking of all bolts, nuts, and accessories.
Type and routine tests on the circuit breaker shall be in accordance with IEC 62271
together with any tests normally carried out as a routine procedure by the Contractor.
These shall include:
a) Mechanical function tests of the switching devices and interlocks as required by IEC
62271-200/7.102
b) Power frequency voltage test check of voltage indication system as required by IEC
62271 – 200/7.1
c) Test of auxiliary electrical devices as required by IEC 62271 – 200/7.104
d) Electrical Function as required by IEC 62271 – 200/7.104

e) Partial discharge measurement as required by IEC 62271 – 200/7.101
f) Insulation test for control circuits 1kV/50Hz/1s as required by IEC 62271 – 200/7.2
g) Check of built components: Current Transformers, Voltage Transformers, Circuit
Breakers, Module couplings, etc
h) Acoustic noise level measurement in accordance with IEC.
i) Component identity labels
j) Gas tightness as required by IEC 62271-200/7.4
k) Pressure test on gas-filled compartments in accordance with IEC 62271 – 200/7.103
l) Resistance measurement as required by IEC 622271 – 200/7.3
m) Functional testing of the complete switchboard
n) Testing of the electrical interlocks
o) Testing of the tripping through protection relays
p) Verification of correct wiring IEC 60694/7.2.2
13.2.8 Testing on Instrument Transformers

13.2.8.1 Voltage Transformers
a) The voltage transformer testing shall comply with IEC 60186, and shall include:
 Partial discharge test
 Pressure test
 Gas leakage test
 Gas moisture test according to IEC 60480
b) Voltage transformers shall be tested to prove insulation and polarity, ratios and
burden.
13.2.8.2 Current Transformers

The type and routine tests shall comply with IEC 60185 (BS 3938) and IEC 60044.
Type Tests
If evidence is available of type tests previously performed on identical current
transformers which meet the Purchaser's requirements, this may be accepted in lieu of
these tests.
a) Impulse tests: the current transformers shall be in position and connected as in
service during the impulse tests on the plant. All current transformers shall be short-
circuited and earthed during the test.
b) Additional type testing of current transformers shall include:
 Impulse tests on transformer
 magnetization curve that shall include the knee point of the curve;
 secondary winding resistance referred to 75°C; and
 secondary leakage reactance determined by the Berghahn method
 Secondary insulation and polarity tests
 Accuracy of protection current transformers
Routine Tests
a) Secondary insulation and polarity tests using a test voltage of 2 kV r.m.s. for 1min
between the external terminals of each secondary winding.
b) Accuracy of protection current transformers, the following measurements shall be

recorded:
 For Class X current transformers, the exciting current shall be verified.
 the secondary winding resistance referred to 75°C.
 the magnetization characteristic shall be checked at a minimum of two points.
c) Check of CT Ratio, Class, and Polarity
13.2.9 Lightning Arresters

For metal oxide arresters without gap the tests shall be in accordance to recommendations
IEC Working Group 4 TC 36.
13.2.10 Oil-Filled Vessels Other Than Cable Boxes (If Any)

All oil-filled vessels other than circuit-breaker tanks or cable boxes shall be filled with
insulating oil and subjected to service operating pressure, or, if vented to atmosphere to a
pressure of 1 bar. They shall be left standing for a period of 24 hours. During this period no
leakage shall occur.
13.2.11 Insulating Oil

Samples of oil shall be tested before dispatch, and shall comply with requirements of IEC
60296.
13.2.12 Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) Gas

Tests required to check the conditions of SF6 gas in electrical equipment as detailed in IEC
60480.
13.2.13 Testing on Ancillary Equipment

All components shall have been tested in accordance with the relevant IEC
recommendations or equivalent standards prior to assembly in the complete plant. Tests
shall be carried out to prove the correct wiring and functioning of the complete plant.
All secondary wiring and all apparatus directly connected to it shall withstand a high voltage
test of 2 kV to earth for 1 minute, unless subject to other requirements of this specification
(e.g. as detailed under Protective Equipment).
If 400 VAC connections are taken through a cubicle they shall be adequately screened or
insulated and a “400 Volts DANGER” notice shall be fixed on the outside of the cubicle.
All cubicles shall be complete with all necessary labels to describe the function of the
equipment. This must be verified.
13.2.13.1 Control Switches

The following requirements must be verified:
a) Control switches for electrically operated circuit-breakers are of the pistol grip or
discrepancy type and are arranged to operate clockwise when closing the circuit-
breakers and anti-clockwise when opening them.
b) The control switches are so designed as to prevent them from being operated
inadvertently and where switches of the discrepancy type are used they shall require
two independent movements to effect operation.

c) The control switch shall be so designed that when released by the operator it shall
return automatically to the “neutral” position after having been turned to the
“closed” position and shall at the same time interrupt the supply of current to the
operating mechanism of the circuit-breaker.
d) Switches for other apparatus shall be operated by shrouded push buttons or have
handles of the spade type. Note that the pistol-grip type shall be reserved for circuit-
breaker operation only.
13.2.13.2 Instruments
The following requirements must be verified:
a) All voltage circuits to instruments shall be protected by an MCB with auxiliary
status contact in each unearthed phase of the circuit placed as close as practicable to
the instrument transformer terminals or, where instruments are direct-connected, as
close as practicable to the main connection.
b) Kilowatt-hour integrating meters shall comply with the requirements of IEC
Publication 521 Class 1.0 meters unless otherwise approved by the Contract
Manager.
13.2.13.3 Indication and Alarms

Testing shall be done to prove that indicators shall operate reliably at 60% of nominal
voltage.
13.2.13.4 Relays and MCBs

The following must be verified:
a) Relays associated with the three phases are marked with the appropriate phase
identification and the MCBs shall also be suitably labelled.
b) Isolating MCBs are provided on each panel to facilitate the isolation of all sources of
electrical potential, to allow testing or other work to be carried out on the panel
without danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other panels.
c) All MCBs shall be accommodated within the associated cubicle.
d) MCBs shall be grouped and spaced according to their function in order to facilitate
identification.
13.2.13.5 Earthing Arrangements

The following must be verified or proved by impedance testing:
a) All control, relay and switchgear panels have a continuous earth bar of a sectional
area of not less than 80 mm2 and connected to the main earthing system.
b) All metal cases of equipment on the panels connected to this bar have a sectional
area not less than 2.5mm.
c) Current and voltage transformer secondary circuits are complete and are earthed at
one point only through links situated in an accessible position.
d) Each separate link suitably labelled.
e) The links shall be of the bolted type having M6 bolts and provision for attaching test
leads.
13.2.13.6 Protective Relays and Associated Apparatus

Test and/or inspections shall be conducted to prove the following requirements:
Type Tests
a) The Bidder must submit two copies of a complete type test report of the quoted relay
protection, according to the IEC standards
b) The type test certificate must testify that the equipment confirms to all characteristics
as described in this specification
c) The type test certificates must specify the actual values measured during the type tests.
Routine Tests
a) Each relay protection supplied must be accompanied by test certificates that will
specify all routine tests made and as applicable actual test values received.
b) The test certificates must state the factory’s name, relay protection’s serial number,
name and signature of the individual responsible for the test results.
c) Composite relay systems like the distance relays and auto-reclose relays shall be
subject to such IEC standard testing in approved manufacturer’s works and the testing
procedure shall prove the correctness of the assembly and its settings and range of
operation.
13.2.13.7 Programmable Transducers

Test shall be conducted to prove the following:
a) Transducers are freely programmable for V, A, MW and MVAr
b) The output is galvanically isolated from the input
c) Voltage rating 0….20mA max. and 110VAC
d) Current rating 0….20mA max. and 1 amp
e) Watt rating -10…0…+10mA (110VAC / 1A)
f) Var rating -10…0…+10mA (110VAC / 1A)
g) The primary burden not exceeding 0.5 VA.
h) The minimum accuracy class shall be 0,5.
i) The insulation level shall be 2 kV for 50 Hz and the impulse withstand shall be 5 kV
peak.
13.2.13.8 Battery Charger and Batteries

The following is to be tested / verified:
a) Erection of the battery, battery stand and charger equipment with the cable
connections and links.
b) The insulation to earth of the complete installation.
c) The battery polarity and capacity.
d) The charger’s ability to recharge the battery if discharged, also the chargers’ ability
to maintain the float charge of the battery, and not to overcharge the battery.
e) The "low voltage" and "high voltage" alarms.
f) Record the specific gravity and cell voltage of the battery when fully charged and
also the battery test apparatus.
13.2.13.9 Wiring
Insulation Resistance Tests at 500 V DC are to be carried out on all a.c. and d.c.
protection, control, alarm and indication circuits to ensure that wiring is in a satisfactory
condition. It is desirable to measure the insulation of all circuits before proceeding with
other tests and it is essential that all a.c. and d.c. wiring associated with protective gear is
proved, relay contacts and auxiliary contacts, etc. be closed, as necessary, to ensure this.
The following tests should be carried out:-
a) Insulation resistance of current transformer circuits.
b) Insulation resistance of voltage transformer circuits.
c) Insulation resistance of d.c. circuits.
d) Insulation resistance between CT and VT circuits.
e) Insulation resistance between d.c. and VT circuits.
f) Insulation resistance between d.c. and CT circuits.
When measuring the insulation resistance to earth of individual circuits, all the other
circuits should be normal e.g. earth link closed and d.c. circuits normal. This will ensure
that the insulation of a circuit is satisfactory, both to earth and to all other circuits.
When testing the d.c. wiring, it may be necessary to remove the battery earth fault alarm
from the circuits. If this is done, the battery should be earthed via a high resistance for
example a voltmeter to earth during testing.
Static equipment, which may be damaged by the application of test voltages, may have the
appropriate terminals shorted.
Loop resistance measurements are to be made on all CT circuits associated with

circulating current-type protection. These values are necessary to establish the operating
characteristics of the protective scheme and should be checked against the manufacturers'
calculated figures. Separate values are required for CT and lead burdens and all
measurements are to be recorded on lead resistance diagrams. Pilot impedance and phase
angle measurements shall be made on pilot cables to be used with unit type protection.
13.2.13.10 Tests on DC Circuits

Tests shall be carried out to ensure that:
a) The polarity of d.c. incoming supplies to panels, cubicles, etc. is correct.
b) All relays, which either perform a tripping function, or control a tripping or
measuring function in protective schemes, shall be able to operate at 60% of
nominal voltage. This test shall be carried out as an overall test at reduced voltage.
c) All relays other than those specified in (a) above shall operate at standing battery
voltage.
d) All protective and tripping relay and where applicable all control, alarm and
indicating relays, shall correctly operate the appropriate indicators and auxiliary
relays.
e) All functional links, MCBs, auxiliary switches, changeover switches etc., shall
provide the design isolation and shall be correctly labelled.
13.2.13.11 Mechanical Inspection of Relays

All relays shall be examined, from a dust - free room, to ensure that relays comply with
the following: -
a) Relay movements ares free, after removal of all transport packing.
b) Magnet gap and induction discs are clean.
c) Gear teeth are clean.
d) Contacts are clean and have adequate wipe.
e) All contacts make simultaneously.
f) Contacts make when the time multiplier setting is zero.
g) The resetting times are within prescribed limits for the relay.
h) Flag mechanisms operate in correct sequence with respect to contacts.
i) Flag and reset knobs operate with the relay cover on.
j) Relay cover glass and gasket provide effective seal.
k) Labelling and phase colors are correct.
l) CT shorting and d.c. isolating contacts or switches in withdrawal relay cases
operate satisfactorily.
It is not recommended that moving coil type relays are interfered with manually unless a
defect is revealed by secondary injection.
13.2.13.12 Secondary Injection of Protection Circuits

Secondary injection is to be carried out on all relays, using voltage and current of
sinusoidal waveform. The testing and instruments shall conform to IEC.
Where applicable, the operation and reset values for attracted armature relays are to be
taken at design settings only.
For circulating current protection employing high impedance voltage operated relays, the
points of injection for relay voltage setting tests should be across the relay and stabilizing
resistance.
The fault setting shall be established by secondary injection, where it is impracticable to

ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection is to be made across the appropriate
relay bus wires with all associated relays, setting resistors, and CT's connected.
13.2.13.13 Primary Injection

The primary injection methods to be employed shall be agreed with the Engineer. Tests to
be carried out shall be as follows:
a) Local primary injection to establish the ratio and polarity of current transformers as a
group, care being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of similar ratio.
b) Overall primary injection to prove correct interconnections between current
transformer groups and associated relays.
c) Fault setting tests to establish, where practicable, the value of current necessary to
produce operation of the relays. If not practicable, these tests are to be carried out by
secondary injection applied at the wiring close to the current transformer.
13.3 Work Tests

The approval by the Contract Manager or any Purchasers representative of the results of
inspection and tests shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the contract
for the satisfactory performance of the testing and commissioning.
The Contract Manager reserves the right to call for further tests, which are in his opinion
necessary to confirm satisfactory performance. Tests shall as far as possible simulate site
conditions.
Routine tests will be required on all equipment as described in this Section.
13.4 On Site Testing Final Acceptance

A 24-hour, final acceptance test involving actual installation and operation shall be
performed at a site to be nominated by UETCL. The Supplier will provide transportation
from the delivery point to the test site.
Routine tests shall be carried out by the Contractor on the Transformer, AUX TX,
Switchgear, Relays, Protection, Control, and Communication systems. These tests shall
be done in accordance with IEC or other approved equivalent standards for the operation
of a mobile substation.
13.4.1 Site Tests

Details of the tests to be carried out shall include but not limited to those listed under
Part13.5.2 below. The supplier shall provide a complete set of test forms, and test
equipment required to undertake and record the tests.
The test form listing general checks shall be provided for each item of equipment. The
test forms shall show the type of equipment being tested and serial number or other
identifying mark. Provision shall be made on the form for recording all the test results.
13.4.2 Testing on Site

The testing and checking procedures shall include the verification of:
a) all voltage ratios on all phases;
b) the vector group;
c) three phase 400 V magnetizing currents;
d) a winding and core insulation test;
e) a functional test for all alarm and trip contacts;
f) the fan and oil pump directions and operation of starting and overload protection
relays;
g) the control/power cabling insulation (min 1 kV);
h) the correct operation and indication of tap changers; and
i) Wiring to the marshalling cubicle terminals and to the tap change mechanism box
terminals
j) a functional test for all alarm and trip contacts;
k) overload protection relays;
l) the control/power cabling insulation (min 1 kV);
m) the correct position of all valves in the oil circuits;

n) Oil Tests (BDV, PPM, and Tan Delta)
o) Measurement of Winding Resistance
p) SFRA Test
q) Mechanical function tests of the switching devices and interlocks as required by
IEC 62271-200/7.102
r) Test of auxiliary electrical devices as required by IEC 62271 – 200/7.104
s) Electrical Function as required by IEC 62271 – 200/7.104
t) Insulation test for control circuits 1kV/50Hz/1s as required by IEC 62271 – 200/7.2
u) Check of built components: Surge arrestors, CTs, VTs, Circuit Breakers, Module
couplings, etc
v) Component identity labels
w) Gas tightness as required by IEC 62271-200/7.4
x) Resistance measurement as required by IEC 622271 – 200/7.3
y) Functional testing of the complete switchboard
z) Testing of the electrical interlocks
aa) Testing of the tripping through protection relays
bb) Routine testing of CTs and VTs
cc) Verification of correct wiring IEC 60694/7.2.2
dd) Contact Resistance of Switches and Circuit Breakers
ee) protection relays tests
SCADA and Communication Testing

Before hand-over, the Contractor shall test the total Communication and SCADA
installation to the requirements, specifications and satisfaction of the Purchaser in
accordance to the afore-mentioned IEC Publications. The following tests before
commissioning shall be performed:
 Operation of main and auxiliary circuits
 Visual check of completeness
 Simulation of control and monitoring functions
 Measurement of resistance of main circuit
 Dielectric test on main circuits with 80% of the power frequency voltage
 Test on gas tightness and moisture contents.
 Test of interlocks between CB, isolator, and earth switch where applicable
13.5 Records of Equipment Checks and Tests

The results of the above tests (FAT and Site) shall be documented, signed off as part of
the quality process and included in the plant manual. These results shall be recorded in
Test Schedules.
Three copies (one for archiving and two for the plant manuals) of Test Result and checks
shall be prepared by the Contractor, and forwarded to the Contract Manager. The data
recorded shall include equipment tested, plant serial number, ratings, manufacturers
details, model, testing personnel details, the circuit or section, the Contractor's signature
and the Contract Manager's acceptance.
14 Miscellaneous
14.1 System Control Centre (SCC)
The system control centre (SCC) for the mobile substation will incorporate monitoring and
controlling of the HV circuit breakers, isolators and earth switches, the MV breakers,
isolators and earth switches, as well as the tap changers of the power transformers.
Switching positions, protection trippings and alarms will be indicated and current, voltage,
active power, reactive power, frequency and kWh metering at least will be permanently
telemetered.
The Contractor shall take care that all equipment concerned with this system shall be
equipped with sufficient potential free contacts.
The existing SCADA system at National Control Centre was supplied by ABB Network
Partner, (now ABB Automation Utilities, in Vasteras SWEDEN).
The Contractor shall fully inform himself about all requirements necessary for the SCC to
supply and install a well-functioning system well adapted to the existing equipment at NCC.
If the type of RTU supplied is different from the existing ABB RTU 400, ABB RTU 232 or
ABB RTU 560, then DATA engineering at the SCC and training on the new RTU shall be
included in the price.
14.2 Compatibility
The Bidders shall ensure at tender stage that the equipment offered is compatible and can
communicate with this existing equipment without compromising the full functionality of
the equipment offered.
If full compatibility cannot be obtained, the Bidder shall include for the replacement of
this existing equipment in his Bid offer.
14.3 Documentation
The following documentation shall be included in the maintenance and operation manuals:
a) Maintenance and operating Manuals: Four sets of maintenance and operating
manuals shall be supplied for each item of equipment, within sixteen weeks of the
contract being awarded.
b) Drawings: A single complete set of drawings (outline, general arrangement,
electrical, wiring, control plant etc.) shall be supplied with the tender.
c) Equipment Specifications: The serial numbers of each item of equipment and the
relevant technical specifications should be supplied.
d) Test Information: One set of all type and routine tests applicable to the equipment
must be supplied. A single electronic copy (CD-R) of the above information must also
be supplied.
e) Rating and Diagram plate: Name plate data for each item of equipment supplied is to
be provided (The nameplate should reflect the actual ratings of the equipment, and not
those specified in the enquiry).
f) For information: All major equipment e.g. Circuit Breaker, AUX TX, etc. should
have individual rating plates affixed to the main equipment housing in such a way that
the plate cannot be easily removed. Also, the rating plates should be visible from the
outside of the substation i.e. not located between closely installed equipment.
g) A digital copy of all documentation, drawings, cable schedules, maintenance manuals
etc shall be supplied within sixteen weeks of the contract being awarded. The copy
shall be supplied on a compact disc (CD-R) and shall be compatible with “MS
Windows”, “Microstation” (CAD) and “Adobe Acrobat” formats.
h) A quality control plan (QCP) for manufacturing and delivery shall be included in the
tender.
i) Special tools: All pertinent information regarding special tools shall be provided in
the manuals
j) Spares: All information in connection with spares shall be provided in the manuals
k) Maintenance practices: Detailed information shall be provided in the manuals.
14.4 Special tools

All special tools and equipment necessary for installation, normal operation and
maintenance shall be provided by the Supplier. A list of the special tools required for
installation, operation and maintenance shall be included in the manual.
A detailed procedure for the use of each of these special tools shall be included.
Information regarding skills required by personnel in order to operate these special tools
shall be provided in the manuals.
14.5 Spares
A comprehensive list of spares, with prices, shall be provided. Detail of recommended
spares that should be kept on site and in storage, including procedures for the handling and
storage shall be provided.
14.6 Maintenance practices

Recommended maintenance practices including fixed-interval and condition-based
maintenance strategies shall be provided. The detailed procedures for maintenance shall be
included:
a) Routine inspection of equipment
b) Routine service of equipment
c) Major service of equipment
d) A list of spares, recommended service times and recommended labour requirements
shall be included for each maintenance procedure.
e) The maintenance procedure shall include all safety aspects and shall describe safe
working practices in detail.
f) Statistical figures and general maintenance and performance indicators shall be
included. These shall include reliability rates, hazard rates, expected life cycle and
MTBF, MTTF, MTTR (mean time between failures, mean time to fail, and mean time
to repair).
g) For switching equipment, the number of operations (rated, short-circuit, full-load, no-
load) between maintenance intervals shall be included.
14.7 External Electrical Equipment Insulation

All equipment bushings and insulator are to be of the polymer / composite (silicone rubber
type) with a specific creepage of 25mm/kV (in relation to the maximum system voltage) as
defined in IEC for “moderate pollution class”.
14.8 Operational barricading

Due to the air insulated connections on the HV-side of the transformer, the main trailer
deck (unless partitioned) will constitute a live chamber when the substation is in operation.
This will necessitate suitable barricading to be erected around the perimeter of the main
trailer (typically high visibility, UV stabilized polymer [insulating] material, or otherwise
approved).
The barricade supports will be installed at mounting points on the trailer perimeter. The
barricading will typically be fold-down and lockable, extending approximately 1200mm at
45o around the trailer perimeter.
The barricade supports shall be stowed under the deck of the trailer when the mobile
substation is not in use.
14.9 Paint and corrosion protection

14.9.1 Equipment:
All equipment metal enclosures and brackets i.e. the power transformer tank and radiator,
trailers, outdoor cubicles etc. – shall comply with IEC Corrosion Protection Specification
for corrosive environments.
The transformer tank and the mobile trailers (excluding the axles), shall be zinc metal
sprayed in accordance with the requirements of the aforementioned specification. Apart
from the main transformer conservator tank and the protection control cubicles (which are
to have finishing coats of white enamel), all remaining external surfaces that are fabricated
from steel, shall be painted with enamel paint to final finish in sky blue colour.
14.9.2 Fasteners:
Due consideration must be given to electrolytic corrosion that will occur between
dissimilar metals in contact. All exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. Where stainless
steel cannot be used, details must be submitted for approval.
14.10 Transport
14.10.1 General Conditions, Blanking Plates and Gas Filling
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all arrangements for transport to the
Storage Site with the appropriate authorities.
The Purchaser will only accept delivery from the Contractor at the specified Storage
Stores. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate the arrangements for all
stages of the transport of the plant from the manufacturer's works to stores, including
trans-shipping.
Where off-loading is required, all apparatus, materials and packages shall be addressed to
the Contractor, who shall take delivery of the same. The dimensions of the plant shall be
such that when packed for transport, will comply with the requirements of the loading and
clearance restrictions for the route to the final destination.
All metal blanking plates and covers that are specifically required to transport the
particular plant, shall be considered part of the plant and be handed over to the Purchaser
after test commissioning. A listing of all these items and relevant drawings shall be
included in the manuals, to enable the Purchaser to have duplicates of the plates
manufactured if required. The dimensions and quantity of each item required for transport
shall be on the drawings.
The plant shall be transported with sufficient oil to cover the core and windings during all
transport and storage conditions. The tank shall be appropriately sealed for transport to
prevent all breathing.
Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that the transformer arrives at site in a
satisfactory condition so that, after proper oil processing the plant can be put into service
without the necessity for extensive drying out.
The costs of any necessary extensions and/or improvements to existing facilities for
transporting to site and escort and permit fees shall be included in the Contractor's prices.
14.10.2 Accelerometer limits

The accelerometer shall record continuously the acceleration of the transformer in three
directions perpendicular to each other of which the main direction shall be in the direction
of transport. The acceleration limit in any direction shall be 1g.
14.10.3 Road transport

The transport arrangements shall include any necessary extensions and/or improvements
to road routes bridges, and civil works, and also the assurance that any abnormal loads
comprising the plant, and their transporters ancillary apparatus shall pass without
obstruction throughout the selected route.
14.10.4 Transport support brackets

Attention is drawn to the necessity of receiving approval of the design and spacing of
transport support brackets to avoid overstressing of the plant trailer carrying beams.
14.11 Component Approvals

All components and fittings associated with the plant (including those to be incorporated
in the design and manufacture) shall be subject to the Purchaser's approval. Samples,
technical literature, drawings, tests reports and lists of the names of the principal
Suppliers, with experience gained, shall be supplied at bidding and during the design
stage.
The Contractor shall submit components for approval to the Purchaser only after these
have already been approved by the Contractor himself for use on the plant. The Purchaser
has a preference for standardized and approved components already in use in order to
minimize spares.
14.12 Design Review

Design reviews will be conducted by the Purchaser at different stages of the procurement
process for the plant. The first stage will be after bid closure as part of the technical
adjudication of the bids. Visits to the manufacturer's works to inspect design, manufacture
and test facilities may also take place. During this stage the Bidder will have the
opportunity to ensure that the specification has been interpreted correctly.
The second stage will commence after order placement, but before manufacture
commences. The Employer shall conduct design reviews and approval at all critical stages
of the design. These reviews will be more detailed and related to the specific design of the
plant on order. For this stage the design control element of ISO 9001 shall apply. The
scope of such a review shall include the following:
1. Core design
2. Winding and tapping design
3. Thermal design
4. Insulation co-ordination
5. Tank and auxiliaries
5.1. *Bushings
5.2. *Tap-changers
5.3. *Protective devices
5.4. *Oil preservation system
6. Corrosion protection
7. Processing and assembly
8. Testing
9. Sensitivity of specified parameters
10. Short-circuit withstand capability
11. Transient withstand capability
12. Noise
13. Overload capability
14. Operation capability beyond nameplate specification
15. RAM (Reliability, availability and maintainability)
Note: The successful Bidder shall allow at least (14) fourteen days for the submission and
feedback on his design, protection and wiring drawings and diagrams.
14.13 Quality
The Employer reserves the right to inspect manufacturers' works and processes at any
stage after receiving bids in order to assess the manufacturer's capabilities and the quality
of his products and processes. In addition, the overall quality assurance requirements of
ISO 9001 shall apply as appropriate.
14.14 Condition Monitoring / Assessment Equipment

The plant shall be designed and retrofitted with an ultra-modern on-line condition
monitoring equipment. The manufacturer shall provide the most appropriate monitoring
tool and details of monitoring in line with best engineering practice. He shall provide for
interrogating facilities, fittings, interfacing, installation and retrofitting for all monitors.
On line gas monitoring, bushing tan delta, tap changer and cooler system monitoring,
motors, and so on connected into remote indication or alarm facilities, shall of particular
interest include the sub-functions listed in table 8 below:
Table 14: Functions of Monitoring

Function Function Description
group
Visualization General  Status information and measured values shall be
accessible by using standard web browsers (min.
Internet Explorer 9, Firefox, Chrome, Safari, Opera) on
differing terminals with a dynamic resolution.
 The visualization will show up-to-date operating data
with online update of status and values.
 The webserver shall also be used to modify the
configuration of the device respectively the
parameterization.
Main The main operation screen shall show the essential
Operation measured values and status information summary of the
Screen transformer and plant.
Status/Events  Status indications shall be presented at the top level as
/ Messages necessary, to give instant overview about the monitored
equipment.
 When an event occurs (yellow or red), it shall be
immediately recognizable which event has occurred.
Events Each event shall be preconfigured by factory setting but
shall be changeable by the user via the web visualization.
Event  Two different priority status levels shall be available.
Priority  Yellow as warning level and red as alarm level
Event List All pending events shall be listed on a separate screen to
have overview of and instant access to all events
Parametrizati  All needed Parameters shall be set over the web
on visualization.
 The parameters shall be listed in groups with a small
description.
Nameplate  Electronic nameplates for transformer, on load tap-
changer (OLTC) and motor drive unit, and all plant
components shall be available.
 All data shall be set in the web visualization.
Maintenance A separate screen shall shows the maintenance progress
of the OLTC maintenance parts (e.g. contact wear)
Languages Standard implementation shall be English

group
Communicati Ethernet 2 x RJ45 Ports on CPU-Unit shall be available for
on interface (RJ45) accessing the web visualization as well as the Ethernet
based protocols simultaneously
Ethernet Fiber optic conversion is made by separate extension
(fiber optic module shall be optional
connection)
Serial Separate serial ports for RS232 and RS485 protocol
connection shall be optional available
Function Link and ACT indications (LEDs) for Ethernet based
indicator for interfaces shall be available.
communicati
on interfaces
Communicati IEC 61850 IEC 61850 and IEC60870-5-103 protocols for standard
on protocol IEC 60870 SCADA communication shall be used
SCADA SCADA communication via IEC 60870-101/103, IEC
protocols 60870-104, DNP 3, Modbus RTU/ASCII or Modbus TCP
shall be available
Data export All logged data (events, measured values, maintenance
data) shall be downloaded from the device via FTP-
access as CSV-files.
General Limit values  Two upper and two lower limit values for all analogue
monitoring signals (e.g. load current and oil quality) shall be set by
the user / manufacturer.
 Reaching the first limit triggers the yellow event and
event message shall be triggered.
 Reaching the second limit triggers the red event and
event message shall be triggered.
Motor drive General All collected, available data shall be monitored,
supervision visualized and logged.
Tap position The tap-changer position shall be determined using the
indication digital input signals and coded via BCD
Motor Motor protective switch Q1 tripped shall be monitored by
protective digital input signal, triggering initiates a red event
switch (preset).
tripped
Door open Door Open contact from the motor drive unit shall be
monitored by digital input signal, triggering leads to a red
event (preset).
Motor drive Motor running signal from the motor drive unit shall be
running monitored by digital input signal.
Operation A digital operation counter shall be supplied which shall
counter be adjustable to the mechanical operations counter of the
(adjustable) OLTC.

group
Min/max tap The minimum (lower) and maximum (raise) tap position
position of the OLTC shall be configured and monitored.
OLTC General  All available data shall be monitored, visualized and
monitoring logged.
 The OLTC monitoring data shall depend on the used
OLTC type.
 The OLTC maintenance data amount shall depend on
the used OLTC type.
Contact wear  Monitoring of contact wear of the OLTC contacts shall
be performed.
 Also the present percentage value of the maintenance
progress shall be showed
Oil changing  Monitoring oil changing and cleaning of the OLTC shall
& cleaning be performed.
progress shall be showed.
Exchange of  Monitoring of the exchange of parts of the OLTC shall
parts be performed.
Exchange of  Monitoring of diverter switch insert of the OLTC is
diverter performed.
switch insert  Also the present percentage value of the maintenance
progress is showed
Change the  Monitoring of tap selector of the OLTC shall be
tap selector performed.
Change the  Monitoring of voltage ratio selector of the OLSS (Off-
OLSS or load-switch-selector) or OCTS (Off-circuit tap switch)
OCTS interlink shall be performed.
Change the  Monitoring of the oil in unit shall be performed.
oil  Also the present percentage value of the maintenance
Oil sample  Monitoring oil sample interval shall be performed.
Maintenance The maintenance interval for the OLTC shall be set by
interval the operator / manufacturer, either as time interval or
operation based interval
Time interval Operator time interval shall be set by the user /
manufacturer

group
Tap changer Tap changer operation interval shall be set by the user /
operation manufacturer
interval
operation The number of tap-change operations per position shall
statistic be counted
Operation The number of tap-change operations shall be counted
counter
(adjustable)
tap position The dwelling time per position shall be counted (i.e. the
statistic time how long the OLTC has dwelled on each position in
summary).
Protective Monitoring of protective relay shall be performed by
relay digital input signal.
(RS2001)
Transformer Transformer All available data shall be monitored, visualized and
monitoring monitoring logged.
general
Ambient The ambient temperature shall be monitored by an
temperature analogue input signal (4…20mA).
Top Oil The top oil temperature shall be monitored by an
Temperature analogue input signal (4…20mA).
DGA gas  Two gas signals from DGA sensors shall be monitored
signals by an analogue input signal (4…20mA).
 The designation of the gases shall be set by the user/
manufacturer.
Load current, The load current shall be measured as signal from the
one or three- current transducer (CT) with a nominal current of
phase 1 A and continuous operating range 0 - 210 % of the
nominal value
Voltage, one The transformer voltage shall be measured as signal from
or three- the voltage transducer (VT) with a nominal voltage of
phase 110 VAC and operating range 20 – 190 VAC
Power (S, P, Apparent, active and reactive power as well as load factor
Q), load shall be calculated values.
factor
Hotspot The hotspot temperature shall be calculated according to
temperature IEC or ANSI and monitored.
Aging rate The transformer aging rate shall be calculated.
Buchholz Monitoring of the Bucholz relay shall be performed by

relay digital input signal.
Pressure Monitoring of the pressure relief device shall be
relief device performed by digital input signal.

group
Oil level The minimum and maximum oil levels shall be
(min, max) monitored by two digital input signals.
Maintenance The operator time interval for transformer maintenance
interval shall be set by the user / manufacturer.
Data Logging General  All measured and calculated values shall be cyclically
logged in the device.
 Events, digital input status and maintenance status shall
be logged in the device.
 All data shall be stored in CSV-Format.
Event Events are logged with timestamp, priority and plaintext.
logging
Hardware Power supply Supply voltage of the device 110VDC.
Main  The CPU unit has three status LEDs showing the
processing operational status of the device.
unit  Two Ethernet RJ45 interfaces and two serial interfaces
are available for web visualization and/or Scada
protocols.
 A USB port is available for firmware updates and
database downloads.
Digital input Digital input signals working with 110VDC potential.
signals
Analogue Standard analogue input signals 4x 4…20mA interfaces,
input signals with extendable option for additional signal acquisition.
Digital Three digital output signals are working with 110 VDC
output potential. The interface is optionally extendable to
signals potential free contacts (relay contacts).
Voltage/Curre 3-phase Voltage and current measurement. Voltage input
nt 0…180VAC, current input nominal 0,2A / 1 A / 5 A,
measurement frequency range 45…65Hz
14.15 Rating and Diagram Plates

14.15.1 General
Rating and diagram plates shall comply with the requirements of IEC except where
otherwise stated in this specification.
14.15.2 Materials and Methods of Marking

Rating and diagram plates shall be of stainless steel not less than 1.2mm in thickness. The
required information shall be engraved on the plate and engrave filled with a glossy black,
baked enamel.
Other arrangements shall be specifically approved.
14.15.3 Mounting
The rating and diagram plates shall be mounted on a purpose made backing plate, finished
and situated in an accessible position not more than 1.0 m above ground level, and secured
by stainless steel screws.
14.15.4 Information for Plant

The information to be displayed on the rating and diagram plate shall be in accordance
with the requirements of:
a) IEC 60076 for the power transformer with addition of the following:
b) The tapping current values for HV and MV terminals for the principal tapping
positions, and for the extreme tapping positions. Tapping values of current shall also
be shown for those tapping position where, the current will not exceed 1,05 times the
rated current on the principal tapping;
c) the capability of the transformer (including bushings and tap-changers) to carry
overloads in accordance with the emergency duties detailed in IEC 60354 shall be
shown;
d) a statement that the manufacturer deems it necessary for the transformers to be oil-
filled under vacuum;
e) a statement that the transformer will withstand full vacuum at sea level;
f) the Employer's reference number shall appear on the rating and diagram plate;
g) a blank space for the Employer's asset number shall be provided;
h) the type, make and designation numbers of all bushings, to enable full identification
(relating to stock spares) while the transformer is energized;
i) the valve and oil sampling point functions and positions;
j) a warning statement that the conservator contains a bag or other sealing systems if it
is the case; and
k) the type of corrosion protection: Corrosive or low corrosive.
l) Winding temperature resistor setting = 'x' ?. Where 'x' is given by the Supplier.
m) the system fault levels in kA for which the transformer is designed as specified;
n) the tap changer data detailed shall be shown;
o) the OLSS (Off-load-switch-selector) or OCTS (Off-circuit tap switch) interlink data
detailed shall be shown;
p) the current transformer positions and data detailed shall be shown;
q) the voltage transformer positions and data detailed shall be shown;
r) the protection relay data detailed shall be shown;
s) the RTU data detailed shall be shown;
t) the HV and MV switchgear data detailed shall be shown;
u) the AUX TX data detailed shall be shown;
v) the surge arrestors positons and data detailed shall be shown;
w) the battery bank data detailed shall be shown;
x) the battery charger data detailed shall be shown;
y) the trailer data detailed shall be shown;
z) the energy meter data detailed shall be shown;
Whilst a single plate is preferred, separate plates mounted adjacent to the main plate or on
referred equipment are acceptable for the information required by items (p) to (m), and
more.
14.16 Adjudication of Bidders

During evaluation, bids will also be evaluated on the following bases:
a) Capitalized cost:
Typical transformer losses were calculated using the following formula.
TC = CK + C/kWh * PVF * 8760 (CFE + Ccu * LF), where:
TC = Total cost of transformer during its life time.

CK = C & F price of the transformer with spares
C/kWh = Cost per kWh (For Uganda)
PVF = Present value factor for 40 years at 12% discount rate
CFE = Core (No load loss) in kW ≤ 25 kW
Ccu = Copper losses at full Current (A) or load loss in kW ≤ 300 kW
LF = Loss factor
CFE (no load loss) = 7,040 USD/kW
CCU (load loss) = 3,050 USD/kW
For purposes of evaluation, Iron Losses and Copper Losses will be capitalized at the
values for losses given in the bid (Technical Data Sheet) and the form FUNC.
Transformer Losses (in kW) offered by Bidders in the Form FUNC shall be
multiplied by the above Unit Capitalized Costs of Losses and the results added to the
Bid Price for the purpose of evaluation only.
The auxiliary power losses will be added to the load losses.
b) To assist in the evaluation, the following typical bid drawings and descriptive data
shall be provided:
 outline drawing showing the position of terminals, conservator and gauge glasses
and control cubicle and surge arresters where applicable,
 type test certificates of identical units shall be submitted when available,
 outline drawings of bushings, and
 all drawings.
Bid information shall be submitted relating to the pre-treatment and sizing of windings
and the assumptions made for the calculation of short circuit strength;
Bids shall include descriptive data and illustrations in sufficient detail to enable the
equipment offered to be fully considered in respect of materials, design and construction
of the individual parts. This information shall be furnished before the closing date of bids.
14.17 Workmanship
All Work shall be equal to the best modern practice in the manufacture and fabrication of
materials covered by these Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
correct fitting of all parts, shall replace free of cost any defective material discovered during
the defect liability/Warranty period pay all costs of field corrections for such replacement.
All parts of the structure shall be neatly finished and free from kinks, twists or bends. All
holes shall be made with sharp tools and shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edge. The
fabrication shall be in strict accordance with the shop drawings prepared by the Contractor
in line with IEC standards.
Structural material shall be straight and cleaned of all rust and dirt before laid out or worked
in any manner. Shearing and cutting shall be performed carefully. Manually guided cutting
torches shall not be used.
All bolt holes in steel members shall be punched, sub punched, reamed or drilled before
galvanizing. Holes shall be drilled instead of being punched if the thickness of the metal
exceeds the diameter of the hole. All holes shall be lean-cut and without torn or ragged
edges. All holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the member.
The diameter of the finished bolt hole shall not be greater than the normal diameter of the
bolt plus 1.5 mm. Plugging, welding or slotting of mis-punched, mis-reamed or mis-drilled
holes will not be permitted. The holes shall be located accurately so that, when the
members are in position, the holes will be lined up before being bolted.
14.18 Galvanizing
After the shop work has been completed, all materials shall be cleaned and then, including
bolts, nuts and washers, hot-dip galvanized. Where members are of such length that they
cannot be dipped in one operation, great care shall be exercised to prevent warping. All
holes in material shall be free of excess spelter after galvanizing. All materials shall be
safeguarded against embrittlement during galvanizing. The zinc coating shall be of uniform
thickness and so applied that it will adhere to the surface of the steel. Major damage to
galvanizing shall be cause for rejection. Material on which galvanizing has been damaged,
shall be redipped unless the damage is minor and local and can be repaired by applying
galvanizing repair paint.
Annex I – Technical Schedules (PLANT)

Table 15: General Plant Technical Schedules
Item Description UOM/ REQUIRED PROPOSED
STD
1.1 Type, quantity and delivery
Type of substation required 132/33-11kV

25MVA YN0yn0
Quantity Units/ Two
Lots
a) Transformer capacity MVA 25
b) HV (Primary) voltage ratios kV 132
c) MV (Primary) voltage ratios kV 33 - 11
d) Nominal impedance at higher ratio % 10 - 14
(Note: 25MVA default impedance 10 – 14%)
e) Nominal impedance at other HV ratio % 10 - 14
Number of units required 2
Delivery date: Not later than 12 months
xxxxxxxxx
Delivery to: Gulu Substation
1.2 Vehicle – General
Trailer description in accordance with section 3 Yes

Trailer total mass kg Main xxxx
MV panel xxxx
Number of Trailers Two sets
Number of axles
 Main Trailer 4
 MV Trailer 2
Trailer wheels
 Rim diameter range 16-18 inches
Fitment of suitable locking fasteners for Min. 6
wheels, dependent on number of axles
(Supplier to recommend)
Maximum length (from middle of kingpin to mm 14,500
middle of axles)
Maximum width (preferred 2,900mm) mm 3,200
Maximum height mm 4,300
Minimum Ground Clearance (range) mm 200 – 250 mm
Trailer goose-neck Yes
Kingpin diameter mm 89
th
5 wheel height mm 1350
Vehicle design speed (asphalt) km/h 60
1.3 Suspension

STD
Type of suspension: Pneumatic (air)
Required individual axle variability for off-road mm ≥150
Conditions
1.4 Braking system
Compressed air type braking system for ton 120
specified GCM
1.5 Levelling gear
Hand-operated stabilizing legs on each of Main: Min. 6
the four corners, and middle of trailer MV Panel: Min 4
Each leg to be rated for 30 - 50% of the total mass Yes
of the trailer
Fixed spherical bubble-type spirit level on Yes
each of the four corners on the trailer
1.6 Tool-box and spare wheel
3CR12 Lockable and integral tool-box mm 600x400x400
Tool-box as per above Qty 4
Storage for supervisory mast Yes
Road tools for the trailers (Details to be Yes
provided by Supplier)
Lockable spare wheels for the trailers Qty 2
Theft deterrent wheel nuts for all wheels Qty 10
Hydraulic jack accessible from ground level Yes
Jacking points clearly indicated Yes
1.7 Lights
Full set of road and indicating lights in LED cluster
accordance with National Road Traffic Act
400W LED /HPS operational lamps Qty Min 8
(4 per trailer)
1.8 Earthing
All equipment earthed to integral steelwork of the Yes
trailers rated for 31.5 / 40kA (whichever is
applicable)for 3sec
Earthing points suitable to for portable Qty Min 6
conductors for connecting to earth mat
1.9 General
Equipment insulation
AIS Bushing type HTV Composite
(Silicone)
GIS Bushing type Plug / Connex
Specific creepage with reference to the maximummm/kV 25
system voltage
Operational barricading Yes


STD
Corrosion protection Yes
All equipment to comply to IEC Corrosion Protection Yes
Specification for corrosive environments
All external surfaces, including the oil conservators Yes
shall be finished with an outer coat of enamel of color
of light pebble grey - RAL7032.
Exposed fasteners to be stainless steel Yes

Complete unit to be tested in factory (Factory Yes
Acceptance Test) by manufacturer before delivery.
To be witnessed as specified in the List of Services
and Completion Schedule Table.
24-hour final acceptance test to be Yes
performed at a site nominated by UETCL
1.10 Bushing Connections
Round tinned copper stem mm 26 x 125
Table 16: Power Transformer Technical Schedules

Item Description UOM/ Required Proposed
STD
2.1 Power Transformer – General
Approximate design maximum current density A/mm2 7.0
• As recommended for 25MVA transformers
Approximate transformer total mass kg 40,000
(Including oil, heat exchangers, cooling plant etc.)
High temperature insulation system type Full Hybrid /
Mineral Oil
Thermal Class 155

Cooling type (ODAF – forced directed oil) ODAF
Permanent direction indicators for cooling fan rotation and oil Yes
flow.
Medium voltage ratio selection shall be through OLSS (Off- OLSS /
load-switch-selector) or OCTS (Off-circuit tap switch) OCTS
interlink
CTs as per table 5 6 (25MVA)
Permissible sound power level (LwA): IEC 60076- 75 dB(A)

10 +0%
Vector group MV YNyn
Switched
Rated frequency Hz 50
Normal Service condition standards IEC 62271-1
Altitude m 1500
0
Maximum ambient temperature C 105
2.2 Power Transformer – Detail
Manufacturer xxxxxx
Three phase two winding construction oil ODAF continuous Yes
immersed transformer, with on load tap changer and switched
OLSS or OCTS for the MV winding
Application - Outdoor
Transformer description in accordance with section 4 Yes
2.3 Rated voltage (HV/MV)
• Primary / HV winding kV 132
(+5 / -15)
• Secondary / MV winding kV 33 - 11
Highest System Voltage kV 145/36-12
• Primary / HV winding kV 132
• Secondary / MV winding kV 33 - 11
Transformation tolerance (all taps) ≤ +5.0%
Tap changer On HV
winding

STD
2.5 Rated Power
• Primary / HV winding MVA 25 – all taps
• Secondary / MV winding MVA 25
2.7 Rated current
• HV winding A 109.4
• MV winding A 437.5 / 1312.5
2.8 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

• HV winding kV 650
• HV neutral kV 250
• MV winding kV 170
• MV Neutral kV 170
2.8 Rated power frequency withstand voltage
• HV neutral 95
2.10 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (Wet)
2.11 Rated power frequency withstand voltage (Wet)
2.12 0
Temperature rise at rated power and ambient temperature 40 C
top oil K 55max.
average winding (resistance measurement) K 100max.
winding hottest spot K 120max.
2.13 Impedance voltage 132/33 kV
on principal tap % 10 - 14
on lowest tap % 10 - 14
on highest tap % 10 - 14
2.14 Impedance voltage 132/11 kV
on principal tap % 10 - 14
on lowest tap % 10 - 14
on highest tap % 10 - 14
2.15 Max. losses on principal tap:
• no load loss kW 25
• load loss at rated output kW 300
• total loss at rated output kW 325

STD
2.16 Effective earth fault factor
• HV winding 1.4
• MV winding 1.4
2.17 Rated short circuit level
• HV winding 31.5
• MV winding 40.0
2.18 Surge Protection
• HV winding On CMT-GIS
• MV winding Plug – in Connex into
both MV GIS TX &
feeder panels
• Over voltage category IV
• Pollution degree 3
2.19 Short Circuit Strength
• Max. Short Circuit Capacity of 132kV GVA 7.5
(X/R = 10)
• Voltage 1.05xUn
• Over voltage category IV
• Pollution degree 3
2.20 Weight of Transformer
Volume of oil l xxxxx
Total weight with oil kg xxxxx
Total weight without oil kg xxxxx
Weight for transportation kg xxxxx
2.21 Termination / bushings
Transformer HV winding onto CMT-GIS Polymer/
Silicon Air
Insulation
Transformer MV winding onto MV GIS Connex C
Type Plugs
Transformer MV winding onto AUX TX Connex C
Type Plugs
2.22 Maintenance Free Breather (Dehydrating) Systems Technical Data Sheet
Enclosure Galvanized Steel temperature controlled cabinet with
condensation heaters, lockable handle
Features
Heating Sensor controlled heating system (condition/ time)
Monitoring Self-monitoring with remote output control system
Output output of the air temperature via analog output
Operation Programmable with multiple mode
Indication internal and external LED indication of the current status


STD
Protection Full protection against environmental influences
Communication measured values called up through RS485 interface

Heating cycle Condition controlled heating cycles
Power rating VAC 230/400
Frequency Hz 50
Operations Electronic controller with moisture sensor with filter system
Self-learning system
Piping Stainless steel
Control Panel Protection Protection against Over Voltage, Over current, Over Pressure,
and Earth fault
2.23 On-load tap-changer scheme
OLTC scheme shall Vacuum Type Supply, Installation & Integration (MR Germany or
include: equivalent approved by contract manager )
2.24 Spares
HV bushing complete with gaskets and terminal connectors. Qty 1
MV bushing complete with gaskets and terminal connectors. Qty 1
Magnetic oil level indicator. Qty 1

Oil temperature indicator Qty 1
Table 17: HV Circuit-Breaker, Disconnector & Earthing Devices Technical

Schedules
STD
3.0 HV Circuit Breaker General details
Switchgear description in accordance with section 5 and Yes
Switchgear ratings in accordance with table 7:
Components in 3 phase CMT-GIS unit:
a) AIS bushing for line connection (BWR) 1
b) 3-phase circuit-breaker 1
c) 3-phase current transformer (2 cores per phase) 1
d) 3-phase voltage transformer (2 cores per phase) 1
d) 3-phase disconnector 1
e) 3-phase earthing switch 1
f) Integrated connection to transformer 1
g) Reference drawings 2
3.1 Electrical ratings:
a) Nominal voltage (Un) kV 132
b) Maximum voltage (Um) kV 145
c) Lightning impulse withstand level kV 650
d) Minimum rated continuous current A 1250
e) Short time current withstand (3 secs) kA 31.5
f) Emergency Current Rating:
1.3 pu for 120 minutes Yes
Mass of CMT-GIS module kg xxxx
3.2 HV Circuit-breaker, HV disconnector and HV earth switch controls
Local open/close controls for circuit- breakers, HV Yes
disconnector and HV earth switch in mechanism boxes
Local remote open/close control from protection panel and Yes
supervisory open/close control via protection panel
Local control unit cable length (Umbical) m 30
Local remote close commands shall be time delayed sec 30
Remote Control to SCADA Yes
3.3 HV Circuit Breaker Technical Detail
Manufacturer xxxx
Country of manufacture xxxx
Type (manufacture’s Identification) xxxx
Type tasted Yes
Type tasted report (reference number) Yes
First commercial operation of tender type years Min.5
Standards IEC
Type of arc quenching medium SF6
Number of phases /class 3/out door

STD
Impulse withstand voltage (peak)
 At nominal gas pressure kV 650
 At minimum gas pressure kV 650
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min)
 At nominal gas pressure kV 275
 At minimum gas pressure kV 275
Rated frequency Hz 50
Rated normal current A 1,250
Number of auxiliary contacts 6NO +6NC
Trip coils : 2 Nos
Closing coils : 1 Nos
3.4 HV Disconnector & Earth Switch
Reference Standard IEC
Manufacturer xxxxx
Manufacturer type designation: xxxx
Number of years in service-local/abroad xxxx
Number of poles: three
Application Outdoor
Frequency Hz 50
Rated current A 1250
Minimal breaking capacitance current A 2
Operating mechanism: Motorized
Number of auxiliary contacts of disconnector switch 6NO +6NC
Number of auxiliary contacts of earthing switch 6NO +6NC
3.5 Spares
Tripping coils Qty 2
Closing coils Qty 2
Spring charge motor Qty 2
Motor for disconnector/earthswitch mechanism Qty 2
SF6 pressure gauge Qty 1
Table 18: Control / MIB Panels Technical Schedules

STD
4.0 Control / MIB Panels General Details
All panel schemes shall include: Installation&

Integration
Reference standard IEC
Manufacturer xxxx
Degree of protection IP 55
Access to panel Front
Overall dimension: mm xxxx
Reference drawing Yes
Weight of board kg xxxx
Number of Panels including MIB 6
Panel description in accordance with section 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, Yes
and any other relevant section
4.1 AC Supplies
Rated voltage of AC supply

a) Three phase V 400
b) Single phase V 230
c) Variation in supply voltage % ±10
d) Maximum three-phase fault current from source kA 10
4.2 Moulded Case and Miniature Circuit Breakers
Rated operational voltage:
a) AC MCCBs and MCBs V 500
b) DC MCCBs and MCBs V DC 150
Rated current:
a) AC MCCBs and MCBs A 32 - 150
b) DC MCCBs and MCBs A 20 - 200
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 8

Rated duty Uninterrupted
Rated short circuit breaking capacity kA 12
Rated short circuit making capacity kA 12
Rated short circuit withstand current /1sec kA 12
Number of poles
 ..............................................................................................................................
3 A
C MCCBs and MCBs
 ..............................................................................................................................
2 D

STD
C MCCBs and MCBs
Method if installation Fixed / Rail

Type of release over-current
Auxiliary contacts 1NO+ 1NC
4.3 LV AC Distribution
Rated busbar current A 400
Short circuit current / 1 sec. kA 12
4.4 DC supplies
Nominal voltage of station battery V 110
Variation in supply voltage % +20
Standing load imposed by GIS control, alarm & W -15
interlocking system on station battery
4.5 DC Distribution Boards
Rated busbar current A 200
Short circuit current / 1 sec. kA 12
4.6 Batteries 110 V DC
Reference standard IEEE 1115
Manufacturer xxxx
Manufacturer type designation xxxx
Country of manufacturer xxxx
Maintenance-free type (Nicad) Sealed Alkaline
Nominal voltage per unit V 1.2
Float voltage range V 1.4 / 1.42
Boost voltage range V 1.45 / 1.7
Number of cells 90
Battery capacity minimum (for the whole mobile Ah 300
substation)
Minimal voltage of cell after discharge time 1.1
Continuous loading without charge Min. 24 hours
Weight kg Light weight
4.7 110 V DC Battery Charger
Manufacturer xxxx
Country of manufacturer xxxx
Type – Switched Mode Power Supply Modular Type Yes
Nominal voltage supply VAC 415
Frequency Hz 50
Float voltage range V 1.4 / 1.42
Boost voltage range V 1.45 / 1.5
Rated DC output current minimum A 100 (2x100)

STD
Ripple % 1 of RMS
Efficiency at nominal load % 90
Low voltage alarm setting V 99
High voltage alarm setting V 149
Weight kg Light weight
4.8 Cubicle Specifications
Internal dimensions (width x depth x height) 800x600x1600
Swing frame details 38U x 19”
Outer front door to be fitted with a hasp for a padlock Yes
Suitable shock absorbent mountings for cubicle & swing- Yes
frame rack to reduce transportation vibration
Cubicle powder--coated White
Anti-condensation heaters to manufacturer’s Yes

recommendation
Operational emergency DC lightning (110 VDC) LED
Specify total load for operational lighting mA xxxx
Platform for accessing to control panels must be Yes
fitted with the necessary safety railing to enclosure.
4.9 Control/marshalling kiosk
 Bay-level alarm panel provided Yes
Yes
 Bay-level interlocking system provided Yes
Yes
 Interlocking system based on relays or VDC 110
electronics
 Can interlocking be deactivated?
 Supply voltage for control, alarm,

monitoring, indication & interlocking
4.10 Transformer protection scheme in panel
Protection scheme as in sections 8 - 10 shall include Supply,

Installation &
Integration
4.11 Feeder protection scheme in panel
Protection scheme as in sections 8 - 10 shall include: Supply,

Installation &
Integration
4.12 Supervisory Systems in panel

STD
Telecontrol equipment scheme as in sections 8 - 10 Installation &
shall include: Integration
Antenna masts to be supplied as per details, and design Yes
to be submitted for approval
4.13 Online Monitoring System in panel
Online monitoring equipment scheme as in sections 15 Installation &
and functions in table 14, shall include: Integration
4.14 MV Relay in panel
General o All relays supplied with software and interface leads
o Protection scheme as in sections 8 - 9
Main relay o Numerical Transformer differential relay
o High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault relay
Backup relay o Numerical Over current, Sensitive Earth Fault and

Balanced Earth Fault relay as separate back up with in-
corporate switchgear maintenance statistics, with settable
IEC curves; SI, VI, EI, LTI & DT
Relay mounting Flush mounting

4.15 HV Relay in panel
General o All relays supplied with software and interface leads
o Protection scheme as in sections 8 - 9
Main relay o Numerical Transformer differential relay
o High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault relay
Backup relay o Numerical Over current, Sensitive Earth Fault and

Balanced Earth Fault relay as separate back up with in-
corporate switchgear maintenance statistics, with settable
IEC curves; SI, VI, EI, LTI & DT
Relay mounting Flush mounting

4.16 SCADA RTU
SCADA Equipment o SCADA equipment;
- SCADA RTU with Mount 10 Inch LCD Touch

screen/Monitor local HMI, Resolution 1024X600
- Configured with IEC 61850, IEC608870-5-101,
103 & 104 protocols

STD
- With spare Binary inputs and Output cards
provision interfaces to hardware external wiring
- RTU must support the configuration Integrated
Totals Inputs (ITI) for Energy meter
measurements (pulses/Accumulator)
- The RTU must be with capability to support
communication of 3 control Centers connections
- The RTU to be supplied must come along with all
configuration and testing software tools
- RTU required data bases point capacity is
minimum of 200 points
o GPS Clock for signal time stamping
4.17 Spares
Relays o One (1) of each HV and MV Main and backup relay type
used
o All other auxiliary relays, miscellaneous relays, and
accessories (one of each type used)
Table 19: MV circuit-breaker (GIS) type Technical Schedules

STD
5.0 MV circuit-breaker Type: Indoor (GIS) Compact type
Switchgear ratings in accordance with table 8:
a) Nominal voltage (Un) kV 33
b) Maximum voltage (Um) kV 36
c) Lightning impulse withstand (1,2/50) kV 170
d) One minute power frequency withstand kV 70
e) Rated continuous current – TRFT A 1500
f) Rated continuous current – Feeder bay A 750
g) Rated short-time current kA 40
h) Emergency Current Rating: Sec 3
Internal arc accessibility - AFLR ms 1000
Switchgear housing IP rating IP54
Switchgear description in accordance with Yes
section 5
5.1 Cable Compartment
Cable terminations (separable, screened, A 2000
Connex, type C) rating in accordance with
EN 50180
Termination for TRFR to Switchgear Connex & Bushings
Termination entry for TRFR LV Voltage Qty/ph On Aux TX LV
Transformer that shall be coupled with OLSS
/ OCTS
Termination entry for the feeder cables Qty/ph 1 feed plug setup
Termination entry for the feeder surge Qty/ph 1 feed plug setup
arrestor
Feeder power cable XLPE 400mm2 single Qty/ph 1 feed plug setup
core
Feeder power cable XLPE 95mm2 single Qty/ph 1 feed plug setup
core
Termination entry for the Power Qty/ph 2 feed plug setup/ph
Transformer cables
Power Transformer power cable XLPE Qty/ph 2 feed plug setup/ph
400mm2 single core
Number of TRFR Panels / bays Qty 1
Number of Feeder Panels /bays Qty 2
5.2 General Circuit Breaker Panel Details
Mass of MV circuit breaker panels kg xxxx
System Operating Voltage kV 33
Max. Continuous System Voltage kV 36

STD
Frequency Hz 50
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1min) kV rms 70
Lightning Impulse withstand Voltage (peak) kV peak 170
Switchgear control voltage V Dc 110
MOBILE Plant SCADA voltage V DC 110
Existing SCADA voltage (NOT DESIRED) V DC 48
Mean Altitude Above sea level m 1500
Humidity % 95 (Tropicalized)
Ambient Temperature Deg C 45
Switchgear type Compact GIS type indoor
Isolator operation V DC 110 motor
Rated short time withstand current (3sec) kA Min. 40
Rated short circuit breaking current kA Min. 40
(symmetrical rms)
Rated short circuit making current kA Min. 100
(symmetrical peak)
Rated peak withstand current (symmetrical kA Min. 100
peak)
5.3 Switchgear control
SCADA/LOCAL control Selector switch on each panel
to switch between SCADA
and local control
Interlocks Appropriate Mechanical and
electrical to be provided
CB ON/OFF (motorized 110V dc charging) CB & Isolator electrical push
button on front of panel.
Isolator ON/OFF (motorized 110V dc) All with Mechanical
alternative for operation.
Earth switch motorized on 3 Position switch Earth switch motorized
No. of auxiliary contacts for circuit breaker 6NO +6NC
No. of auxiliary contacts for disconnector 6NO +6NC
No of auxiliary contacts for earthing switch 6NO +6NC
5.4 Circuit Breaker Detail
Type of Quench Medium Vacuum
Resistance at min. closing force %µ 17±20
Ohms
Force to hold contact open at full stroke %N 210±10
0
Max. temperature at movable stem C 105
No. of operations at rated current Min. 50,000
No. of operations at rated short circuit current Min. 60
No. of mechanical operations Min. 100,000
Max. Over travel mm 3
Max. bounce duration ms 2

STD
Contact erosion limit mm 3
Average opening speed (0 – 60% stroke) ms 1.5 – 1.8
Average closing speed (40% to contact ms 1.1 – 1.7
making)
Min. closing force N 3100
Max. closing force N 3600
Closing force due to bellows and atmosphere N 150
Trip coils : 2 Nos
Closing coils : 1 Nos
5.5 Trip Circuit and Annunciator Details
Trip Circuit Separate Trip Circuit supervision relay
Trip relay Separate Electrically reset double latched trip relay (SET-
RESET type)
Alarm Annunciator A programmable LED Compact, separate (107 x107 mm) 8
window led alarm enunciator with at least 16 flashing led for
alarm, steady led for permanent fault and reset led for
transient fault. Example of the configured LED’s is shown
below
LED 1 Main Protection trip
LED 2 Backup protection trip
LED 3 Lockout relay operated
LED 4 Auxiliary DC fault
LED 5 Low SF6 Gas
LED 6 Spring Charge Fail
Trip coils : 2 Nos
Relay test blocks and To be provided for secondary testing of relay Control and
plugs CT circuits
5.6 Control Circuit Protection
DC failure Protection Fused and isolation protection as listed in section 4 of this
document
5.7 Metering
Instantaneous metering (107mm x 107 mm) compact digital meter for MW and
Amp readings.
Energy Metering Top mounting of utility energy meter shall be used. The
meters shall be supplied and installed as required in the
specifications and compatible with existing CEWE Pro
Meter 100, Landis + Gyr, Elster Meters, to be adopted to the
central meter management system.
Technical detail In accordance with section 9.9 and any other relevant section
Number of Energy Two (2) on each Plant (Main/Backup)
Meters
Table 20: MV Trailing Cables Technical Schedules

STD
6.0 MV Trailing cables
Nominal voltage: 19/33kV kV 19/33kV
Qty of cables supplied on individual or Qty x m 1 x 100m
discrete reels. Length per reel (typically
100m)
Switchgear description in accordance Yes
with section 6
6.1 400 mm2 Single Core XPLE 20/35 (40.5) kV Copper Cable
Conductor Material Copper
Country or Origin xxxx
Standard IEC
Number or Cores One
2
Core-section mm 400
(Each run suitable for 15MVA Current
Rating, at 11kV Voltage Configuration)
Cable Insulation Type XLPE
No. of Cores Single / One
Armor Non Armored
Conductor shape Round Stranded RM /
Compact Circular Stranded
Cable Insulation Level 20/35 (40.5) kV
Outer Conductive Layer Extruded / Strippable
Cable Identification 33,000 VOLTS', the year of
manufacture, and the
Manufacturer's identification in
legible / readable font
embossed on cable sheath
every two meters
Screen type Copper tape
Table 21: Surge Arrestor Technical Schedules

Item Description UOM/STD Required Proposed
7.0 Surge Arresters
Protective margin % 100
7.1 HV Line Surge Arresters
Line Voltage rating kV 132
Number Qty 3
Dimension drawing Yes
Type Outdoor
Applicable Standards IEC 99-4 (1991)
IEC 60815
Frequency range (Hz) 48-62
Rated Voltage, (kV rms) 120
Maximum continuous operating voltage (KVrms) 96
Model No. xxxxxx
Long Duration Class Heavy Duty
Nominal Discharge Current (KAP) 10
Creepage Distance mm/kV 25
Assembly Single Column (Series stack)
Additional Surge Counter Details Indicators & counters
Weatherproof enclosure with
glazed door
Pressure Relief kA 20
Partial Discharge at 1.05 times MCOV, (pC) < 10
Mounting details Support beams & mounting
bracket.
Pollution Classification Heavy duty
Reference voltage at reference current ( kVrms) Min. equal rated V.
Installation altitude Min 1500
Earthing of neutral at transformers Solid/through arrestors
System earthing Effectively earthed
System Frequency Hz 50
System highest voltage kV 145
Symmetrical short circuit current at rated kA 25/40
voltage RMS (ultimate)
Impulse withstand voltage kV 650
Power frequency voltage (1 min.) kV 275
Type of Surge Arresters Zinc Oxide Gap-less
Long duration line discharge class 2 or better
Residual voltage on 8 /20 current (peak 300-400
Counter
impulse provision kV) Yes
Type of insulator Polymer / Silicon
Total mass of three phase Surge Arrestor Kgs To be indicated
7.2 HV Neutral Surge Arrestor
Selectable neutral surge arrester Yes

Line Voltage rating kV 44
Number Qty 1
Type Outdoor
Applicable Standards IEC 99-4 (1991)
IEC 60815
Frequency range (Hz) 48-62
Maximum continuous operating voltage (KVrms) 32
Model No. xxxxxx
Long Duration Class Heavy Duty
Creepage Distance mm/kV 25
Assembly Single Column (Series stack)
Counter provision Yes

Additional Surge Counter Details Indicators & counters
Weatherproof enclosure with
Pressure Relief kA 20
glazed door
Partial Discharge at 1.05 times MCOV, (pC) < 10
Mounting details Support beams & mounting
bracket.
Pollution Classification Heavy duty
Reference voltage at reference current ( kVrms) Min. equal rated V.
Installation altitude Min 1500
Earthing of neutral at transformers Solid/through assertor
System earthing Effectively earthed
System Frequency Hz 50
System highest voltage kV 48
Power frequency spark-over voltage kV 1.5 Ur
Lighting impulse spark-over voltage kVpeak 3.33 Ur
Front-of-wave maximum spark-over kVpeak 3,85 Ur
voltage
Maximum residual voltage at in kVpeak 3,33 Ur
Power frequency spark-over voltage kV 1.5 Ur
Long duration line discharge class 2 or better
Residual voltage on 8 /20 current (peak 300-400
Type of insulator
impulse kV) Polymer / Silicon
Total mass of three phase Surge Arrestor Kgs To be indicated
7.3 MV Line & Neutral Surge Arrestors
Selectable neutral surge arrester Yes
MV surge arresters voltage kV 33
Description xxxx
Total mass of three phase Surge Arrestor To be indicated

Type Indoor for panels and outdoor
for neutral
Applicable Standard IEC 99-4 (1991)

IEC 60815
Frequency, (Hz) 48-62
Maximum continuous operating voltage 24.4
(KVrms)
Installation Connex plug onto GIS Feeder
Panels
And Polymer / Silicon for
Neutral
Long Duration Class Distribution
Energy Dissipation Capability 1.0
(Cumulative Operation within 1 min.) -
kJ/kV of Rating
Lightning Impulse residual voltage
(Max.) at 8/20 µs wave shape, (kVP)
@ 5.0 kAP 84.5
@ 10.0 kAP 90
@ 20.0 kAP 99.5
Steep current impulse residual voltage 97
(1/2 µs wave shape) @ 10 kAP, (kVP)
High Current Impulse withstand at 4/10 100
µs, (kAP)
Power frequency withstand voltage of 70
Arrester Housing (kVrms)
Lightning Impulse withstand voltage of 170
Arrester Housing (kVP)
Min. Creepage distance of Arrester 900
Housing (mm)
Partial Discharge at 1.05 times MCOV, < 10
(pC)
Reference current mAP 1.5
Reference voltage at reference current ( Min. equal rated V.
kVrms)
Temporary Overvoltage Capability
(kVrms) 36.8
- for 0.1 sec 35.3
- for 1.0 sec 33.8
- for 10 sec
Table 22: Auxiliary Transformer Technical Schedules

STD
8.0 Auxiliary (AUX TX) Transformer
Selectable resistor via Off-Circuit-Tap- FIXED
Switch (OCTS) interlink or Off-Load Selector
Switch (OLSS) to limit current to 360 A or
fixed resistor (FIXED) to limit current to a
maximum of 720A at the higher MV ratio
Rating of resistor at both ratios s 10
Selectable to keep auxiliary voltage at 400V (OCTS) interlink or OLSS
Irrespective of MV ratio selection.
2
Cable XLPE core size: mm 95
Rating of Type C bushings A 630
Protective cable bushing cover / box Yes
Rating of 2 Aux supply MCBs A 50 & 100
Mass of AUX TX complete including oil etc. kg To be provided
8.1 Auxiliary Transformers 33-11/0.4 kV, 160 kVA min.

Manufacturer xxxx
Number of years in service-local/abroad Min 5 years
Number of transformer windings two
Number of transformer phases 3
Type of transformer Oil immersed
Type of cooling ONAN
Application Outdoor
Selectable MV side kV 33 – 11
(Selectable resistor via AUX TX (OCTS) (Selectable)
interlink or OLSS)
LV side kV 0.4
Frequency Hz 50
3 - phase short circuit capability kA 40
Duration of short circuit on all windings sec 3
Impulse Withstand Voltage of MV side kVpeak 170
(1,2/50s)
Power Withstand Voltage of 11 kV side/1 min kVrms 70
Power Withstand Voltage of LV side/1 min kVrms 3
Rated power kVA 160 min.
Voltage Ratio: 33-11/0.4
a) Voltage variation range at HV side-of load yes

STD
b) Number of steps/tapping positions 4/5
c) Voltage of one step % 2.5 - 3
Impedance voltage at center tap position % 3-4
Vector group: Dyn0
Guaranteed noise level dB 55 max.
Guaranteed load losses at 75C and rated ratio kW 10 max.
8.2 Termination
Bushing Type (MV and LV) Plug-in connex
MV bushing rating kV 36
LV bushing rating V 600
Cable boxes N/A – plug type only
MV side for cables Single core 95mm2
LV side for cable 4x(1x185 mm2 ) 4 core 185mm2
Degree of protection IP 54
Total volume of oil litre xxxx
Table 23: Voltage Transformer Technical Schedules

STD
9.0 MV Side Voltage Transformer

Manufacturer of voltage transformer xxxx
Type 3-phase
Ratio 33-11kV/110V
Vector group Single Phase
Core 1 Class 0.2s, 5VA
Core 2 Class 0.2s, 5VA
Core 3 Class 3P, 30VA
Frequency Hz 50
Installation MV panel
Rated Short Circuit Current/3sec kA 40
Rated Peak Short Current/1sec kA 62,5
Rated secondary voltage V 110/3 &110/3
tertiary 3P
Overvoltage factor 1.9/8hours
9.1 HV Voltage transformers
Manufacturer of voltage transformer xxxx
Capacitive VT Yes
Number of years in service-local/abroad Min 5 years
Nominal system voltage kV 132/3
Frequency Hz 50
Rated Short Circuit Current/1sec kA 31.5
Rated secondary voltage V 110/3/110/3/110/3
Accuracy class 0.2
No. of coils 2
tertiary coil 3P
Rated burden VA 20
Over voltage factor 1,9/8 hours
Total mass: xxxx
Total mass of oil kg xxxx

Max. oil quantity for sampling without refilling xxxx
Reference drawing: Yes
Table 24: Current Transformer Technical Schedules

STD
10.0 Current transformers
For 25MVA in accordance with table 5 for Yes

TRFR applications
Protection Class 5P20, 10/20 VA,
Restricted Earth Class PX;V>=160V, 5 VA & in
line with CT table
Metering Class Not greater than 0.2S,
5VA (0.2FS5)
Reference standard IEC 60185
Manufacturer of current transformer xxxx
Number of years in service-local/abroad Min. 5 years
10.1 HV Current transformers
Nominal system voltage kV 132
Highest system voltage kV 145
Frequency Hz 50
Rated short circuit current/3sec kA 31.5
Measuring core-instrument security factor 5
Total mass kg xxxx
10.2 MV Current transformers
Frequency Hz 50
Rated short circuit current/3sec kA 40
Total mass kg xxxx
Installation MV panel
Withstand Lightning Impulse 1,2/50s kV 170
Withstand Power Frequency Voltage/1min kV 70
Rated Peak Short Current/1sec kA 62,5
Measuring core-accuracy class 2
Core for O/C and E/F protection 10
Second core 20
10.3 HV Neutral Current transformers

STD
Frequency Hz 50
Total mass kg xxxx
10.4 MV Current transformers
Frequency Hz 50
Total mass kg xxxx
10.3 MV Neutral Current transformers
Frequency Hz 50
Total mass kg xxxx
Table 25: Transformer Oil Technical Schedules

STD
11.0 Transformer Oil
Water Content IEC 60814 Max. 40ppm

Breakdown Voltage across 2,5mm gap IEC 60156 Min 40 kV Untreated
Min 70 kV after
Treatment
Kinematic Viscosity at 40oC ISO 3104 Max. 12 - 16 mm2 / s
Kinematic Viscosity at -30oC ISO 3204 Max. 1,800 mm2 / s
o
Density at 20 C ISO 3675 895 kg / m3
Pour Point ISO 3016 Max, -30oC
Flash Point ISO 2719/ ASTM Min. 140oC
D93
Appearance IEC 60296 Clear, free from sediment
& suspension matter
Neutralization Value IEC 62021.1 Max. 0.01mg KOH/g
Corrosive Sulphur DIN 51353, IEC Non corrosive
62535, ASTM
D1275B
ISO 5662
Dielectric dissipation factor (DDF/ Tan IEC 60247 Max. 0.005
o
delta) at 90 C
Oxidation Stability IEC 61125
o
(164 h/ 120 C)
Total acidity Max. 0.9 mg KOH/g
Sludge Max. 0.3%m
Anti-oxidant additives IEC 60666 Max. 0.4

Interfacial Tension N/m at 25oC ISO 6295 Min. 0.04
Source and type of crude oil xxxx
Table 26: Fibre Optical Modem with Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer Technical

Schedules
STD
12.0 Fiber Optical Modem with Data/Voice/Ethernet Multiplexer
Typical Multiplexes minimum of 10 E1 and 3 Ethernet Ports Over
applications Fiber with Voice (up to 8 channels FXS/FXO and 4 channels
2 Wire/4 Wire Analog), and Data (up to 8 channels RS-
232/RS-422/RS-485)
12.1 Specification
Asynchronous data ≥ 4 ports
(RS232)
Interface rate: 300~19.2 kbps self-adaptable
Interface character: ITU-T V.24
Interface type DCE
12.2 E1 interface, ≥ 4 port

Interface code: HDB3 code
Line speed: 2.048Mbp/s±50
Interface 75Ω/unbalanced or 120Ω/balanced

impedance:
Interface standard: ITU-T G.703
Interface character: According with G.703
Jitter tolerance According with G.704 and G.823

12.3 Ethernet interface, ≥ 1 port
Interface Rate: 10/100M self-adaptable
Protocol: Supports IEEE 802.3, IEEE802.1Q(VLAN)

Physical interface: RJ45, support Auto-MDIX
Duplex: Full duplex self-adaptable
MAC address table: Can learn 4096 MAC address
12.4 Optical Interface, = 2 ports

Item Description UOM/Required Proposed

STD
Optical wavelength:  1310 & 1550 nm single-mode optical interface
 1300 multi-mode optical interface for short distance
Fiber optical core: Dual Core

 One core Transmit.
 One core Receive.
Optical interface: FC
Transmit power: ≥ -9dBm
Optical receiver <-36 (BER<10):

receiving
sensitivity
Dynamic receiving >27dB
range:
Transmitting range: Dual-mode ≤ 80Km
 single-mode Laser 20dB at 62.5/125µm
 multi-mode LED 15dB at 9.0/125µm
Additional  Self-diagnostic
Functions  Local & Remote Loopback for Optics, E1 & Ethernet
Power Supply 110 VDC, not polarity sensitive
Quantity Two per Mobile (4 total)

Table 27: Ethernet Radios Technical Schedules

Item Description Required Proposed
13.0 Ethernet Radio
Transmitter:
 Frequency Range  902 to 928 MHz
 Output power  5 mW to 1 Watt
 Data link range  60 miles, clear line of Sight
 Modulation  2 level GFSK
 RF Data Rate  115.2 kbps standard speed, 153.6 kbps high
speed
 Occupied Bandwidth  230.4 kHz
 Hopping Patterns  15 per band, 105 total, user selectable
 Hopping Channels  112
 Frequency zones  16 zones, 7-8 channels per zone
Receiver
 Sensitivity
o Standard speed o -108 dBm, at standard speed, 1x10-4BER
o High speed o -104 dBm, at high speed, 1x10-4BER
 IF selectivity  20 dB at fc ± 230 kHz
Data Transmission
 Error detection  32 bit CRC, retransmit on error
 Data security  AES 128-bit encryption and FHSS high
speed
 Data throughput  80 kbps standard speed, 115.2 kbps high
speed
 Serial data interface  RS232/RS422/RS485 programmable
 2 x 9-pin D-sub (DE-9) male connectors
 Ethernet data interface  802.3, TCP, UDP, DHCP, ICMP, ARP,
Multicast, TFTP, DNP3 over TCP 1x RJ-
45, 10/100 Base T, Auto crossover
Power requirement
 Operating voltage  +6 to +110VDC
 Typical current  Bidder to provide
General information
 Operating temperature  -400C to +750C
 Dimensions  Max 7.0 L x 3.5 W x 1.5H (in)
 RF connector  SMA, female
 Certifications  FCC part 15.247 / IC RSS-210 / UL class 1,
division 2
Number of Radios Two of each Mobile Plant (4) + One (1)
Spare. (5 Total)
Table 28: GPRS Modem Technical Schedules

14.0 IP GPRS Modem
Quantity Two per Mobile (4 total) plus One (1) Spare
Cellular Specification
Cellular module Industrial cellular module
Standard and Band  EGSM900/GSM1800 MHz
 GSM850/900/1800/1900 MHz
 Compliant to GSM phase 2/2+
 GPRS class 10 & class 12
Bandwidth 85.6 Kbps (DL), 85.6 Kbps (UL)
TX power  GSM 850/900: ≤ 33 dBm
 GSM 1800/1900: ≤ 30 dBm
RX sensitivity ≤ -107 dBm
Hardware System
CPU Industrial 32 bits CPU
Flash 512 KB (Extendable)
SRAM 256 KB
Interface Type
Serial  Two RS232 ports, one RS485 (or RS422)
port, 15 KV ESD protection
 Data bits - 5,6,7,8
 Stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2
 Parity – None, even, odd, space, mark
 Baud rate – 110 – 230400 bps
Indicator  “Power”
 “ACT”
 “Online”
Antenna  Standard SMA female interface, 50 ohm,
lighting protection
Power Input
Standard power DC 12V/0.5A
Power Range DC 5 – 36V
Power Consumption
Working states:
 Communication  Max 45 – 55 mA
 Standby  Max 35 – 40 mA
 Sleep  Max 3 mA
Physical Characteristics
Housing Iron, providing IP30 protection

Dimensions Max 95 x 60 x 25 mm
Weight Max 205 g
Environmental Limits
Operating temperatures -35 – 750C

Storage temperature -40 – 850C
Operating humidity 95% (unfreezing)
Table 29: IP (VoIP) Phone Technical Schedules

15 IP (VoIP) Phone
Quantity Three (3) - One per Mobile plus One Spare
Manufacturer and model Attach manufactures brochures
Integral switch 10/100 mbps
Speaker phone/microphone Built – in, full duplex hands free
Line keys ≥4
Programmable soft keys ≥4 (+2 speed dial/line)
Fixed feature keys ≥8
Message waiting Blinking indication
Ethernet ports ≥2
Display LCD color
XML support Yes
Signaling protocol SIP, H. 323
PoE Support Class 2 Power classification
Configuration Both static and DHCP support
Table 30: Programming Laptop Technical Schedules

16.0 Programming Laptop
Processor ( minimum) 4th Generation Intel® Core TM i5 -4300M
Operating System Preinstalled and Licensed Genuine

Windows® 7 Prof, 64-bit, English or
better
Chipset Mobile Intel® QM87 Express Chipset
Or equivalent
Memory Standard(Minimum) Populated with 8 GB DDR3 SDRAM at
1600Mhz with at least 2 DIMMS slots
Video card Intel® HD Graphics 4600.

Display (Minimum) 14.0 HD (1366x768) anti-glare LED
backlit, Direct-View outdoor-readable
display with Camera & Microphone
Hard Drive Minimum 500GB FIPS self-encrypting
drive
Optical Drive/ DVD+/-RW
Connectivity 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet
Wireless
Intel centrino advanced –N 6235+ Blue
tooth 4.0
Wireless 5570 HSPA+ 42Mbps mini
card
Multimedia High Quality Speakers
Stereo headphone/Microphone combo
jack
Integrated, Integrated FHD video
webcam with software
Ports, Slots and Chassis Network connector (RJ-45)
USB 3.0 (4)
Stereo headphone/Microphone combo
jack
Simcard connector, 1 full (WWAN) and
two half (WLAN, DDPE1) card slots.
Smart card reader, finger print Reader
with 34mm Express card, Kensington
slot
Security ClickSafe Keyed Laptop physical Lock
included
Laptop data encryption software
preinstalled and corresponding media
included/supplied.

16.0 Programming Laptop
Input Dual Pointing Keyboard: Backlit
Multi-touch Touchpad
Multi-touch Panel (2-finger touch)
Battery minimum 6-cell (60Wh) Lithium Ion battery
7 hours of battery life
Power Supply Unit (PSU) 65W AC Adapter, with 3 pin British
standard top plug + Universal power
adapter.
Power Supply 220/240 V
Weight Maximum 4.9 Lbs
Bag Backpack water proof Carrying Case -
Fits Laptop with Screen Size 14.-inch.
Black in colour.
Warranty minimum Two year warranty on parts and labour
End life minimum 4 years, attach supporting
documentation.
Environmental Regulatory Model: P46G; Regulatory
Compliance Type: P46G001;
Energy Star 6.0;
Other Mandatory standards 1.MIL-STD-810G testing results
(Bidder to attach results )
2. IEC 60529 Ingress protection

IP- 52 Compliant ( Bidder to
attach proof.)
Manufactures catalogues Required

Quantity One per Mobile Station (2 Total)
Table 31: Standalone Transformer Online Drying System Technical Specifications

17. Standalone Transformer Online Drying System
Enclosure Galvanized Steel or Aluminum temperature controlled
cabinet with condensation heaters, lockable handle
Features Self-draining: Reversible pump with forward and reverse
control switch
Automatic Shut-off: High Pressure switch to prevent build-
up, with relay for remote indication
Operation: Programmable with multiple mode
Meter: to record run time
Pump: Heavy duty, self-priming, positive displacement (non-
gear pump) with built-in pressure relief valve
Motor Power rating 230/400VAC - 50Hz
Flow rate Reduced turbulence flow and static
Piping Stainless steel with high pressure hydraulic fittings
Filter and Vessel  Filter max. 0.5 micron filtration media, designed for carbon
and other contaminants removal
 Vessel with manual vent, static pressure gauge, sight glass
for oil flow indication, and easy change out filter with filter
due replacement indication
Weight Light weight
Control Panel Protection against Over Voltage, Over current, Over
Protection Pressure, and Earth fault
Accessories  Set of Stainless steel Retrofitting piping (min. 4 meters), two
gate valves of piping sizing, and associated accessories
(elbows, unions, etc) for each pump supplied
 Supply power cabling (2/4 core) of min. 10 meters to
connect cabinet to power source
Key Functions  Removal of suspended particles in the inlet particle filter
 Moisture and temperature measurement at inlet
 Water removal in the adsorption cartridges
 Protection of the transformer by further removing particles
in the outlet particle filter
 Moisture and temperature measurement at outlet
Spares  Filters
 Housing lid gaskets
 Pressure gauge
 Heaters
 As recommended by manufacturer
Quantity One per Mobile Substation (Total 2)
Table 30: Multi-Mode Optical Fibre Cable Technical Specifications

18.0 Multi-Mode Optical Fiber Cable
Fiber Optic Type Multi-Mode (OM1)
Length 1 km
Fiber count 24
Number of loose tubes 4
Color coding Per IA/EIA 598B
Compliances  Tested in accordance with EIS/TIA-455 FOTPs
 ICEA S-87-640
 GR-20
 RoHS Compliant Directive 2011/65/EU
Attenuation coefficient  850 nm – 3.5 dB/km
 1300 nm – 1.0 dB/km
Overall launch bandwidth  850 nm – 200 MHz.km
 1300 nm – 500 MHz.km
Laser bandwidth 850 nm – 385 MHz.km
Gigabit Ethernet Link Length (1  1000 Base-SX (850 nm) – 500 meters
Gbps)  1000 Base-LX (1300 nm) – 1000 meters
10 Gigabit Ethernet Link 10G Base-SR (850 nm) – 33 meters
Length (10Gbps)
18.1 Mechanical Specification
Length 50 meters
Packaging Wooden circular reel
Nominal cable diameter 13.0mm
Nominal cable weight ≤ 120 kg/km
Maximum tensile load Installation – 2700 N
In service – 800 N
Central strength member Epoxy/glass rod
Inner Jacket Black UV and Moisture resistant polyethylene (PE)
Outer jacket  Black UV and Moisture resistant polyethylene (PE)
 Sequential footage markings
Features  Dry water block cable for ease of handling

 Loose tube gel filled construction
 for superior fiber protection
 UV and moisture resistant design
 Added protection of inner jacket
18.2 Performance
Temperature  Storage - -400C to +750C

 Installation - -300C to +600C
 Operating - -400C to +700C
Minimum bend radius  20 X OD – Installation
 10 X OD – In service
Maximum crush resistance  Short – 220 N/cm
 Long – 110 N/cm
Table 31: Documentation, Spares, and Special Tools Technical Schedules

STD
19.0 Documentation, spares and special tools
Operation and Maintenance manuals Set 4
required with information as listed in section 14
Manuals and drawings in digital format Set 2
Diagrams of outline, electrical, wiring etc. Set 2
with tender
Special tools and equipment to be supplied Lot Yes
as listed in section 14
Availability of spares to be guaranteed Years 10
Factory Training for operational team Persons 2 per Mobile Plant
Site Training for operational team Persons 6 per Mobile Plant
Factory Acceptance Testing Persons Trailers 1
Switchgear 1
Transformer 2
Protection 2
& Control
Robust Plant Maintenance Laptop with software Unit 1 Complete with
for Protection Relays, RTU, AVR, Energy backup media per
Meters, Onboard permanent impact recorder Mobile Substation
(accelerometer), test sets etc (2 total)
STS5000 with TDX5000 Multifunctional Complete 1
diagnostic testing solution for Power Set
Transformers and Switchgear with Cable Sets,
Software, Heavy Duty Transport Cases and
Trolley
SCAR-10 testing solution for Surge Arrestors Complete 1
with Current Clip-on Transformers, Cable Sets Set
and Carrying Bag
ATMoS Standalone Power Transformer Online Complete 2 – One for each plant
Drying System Set
Multi-Mode Optical Fiber Cable for The Mobile Roll/ 50 meter
Station Drum
Annex II – SCADA Minimum Signal List
NCC AND HMI SIGNAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTION FOR

TYPE VALUE
NAMES NCC & HMI SIGNAL NAME
AC & DC SISTEM
AC DISTRIBUTION CB TRIP SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
DC DISTRIBUTION CB TRIP SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
MINOR ALARM SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
MAJOR ALARM SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
DC UNDERVOLTAGE SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
LOW BATTERY SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
MAINS FAULT SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
CBs OPEN SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
AC & DC SISTEM
CHARGER MODULE FAIL SP ON / OFF
DISTRIBUTION
COMMUNICATION FAULT
-A101 AK3 SP ON / OFF
WITH HMI
COMMUNICATION FAULT
-A101 AK3 SP ON / OFF
WITH PROTECTION DEVICES
OPEN /
TRANSFORMER TR HV Q0 POSITION DP
CLOSED
TRANSFORMER TR HV Q0 COMMAND DC OPEN / CLOSE
PERMISION FOR LOCAL
TRANSFORMER TR SP ON / OFF
CLOSING HV Q0
OPEN /
TRANSFORMER TR HV Q1 POSITION DP
CLOSED
TRANSFORMER TR HV Q1 COMMAND DC OPEN / CLOSE
OPEN /
TRANSFORMER TR HV Q1ES POSITION DP
CLOSED
TRANSFORMER TR HV Q1ES COMMAND DC OPEN / CLOSE
TRANSFORMER TR HV LOSS OF SF6 SP ON / OFF
TRANSFORMER TR HV GENERAL LOCKOUT SF6 SP ON / OFF
CLOSING LOCKOUT
TRANSFORMER TR HV SP ON / OFF
OPERATING MECHANISM
TRANSFORMER TR HV SET ON LOCAL -S8 SP ON / OFF
TRANSFORMER TR HV MOTOR MCB OPEN SP ON / OFF

TRANSFORMER TR HV GENERAL LCOKOUT SF6 SP ON / OFF
CLOSING SPRINGS
TRANSFORMER TR HV SP ON / OFF
DISCHARGED
HV+TES DISCONNECTOR
SWITCH MOTOR MCB OPEN
HV+TR CB CONTROL CIRC. Q60
MCB OPEN
TRANSFORMER TR GENERAL TRIP ( Back Protection) SP ON / OFF
TRANSFORMER TR LOCKOUT RELAY K86 TRIP SP ON / OFF
TRANSFORMER TR 87N REF TRIP SP ON / OFF
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER / -
CTRL AUTHORITY LOCAL SP ON / OFF
F11 7UT85
OPEN /
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER Q0 POSITION DP
CLOSED
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER Q0 COMMAND DC OPEN / CLOSE
OPEN /
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER Q1 POSITION DP
CLOSED
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER Q1 COMMAND DC OPEN / CLOSE
OPEN /
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER Q1ES POSITION DP
CLOSED
TRANSFORMER OLTC OLTC SEL. S32 ON LOCAL SP ON / OFF
AUTOMATIC/
TRANSFORMER OLTC OLTC REGULATION MODE SP
MANUAL
OLTC BLOCK AUTOMATIC
TRANSFORMER OLTC SC ON / OFF
CONTROL
TRANSFORMER OLTC OLTC TAP POSITION BSC -
TRANSFORMER OLTC OLTC POSITION COMMAND BSC RAISE / LOWER
OLTC FORCE MASTER
TRANSFORMER OLTC SC ON / OFF
COMMAND
MASTER/FOLL
TRANSFORMER OLTC OLTC IS MASTER SP
OWER
OLTC TAP CHANGER IN
TRANSFORMER OLTC SP ON / OFF
OPERATION
OLTC INCOMPLETE
SWITCHING OPERATION
HV TR OLTC GAS PROT.
ALARM F11
HV TR OLTC MIN. OIL LEVEL
F52
TRANSFORMER TR HV TR BUCHHOLZ ALARM F10 SP ON / OFF

TRANSFORMER TR HV TR BUCHHOLZ TRIP F10 SP ON / OFF
HV TR OVERPRESSURE VALVE
TRIP F70
HV TR MIN OIL LEVEL ALARM
F50
HV TR OIL TEMP ALARM F20
85°
TRANSFORMER TR HV TR OIL TEMP TRIP F20 90° SP ON / OFF
HV TR HV WINDING TEMP
ALARM F71 95°
HV TR HV WINDING TEMP TRIP
F71 100°
HV TR MV WINDING TEMP
ALARM F72 95°
HV TR MV WINDING TEMP
TRIP F72 100°
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER SEL S11 ON LOCAL POSITION SP ON / OFF
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER CB MOTOR MCB -QM OPEN SP ON / OFF
CB, I* AUX. CIRC MCB -QC
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER SP ON / OFF
OPEN
CB, II* AUX. CIRC MCB -QT2
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER SP ON / OFF
OPEN
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER CB SPRINGS DISCHARGED SP ON / OFF
33kV H01 MV BUSBAR UNDERPRESSURE SF6 SP ON / OFF
HV+TR UPPER FAN COOLER
U.1 IS RUNNING
HV+TR LOWER FAN COOLER
U.1 IS RUNNING
HV+TR PUMP COOLER U.2 IS
RUNNING
HV+TR UPPER FAN COOLER
U.2 IS RUNNING
HV+TR LOWER FAN COOLER
U.2 IS RUNNING
AUX TRANSFORMER PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE SP ON / OFF
AUX TRANSFORMER TEMP. ALARM SP ON / OFF
AUX TRANSFORMER TEMP. TRIP SP ON / OFF
TRANSFORMER TR GENERAL PICKUP SP ON / OFF
TRANSFORMER TR GENERAL TRIP( Main Protection) SP ON / OFF
33 kV H04 TR INCOMER LOCKOUT RELAY K86 TRIP SP ON / OFF

TRANSFORMER TR 49 CURRENT WARNING SP ON / OFF
TRANSFORMER TR HOTSPOT_TEMPERATURE MV °C
TRANSFORMER TRAILER 2 AMBIENT_TEMPERATURE MV °C
33 kV H03 VT PANNEL UBC MV kV
TRANSFORMER TR MV
IphB MV A
SIDE
TRANSFORMER TR MV
P MV kW
SIDE
TRANSFORMER TR MV
Q MV kVAr
SIDE
TRANSFORMER TR MV
Wp+ ITI kWh
SIDE
TRANSFORMER TR MV
Wp- ITI kWh
SIDE
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 CTRL AUTHORITY LOCAL SP ON / OFF
OPEN /
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 Q0 POSITION DP
CLOSED
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 Q0 COMMAND DC OPEN / CLOSE
OPEN /
CLOSED
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 Q1ES POSITION DP OPEN / CLOSE
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 SEL S11 ON LOCAL POSITION SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 CB MOTOR MCB -QM OPEN SP ON / OFF
CB, I* AUX. CIRC MCB -QC
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 SP ON / OFF
OPEN
CB, II* AUX. CIRC MCB -QT2
OPEN
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 CB SPRINGS DISCHARGED SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 UNDERPRESSURE SF6 SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 GENERAL TRIP ( Main Protection) SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 LOCKOUT RELAY K86 TRIP SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 79 AR IN PROGRESS SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 79 AR CLOSE COMMAND SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 79 AR SUCCESSFUL SP ON / OFF
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 UBC MV kV
33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 IphB MV A

33 kV H01 FEEDER 1 GENERAL TRIP ( Back up ) SP ON / OFF
OPEN /
CLOSED
OPEN /
CLOSED
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 Q1ES POSITION DP OPEN / CLOSE
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 SEL S11 ON LOCAL POSITION SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 CB MOTOR MCB -QM OPEN SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 CB SPRINGS DISCHARGED SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 UNDERPRESSURE SF6 SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 GENERAL TRIP( Main Protection) SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 79 AR OFF SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 79 AR CLOSE COMMAND SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 79 AR SUCCESSFUL SP ON / OFF
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 UBC MV kV
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 IphB MV A
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 Wp+ ITI kWh
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 Wp- ITI kWh
33 kV H02 FEEDER 2 GENERAL PICKUP SP ON / OFF
GENERAL TRIP ( Back Up
Protection)
Annex III – Additional Transformer Design and Specifications
1. General Design
Boundary parameters for 25 MVA, 132/33-11kV power transformer for mobile substation
2. Tapping range
HV: 132 kV +4 x 1.25% and - 12 x 1.25%
MV: 33 kV re-connectable to 11 kV
3. Impedance:
132 / 33 - 11 kV: Z = 14% (desired value Z = 12%)
4. Losses
Load Losses (max.):
132.0 / 33 - 11 kV: 300 kW
No-load losses (max.): 25 kW
5. Temperature
Mean oil temperature rise = 45 K, mean winding gradient 28 K Top oil temperature rise =
55 K
6. Insulation Oil
Pumped oil volume 2 x 50 m³/hr (2 pump circuits)
7. Winding Insulation System

Full Hybrid (high temperature) Insulation Winding with Thermal Class 155
8. Total Transformer mass: 40,000 kg

Masses (max.):
(Calculated*/estimated**:)
Active part (core* kg + copper* kg) x 1.12 = kg

Tank* including expansion tank
Magnetic shunt*
Oil**
OLTC (Catalogue)
Heat Exchangers**
9. Dimensions of the Main Trailer

The transformer and the mobile substation components shall be fitted on the main trailer
having a maximum length of 17500 mm. The transformer in this design is placed
perpendicular (transversely) to the length axis of the trailer. The HV line bushings /
terminals and HV switchgear will be Air Insulated, while HV and MV neutral bushings
will be located at the bottom end of the tank about 1200mm from the base. The overall
maximum height of the transformer shall be about 3200mm.
10. Dimensions of the MV Trailer

The MV Switchgear and additional components shall be fitted on the existing UETCL
main trailer having a maximum length of 11700 mm. The overall maximum height of the
transformer shall be about 4500 mm.
See Annex IV – Details of existing UETCL Trailers.

Table 32: Deviation schedule

Any proposed deviations from this specification shall be listed below with reasons
for the deviation(s). In addition, evidence shall be provided that the proposed
deviation will at least be more cost-effective than that specified by UETCL.
Item Clause Proposed deviation
Drawings
Supplementary Information
219
PART 3 - Contract
221
Section VIII. General Conditions of Contract
Table of Clauses
1. Definitions....................................................................................................................... 223
2. Contract Documents........................................................................................................ 224
3. Fraud and Corruption ...................................................................................................... 224
4. Interpretation ................................................................................................................... 224
5. Language ......................................................................................................................... 225
6. Joint Venture, Consortium or Association ...................................................................... 226
7. Eligibility ........................................................................................................................ 226
8. Notices ............................................................................................................................ 226
9. Governing Law ............................................................................................................... 226
10. Settlement of Disputes .................................................................................................... 227
11. Inspections and Audit by the Bank ................................................................................. 227
12. Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 228
13. Delivery and Documents................................................................................................. 228
14. Supplier’s Responsibilities.............................................................................................. 228
15. Contract Price.................................................................................................................. 228
16. Terms of Payment ........................................................................................................... 228
17. Taxes and Duties ............................................................................................................. 229
18. Performance Security ...................................................................................................... 229
19. Copyright ........................................................................................................................ 229
20. Confidential Information ................................................................................................ 230
21. Subcontracting ................................................................................................................ 230
22. Specifications and Standards .......................................................................................... 231
23. Packing and Documents .................................................................................................. 231
24. Insurance ......................................................................................................................... 232
25. Transportation and Incidental Services ........................................................................... 232
26. Inspections and Tests ...................................................................................................... 232
27. Liquidated Damages ....................................................................................................... 233
28. Warranty ......................................................................................................................... 234
222 Section VIII. General Conditions of Contract
29. Patent Indemnity ............................................................................................................. 234

30. Limitation of Liability..................................................................................................... 236
31. Change in Laws and Regulations .................................................................................... 236
32. Force Majeure ................................................................................................................. 236
33. Change Orders and Contract Amendments..................................................................... 237
34. Extensions of Time ......................................................................................................... 238
35. Termination ..................................................................................................................... 238
36. Assignment ..................................................................................................................... 239
37. Export Restriction ........................................................................................................... 239
Section VIII. General Conditions of Contract 223
Section VIII. General Conditions of Contract

1. Definitions 1.1 The following words and expressions shall have the meanings
hereby assigned to them:
(a) “Bank” means the World Bank and refers to the
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
(IBRD) or the International Development Association
(IDA).
(b) “Contract” means the Contract Agreement entered into
between the Purchaser and the Supplier, together with the
Contract Documents referred to therein, including all
attachments, appendices, and all documents incorporated
by reference therein.
(c) “Contract Documents” means the documents listed in the
Contract Agreement, including any amendments thereto.
(d) “Contract Price” means the price payable to the Supplier
as specified in the Contract Agreement, subject to such
additions and adjustments thereto or deductions
therefrom, as may be made pursuant to the Contract.
(e) “Day” means calendar day.
(f) “Completion” means the fulfillment of the Related
Services by the Supplier in accordance with the terms and
conditions set forth in the Contract.
(g) “GCC” means the General Conditions of Contract.
(h) “Goods” means all of the commodities, raw material,
machinery and equipment, and/or other materials that the
Supplier is required to supply to the Purchaser under the
Contract.
(i) “Purchaser’s Country” is the country specified in the
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC).
(j) “Purchaser” means the entity purchasing the Goods and
Related Services, as specified in the SCC.
(k) “Related Services” means the services incidental to the
supply of the goods, such as insurance, installation,
training and initial maintenance and other such
obligations of the Supplier under the Contract.
(l) “SCC” means the Special Conditions of Contract.
(m) “Subcontractor” means any person, private or

government entity, or a combination of the above, to
whom any part of the Goods to be supplied or execution
of any part of the Related Services is subcontracted by
the Supplier.
(n) “Supplier” means the person, private or government entity,

or a combination of the above, whose bid to perform the
Contract has been accepted by the Purchaser and is named
as such in the Contract Agreement.
(o) “The Project Site,” where applicable, means the place

named in the SCC.
2. Contract 2.1 Subject to the order of precedence set forth in the Contract
Documents Agreement, all documents forming the Contract (and all parts
thereof) are intended to be correlative, complementary, and
mutually explanatory. The Contract Agreement shall be read as
a whole.
3. Corrupt and 3.1 The Bank requires compliance with its policy in regard to
Fraudulent corrupt and fraudulent practices as set forth in Appendix to the
Practices GCC.
3.2 The Purchaser requires the Supplier to disclose any
commissions or fees that may have been paid or are to be paid
to agents or any other party with respect to the bidding process
or execution of the Contract. The information disclosed must
include at least the name and address of the agent or other
party, the amount and currency, and the purpose of the
commission, gratuity or fee.
4. Interpretation 4.1 If the context so requires it, singular means plural and vice versa.
4.2 Incoterms
(a) Unless inconsistent with any provision of the Contract,

the meaning of any trade term and the rights and
obligations of parties thereunder shall be as prescribed by
Incoterms.
(b) The terms EXW, CIP, FCA, CFR and other similar terms,
when used, shall be governed by the rules prescribed in
the current edition of Incoterms specified in the SCC and
published by the International Chamber of Commerce in
Paris, France.
4.3 Entire Agreement
The Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the

Purchaser and the Supplier and supersedes all communications,
negotiations and agreements (whether written or oral) of the
parties with respect thereto made prior to the date of Contract.
4.4 Amendment
No amendment or other variation of the Contract shall be valid

unless it is in writing, is dated, expressly refers to the Contract,
and is signed by a duly authorized representative of each party
thereto.
4.5 Nonwaiver
(a) Subject to GCC Sub-Clause 4.5(b) below, no relaxation,
forbearance, delay, or indulgence by either party in
enforcing any of the terms and conditions of the Contract
or the granting of time by either party to the other shall
prejudice, affect, or restrict the rights of that party under
the Contract, neither shall any waiver by either party of
any breach of Contract operate as waiver of any
subsequent or continuing breach of Contract.
(b) Any waiver of a party’s rights, powers, or remedies under
the Contract must be in writing, dated, and signed by an
authorized representative of the party granting such
waiver, and must specify the right and the extent to which
it is being waived.
4.6 Severability
If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or
rendered invalid or unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity
or unenforceability shall not affect the validity or enforceability
of any other provisions and conditions of the Contract.
5. Language 5.1 The Contract as well as all correspondence and documents
relating to the Contract exchanged by the Supplier and the
Purchaser, shall be written in the language specified in the
SCC. Supporting documents and printed literature that are
part of the Contract may be in another language provided they
are accompanied by an accurate translation of the relevant
passages in the language specified, in which case, for purposes
of interpretation of the Contract, this translation shall govern.
5.2 The Supplier shall bear all costs of translation to the governing
language and all risks of the accuracy of such translation, for
documents provided by the Supplier.

6. Joint Venture, 6.1 If the Supplier is a joint venture, consortium, or association, all of
Consortium or the parties shall be jointly and severally liable to the Purchaser for
Association the fulfillment of the provisions of the Contract and shall
designate one party to act as a leader with authority to bind the
joint venture, consortium, or association. The composition or the
constitution of the joint venture, consortium, or association shall
not be altered without the prior consent of the Purchaser.
7. Eligibility 7.1 The Supplier and its Subcontractors shall have the nationality of
an eligible country. A Supplier or Subcontractor shall be
deemed to have the nationality of a country if it is a citizen or
constituted, incorporated, or registered, and operates in
conformity with the provisions of the laws of that country.
7.2 All Goods and Related Services to be supplied under the
Contract and financed by the Bank shall have their origin in
Eligible Countries. For the purpose of this Clause, origin means
the country where the goods have been grown, mined,
cultivated, produced, manufactured, or processed; or through
manufacture, processing, or assembly, another commercially
recognized article results that differs substantially in its basic
characteristics from its components.
8. Notices 8.1 Any notice given by one party to the other pursuant to the
Contract shall be in writing to the address specified in the
SCC. The term “in writing” means communicated in written
form with proof of receipt.
8.2 A notice shall be effective when delivered or on the notice’s
effective date, whichever is later.
9. Governing Law 9.1 The Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in

accordance with the laws of the Purchaser’s Country, unless
otherwise specified in the SCC.
9.2 Throughout the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall
comply with the import of goods and services prohibitions in the
Purchaser’s country when
(a) as a matter of law or official regulations, the Borrower’s

country prohibits commercial relations with that country; or
9.2 (b) by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations

Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the
United Nations, the Borrower’s Country prohibits any import of
goods from that country or any payments to any country, person,
or entity in that country.

10 Settlement of 10.1 The Purchaser and the Supplier shall make every effort to
Disputes resolve amicably by direct informal negotiation any
disagreement or dispute arising between them under or in
connection with the Contract.
10.2 If, after twenty-eight (28) days, the parties have failed to
resolve their dispute or difference by such mutual consultation,
then either the Purchaser or the Supplier may give notice to the
other party of its intention to commence arbitration, as
hereinafter provided, as to the matter in dispute, and no
arbitration in respect of this matter may be commenced unless
such notice is given. Any dispute or difference in respect of
which a notice of intention to commence arbitration has been
given in accordance with this Clause shall be finally settled by
arbitration. Arbitration may be commenced prior to or after
delivery of the Goods under the Contract. Arbitration
proceedings shall be conducted in accordance with the rules of
procedure specified in the SCC.
10.3 Notwithstanding any reference to arbitration herein,
(a) the parties shall continue to perform their respective

obligations under the Contract unless they otherwise agree;
and
(b) the Purchaser shall pay the Supplier any monies due the
Supplier.
11. Inspections and 11.1 The Supplier shall keep, and shall make all reasonable efforts to
Audit by the cause its Subcontractors to keep, accurate and systematic
Bank accounts and records in respect of the Goods in such form and
details as will clearly identify relevant time changes and costs.
11.2 The Supplier shall permit, and shall cause its Subcontractors to
permit, the Bank and/or persons appointed by the Bank to inspect
the Supplier’s offices and all accounts and records relating to the
performance of the Contract and the submission of the bid, and to
have such accounts and records audited by auditors appointed by
the Bank if requested by the Bank. The Supplier’s and its
Subcontractors and consultants’ attention is drawn to Clause 3
[Fraud and Corruption], which provides, inter alia, that acts
intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s
inspection and audit rights provided for under this Sub-Clause
11.1 constitute a prohibited practice subject to contract
termination (as well as to a determination of ineligibility pursuant
to the Bank’s prevailing sanctions procedures)
12. Scope of Supply 12.1 The Goods and Related Services to be supplied shall be as
specified in the Schedule of Requirements.
13. Delivery and 13.1 Subject to GCC Sub-Clause 33.1, the Delivery of the Goods and
Documents Completion of the Related Services shall be in accordance with
the Delivery and Completion Schedule specified in the Schedule
of Requirements. The details of shipping and other documents to
be furnished by the Supplier are specified in the SCC. The
Contract effectiveness date shall be the Date of Contract
Signature and the services shall be completed within 12 calendar
months in accordance with the Delivery and Completion
Schedule specified in the Schedule of Requirements.
14. Supplier’s 14.1 The Supplier shall supply all the Goods and Related Services
Responsibilities included in the Scope of Supply in accordance with GCC
Clause 12, and the Delivery and Completion Schedule, as per
GCC Clause 13.
15 Contract Price 15.1 Prices charged by the Supplier for the Goods supplied and the
Related Services performed under the Contract shall not vary
from the prices quoted by the Supplier in its bid, with the
exception of any price adjustments authorized in the SCC.
16. Terms of 16.1 The Contract Price, including any Advance Payments, if
Payment applicable, shall be paid as specified in the SCC.
16.2 The Supplier’s request for payment shall be made to the
Purchaser in writing, accompanied by invoices describing, as
appropriate, the Goods delivered and Related Services
performed, and by the documents submitted pursuant to GCC
Clause 13 and upon fulfillment of all other obligations
stipulated in the Contract.
16.3 Payments shall be made promptly by the Purchaser, but in no
case later than sixty (60) days after submission of an invoice or
request for payment by the Supplier, and after the Purchaser
has accepted it.
16.4 The currencies in which payments shall be made to the
Supplier under this Contract shall be those in which the bid
price is expressed.
16.5 In the event that the Purchaser fails to pay the Supplier any
payment by its due date or within the period set forth in the
SCC, the Purchaser shall pay to the Supplier interest on the
amount of such delayed payment at the rate shown in the SCC,
for the period of delay until payment has been made in full,
whether before or after judgment or arbitrage award.

17. Taxes and 17.1 For goods manufactured outside the Purchaser’s Country, the
Duties Supplier shall be entirely responsible for all taxes, stamp
duties, license fees, and other such levies imposed outside the
Purchaser’s Country.
17.2 For goods Manufactured within the Purchaser’s country, the

Supplier shall be entirely responsible for all taxes, duties,
license fees, etc., incurred until delivery of the contracted
Goods to the Purchaser.
17.3 If any tax exemptions, reductions, allowances or privileges may

be available to the Supplier in the Purchaser’s Country, the
Purchaser shall use its best efforts to enable the Supplier to
benefit from any such tax savings to the maximum allowable
extent.
18. Performance 18.1 If required as specified in the SCC, the Supplier shall, within
Security twenty-eight (28) days of the notification of contract award,
provide a performance security for the performance of the
Contract in the amount specified in the SCC.
18.2 The proceeds of the Performance Security shall be payable to

the Purchaser as compensation for any loss resulting from the
Supplier’s failure to complete its obligations under the
Contract.
18.3 As specified in the SCC, the Performance Security, if required,

shall be denominated in the currency(ies) of the Contract, or in
a freely convertible currency acceptable to the Purchaser; and
shall be in one of the format stipulated by the Purchaser in the
SCC, or in another format acceptable to the Purchaser.
18.4 The Performance Security shall be discharged by the Purchaser

and returned to the Supplier not later than twenty-eight (28)
days following the date of Completion of the Supplier’s
performance obligations under the Contract, including any
warranty obligations, unless specified otherwise in the SCC.
19. Copyright 19.1 The copyright in all drawings, documents, and other materials
containing data and information furnished to the Purchaser by
the Supplier herein shall remain vested in the Supplier, or, if
they are furnished to the Purchaser directly or through the
Supplier by any third party, including suppliers of materials,
the copyright in such materials shall remain vested in such
third party
20. Confidential 20.1 The Purchaser and the Supplier shall keep confidential and
Information shall not, without the written consent of the other party hereto,
divulge to any third party any documents, data, or other
information furnished directly or indirectly by the other party
hereto in connection with the Contract, whether such
information has been furnished prior to, during or following
completion or termination of the Contract. Notwithstanding
the above, the Supplier may furnish to its Subcontractor such
documents, data, and other information it receives from the
Purchaser to the extent required for the Subcontractor to
perform its work under the Contract, in which event the
Supplier shall obtain from such Subcontractor an undertaking
of confidentiality similar to that imposed on the Supplier under
GCC Clause 20.
20.2 The Purchaser shall not use such documents, data, and other
information received from the Supplier for any purposes
unrelated to the contract. Similarly, the Supplier shall not use
such documents, data, and other information received from the
Purchaser for any purpose other than the performance of the
Contract.
20.3 The obligation of a party under GCC Sub-Clauses 20.1 and
20.2 above, however, shall not apply to information that:
(a) the Purchaser or Supplier need to share with the Bank or
other institutions participating in the financing of the
Contract;
(b) now or hereafter enters the public domain through no
fault of that party;
(c) can be proven to have been possessed by that party at the
time of disclosure and which was not previously
obtained, directly or indirectly, from the other party; or
(d) otherwise lawfully becomes available to that party from a
third party that has no obligation of confidentiality.
20.4 The above provisions of GCC Clause 20 shall not in any way
modify any undertaking of confidentiality given by either of
the parties hereto prior to the date of the Contract in respect of
the Supply or any part thereof.
20.5 The provisions of GCC Clause 20 shall survive completion or
termination, for whatever reason, of the Contract.
21. Subcontracting 21.1 The Supplier shall notify the Purchaser in writing of all
subcontracts awarded under the Contract if not already
specified in the bid. Such notification, in the original bid or
later shall not relieve the Supplier from any of its obligations,
duties, responsibilities, or liability under the Contract.
21.2 Subcontracts shall comply with the provisions of GCC Clauses
3 and 7.
22. Specifications 22.1 Technical Specifications and Drawings
and Standards
(a) The Goods and Related Services supplied under this
Contract shall conform to the technical specifications and
standards mentioned in Section VI, Schedule of
Requirements and, when no applicable standard is
mentioned, the standard shall be equivalent or superior to
the official standards whose application is appropriate to
the Goods’ country of origin.
(b) The Supplier shall be entitled to disclaim responsibility

for any design, data, drawing, specification or other
document, or any modification thereof provided or
designed by or on behalf of the Purchaser, by giving a
notice of such disclaimer to the Purchaser.
(c) Wherever references are made in the Contract to codes

and standards in accordance with which it shall be
executed, the edition or the revised version of such codes
and standards shall be those specified in the Schedule of
Requirements. During Contract execution, any changes in
any such codes and standards shall be applied only after
approval by the Purchaser and shall be treated in
accordance with GCC Clause 33.
23. Packing and 23.1 The Supplier shall provide such packing of the Goods as is
Documents required to prevent their damage or deterioration during transit
to their final destination, as indicated in the Contract. During
transit, the packing shall be sufficient to withstand, without
limitation, rough handling and exposure to extreme
temperatures, salt and precipitation, and open storage. Packing
case size and weights shall take into consideration, where
appropriate, the remoteness of the goods’ final destination and
the absence of heavy handling facilities at all points in transit.
23.2 The packing, marking, and documentation within and outside

the packages shall comply strictly with such special
requirements as shall be expressly provided for in the Contract,
including additional requirements, if any, specified in the SCC,
and in any other instructions ordered by the Purchaser.
24. Insurance 24.1 Unless otherwise specified in the SCC, the Goods supplied
under the Contract shall be fully insured—in a freely
convertible currency from an eligible country—against loss or
damage incidental to manufacture or acquisition,
transportation, storage, and delivery, in accordance with the
applicable Incoterms or in the manner specified in the SCC.
25. Transportation 25.1 Unless otherwise specified in the SCC, responsibility for
and Incidental arranging transportation of the Goods shall be in accordance
Services with the specified Incoterms.
25.2 The Supplier may be required to provide any or all of the
following services, including additional services, if any,
specified in SCC:
(a) performance or supervision of on-site assembly and/or
start-up of the supplied Goods;
(b) furnishing of tools required for assembly and/or
maintenance of the supplied Goods;
(c) furnishing of a detailed operations and maintenance
manual for each appropriate unit of the supplied Goods;
(d) performance or supervision or maintenance and/or repair
of the supplied Goods, for a period of time agreed by the
parties, provided that this service shall not relieve the
Supplier of any warranty obligations under this Contract;
and
(e) training of the Purchaser’s personnel, at the Supplier’s
plant and/or on-site, in assembly, start-up, operation,
maintenance, and/or repair of the supplied Goods.
25.3 Prices charged by the Supplier for incidental services, if not
included in the Contract Price for the Goods, shall be agreed upon
in advance by the parties and shall not exceed the prevailing rates
charged to other parties by the Supplier for similar services
26. Inspections and 26.1 The Supplier shall at its own expense and at no cost to the
Tests Purchaser carry out all such tests and/or inspections of the
Goods and Related Services as are specified in the SCC.
26.2 The inspections and tests may be conducted on the premises of
the Supplier or its Subcontractor, at point of delivery, and/or at
the Goods’ final destination, or in another place in the
Purchaser’s Country as specified in the SCC. Subject to GCC
Sub-Clause 26.3, if conducted on the premises of the Supplier
or its Subcontractor, all reasonable facilities and assistance,
including access to drawings and production data, shall be
furnished to the inspectors at no charge to the Purchaser.

26.3 The Purchaser or its designated representative shall be entitled
to attend the tests and/or inspections referred to in GCC Sub-
Clause 26.2, provided that the Purchaser bear all of its own
costs and expenses incurred in connection with such
attendance including, but not limited to, all traveling and board
and lodging expenses.
26.4 Whenever the Supplier is ready to carry out any such test and
inspection, it shall give a reasonable advance notice, including
the place and time, to the Purchaser. The Supplier shall obtain
from any relevant third party or manufacturer any necessary
permission or consent to enable the Purchaser or its designated
representative to attend the test and/or inspection.
26.5 The Purchaser may require the Supplier to carry out any test
and/or inspection not required by the Contract but deemed
necessary to verify that the characteristics and performance of
the Goods comply with the technical specifications codes and
standards under the Contract, provided that the Supplier’s
reasonable costs and expenses incurred in the carrying out of
such test and/or inspection shall be added to the Contract Price.
Further, if such test and/or inspection impedes the progress of
manufacturing and/or the Supplier’s performance of its other
obligations under the Contract, due allowance will be made in
respect of the Delivery Dates and Completion Dates and the
other obligations so affected.
26.6 The Supplier shall provide the Purchaser with a report of the
results of any such test and/or inspection.
26.7 The Purchaser may reject any Goods or any part thereof that
fail to pass any test and/or inspection or do not conform to the
specifications. The Supplier shall either rectify or replace such
rejected Goods or parts thereof or make alterations necessary
to meet the specifications at no cost to the Purchaser, and shall
repeat the test and/or inspection, at no cost to the Purchaser,
upon giving a notice pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 26.4.
26.8 The Supplier agrees that neither the execution of a test and/or
inspection of the Goods or any part thereof, nor the attendance
by the Purchaser or its representative, nor the issue of any
report pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 26.6, shall release the
Supplier from any warranties or other obligations under the
Contract.
27. Liquidated 27.1 Except as provided under GCC Clause 32, if the Supplier fails
to deliver any or all of the Goods by the Date(s) of delivery or
Damages perform the Related Services within the period specified in the
Contract, the Purchaser may without prejudice to all its other
remedies under the Contract, deduct from the Contract Price,
as liquidated damages, a sum equivalent to the percentage
specified in the SCC of the delivered price of the delayed
Goods or unperformed Services for each week or part thereof
of delay until actual delivery or performance, up to a maximum
deduction of the percentage specified in those SCC. Once the
maximum is reached, the Purchaser may terminate the Contract
pursuant to GCC Clause 35.
28. Warranty 28.1 The Supplier warrants that all the Goods are new, unused, and
of the most recent or current models, and that they incorporate
all recent improvements in design and materials, unless
provided otherwise in the Contract.
28.2 Subject to GCC Sub-Clause 22.1(b), the Supplier further
warrants that the Goods shall be free from defects arising from
any act or omission of the Supplier or arising from design,
materials, and workmanship, under normal use in the
conditions prevailing in the country of final destination.
28.3 Unless otherwise specified in the SCC, the warranty shall

remain valid for twelve (12) months after the Goods, or any
portion thereof as the case may be, have been delivered to and
accepted at the final destination indicated in the SCC, or for
eighteen (18) months after the date of shipment from the port
or place of loading in the country of origin, whichever period
concludes earlier.
28.4 The Purchaser shall give notice to the Supplier stating the
nature of any such defects together with all available evidence
thereof, promptly following the discovery thereof. The
Purchaser shall afford all reasonable opportunity for the
Supplier to inspect such defects.
28.5 Upon receipt of such notice, the Supplier shall, within the
period specified in the SCC, expeditiously repair or replace the
defective Goods or parts thereof, at no cost to the Purchaser.
28.6 If having been notified, the Supplier fails to remedy the defect
within the period specified in the SCC, the Purchaser may
proceed to take within a reasonable period such remedial
action as may be necessary, at the Supplier’s risk and expense
and without prejudice to any other rights which the Purchaser
may have against the Supplier under the Contract.
29. Patent 29.1 The Supplier shall, subject to the Purchaser’s compliance with
Indemnity GCC Sub-Clause 29.2, indemnify and hold harmless the

Purchaser and its employees and officers from and against any
and all suits, actions or administrative proceedings, claims,
demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of any nature,
including attorney’s fees and expenses, which the Purchaser
may suffer as a result of any infringement or alleged
infringement of any patent, utility model, registered design,
trademark, copyright, or other intellectual property right
registered or otherwise existing at the date of the Contract by
reason of:
(a) the installation of the Goods by the Supplier or the use of
the Goods in the country where the Site is located; and
(b) the sale in any country of the products produced by the
Goods.
Such indemnity shall not cover any use of the Goods or any
part thereof other than for the purpose indicated by or to be
reasonably inferred from the Contract, neither any
infringement resulting from the use of the Goods or any part
thereof, or any products produced thereby in association or
combination with any other equipment, plant, or materials not
supplied by the Supplier, pursuant to the Contract.
29.2 If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the
Purchaser arising out of the matters referred to in GCC Sub-
Clause 29.1, the Purchaser shall promptly give the Supplier a
notice thereof, and the Supplier may at its own expense and in
the Purchaser’s name conduct such proceedings or claim and
any negotiations for the settlement of any such proceedings or
claim.
29.3 If the Supplier fails to notify the Purchaser within twenty-eight
(28) days after receipt of such notice that it intends to conduct
any such proceedings or claim, then the Purchaser shall be free
to conduct the same on its own behalf.
29.4 The Purchaser shall, at the Supplier’s request, afford all
available assistance to the Supplier in conducting such
proceedings or claim, and shall be reimbursed by the Supplier
for all reasonable expenses incurred in so doing.
29.5 The Purchaser shall indemnify and hold harmless the Supplier
and its employees, officers, and Subcontractors from and
against any and all suits, actions or administrative proceedings,
claims, demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of any
nature, including attorney’s fees and expenses, which the
Supplier may suffer as a result of any infringement or alleged

infringement of any patent, utility model, registered design,
trademark, copyright, or other intellectual property right
registered or otherwise existing at the date of the Contract
arising out of or in connection with any design, data, drawing,
specification, or other documents or materials provided or
designed by or on behalf of the Purchaser.
30 Limitation of 30.1 Except in cases of criminal negligence or willful misconduct,
Liability
(a) the Supplier shall not be liable to the Purchaser, whether
in contract, tort, or otherwise, for any indirect or
consequential loss or damage, loss of use, loss of
production, or loss of profits or interest costs, provided
that this exclusion shall not apply to any obligation of the
Supplier to pay liquidated damages to the Purchaser and
(b) the aggregate liability of the Supplier to the Purchaser,
whether under the Contract, in tort or otherwise, shall not
exceed the total Contract Price, provided that this
limitation shall not apply to the cost of repairing or
replacing defective equipment, or to any obligation of the
supplier to indemnify the purchaser with respect to patent
infringement
31. Change in Laws 31.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, if after the date of
and Regulations 28 days prior to date of Bid submission, any law, regulation,
ordinance, order or bylaw having the force of law is enacted,
promulgated, abrogated, or changed in the place of the
Purchaser’s country where the Site is located (which shall be
deemed to include any change in interpretation or application
by the competent authorities) that subsequently affects the
Delivery Date and/or the Contract Price, then such Delivery
Date and/or Contract Price shall be correspondingly increased
or decreased, to the extent that the Supplier has thereby been
affected in the performance of any of its obligations under the
Contract. Notwithstanding the foregoing, such additional or
reduced cost shall not be separately paid or credited if the same
has already been accounted for in the price adjustment
provisions where applicable, in accordance with GCC Clause
15.
32. Force Majeure 32.1 The Supplier shall not be liable for forfeiture of its
Performance Security, liquidated damages, or termination for
default if and to the extent that its delay in performance or
other failure to perform its obligations under the Contract is the
result of an event of Force Majeure.
32.2 For purposes of this Clause, “Force Majeure” means an event

or situation beyond the control of the Supplier that is not
foreseeable, is unavoidable, and its origin is not due to
negligence or lack of care on the part of the Supplier. Such
events may include, but not be limited to, acts of the Purchaser
in its sovereign capacity, wars or revolutions, fires, floods,
epidemics, quarantine restrictions, and freight embargoes.
32.3 If a Force Majeure situation arises, the Supplier shall promptly
notify the Purchaser in writing of such condition and the cause
thereof. Unless otherwise directed by the Purchaser in writing,
the Supplier shall continue to perform its obligations under the
Contract as far as is reasonably practical, and shall seek all
reasonable alternative means for performance not prevented by
the Force Majeure event.
33. Change Orders 33.1 The Purchaser may at any time order the Supplier through
and Contract notice in accordance GCC Clause 8, to make changes within
Amendments the general scope of the Contract in any one or more of the
following:
(a) drawings, designs, or specifications, where Goods to be
furnished under the Contract are to be specifically
manufactured for the Purchaser;
(b) the method of shipment or packing;
(c) the place of delivery; and
(d) the Related Services to be provided by the Supplier.
33.2 If any such change causes an increase or decrease in the cost

of, or the time required for, the Supplier’s performance of any
provisions under the Contract, an equitable adjustment shall be
made in the Contract Price or in the Delivery/Completion
Schedule, or both, and the Contract shall accordingly be
amended. Any claims by the Supplier for adjustment under
this Clause must be asserted within twenty-eight (28) days
from the date of the Supplier’s receipt of the Purchaser’s
change order.
33.3 Prices to be charged by the Supplier for any Related Services

that might be needed but which were not included in the
Contract shall be agreed upon in advance by the parties and
shall not exceed the prevailing rates charged to other parties by
the Supplier for similar services.
33.4 Subject to the above, no variation in or modification of the

terms of the Contract shall be made except by written
amendment signed by the parties.
34. Extensions of 34.1 If at any time during performance of the Contract, the Supplier
Time or its subcontractors should encounter conditions impeding
timely delivery of the Goods or completion of Related Services
pursuant to GCC Clause 13, the Supplier shall promptly notify
the Purchaser in writing of the delay, its likely duration, and its
cause. As soon as practicable after receipt of the Supplier’s
notice, the Purchaser shall evaluate the situation and may at its
discretion extend the Supplier’s time for performance, in which
case the extension shall be ratified by the parties by
amendment of the Contract.
34.2 Except in case of Force Majeure, as provided under GCC

Clause 32, a delay by the Supplier in the performance of its
Delivery and Completion obligations shall render the Supplier
liable to the imposition of liquidated damages pursuant to GCC
Clause 26, unless an extension of time is agreed upon, pursuant
to GCC Sub-Clause 34.1.
35. Termination 35.1 Termination for Default

(a) The Purchaser, without prejudice to any other remedy for
breach of Contract, by written notice of default sent to
the Supplier, may terminate the Contract in whole or in
part:
(i) if the Supplier fails to deliver any or all of the
Goods within the period specified in the Contract,
or within any extension thereof granted by the
Purchaser pursuant to GCC Clause 34;
(ii) if the Supplier fails to perform any other obligation
under the Contract; or
(iii) if the Supplier, in the judgment of the Purchaser has
engaged in fraud and corruption, as defined in GCC
Clause 3, in competing for or in executing the
Contract.
(b) In the event the Purchaser terminates the Contract in
whole or in part, pursuant to GCC Clause 35.1(a), the
Purchaser may procure, upon such terms and in such
manner as it deems appropriate, Goods or Related
Services similar to those undelivered or not performed,
and the Supplier shall be liable to the Purchaser for any
additional costs for such similar Goods or Related
Services. However, the Supplier shall continue
performance of the Contract to the extent not terminated.

35.2 Termination for Insolvency.
(a) The Purchaser may at any time terminate the Contract by
giving notice to the Supplier if the Supplier becomes
bankrupt or otherwise insolvent. In such event,
termination will be without compensation to the Supplier,
provided that such termination will not prejudice or affect
any right of action or remedy that has accrued or will
accrue thereafter to the Purchaser
35.3 Termination for Convenience.
(a) The Purchaser, by notice sent to the Supplier, may
terminate the Contract, in whole or in part, at any time
for its convenience. The notice of termination shall
specify that termination is for the Purchaser’s
convenience, the extent to which performance of the
Supplier under the Contract is terminated, and the date
upon which such termination becomes effective.
(b) The Goods that are complete and ready for shipment
within twenty-eight (28) days after the Supplier’s receipt
of notice of termination shall be accepted by the
Purchaser at the Contract terms and prices. For the
remaining Goods, the Purchaser may elect:
(i) to have any portion completed and delivered at the
Contract terms and prices; and/or
(ii) to cancel the remainder and pay to the Supplier an
agreed amount for partially completed Goods and
Related Services and for materials and parts
previously procured by the Supplier.
36. Assignment 36.1 Neither the Purchaser nor the Supplier shall assign, in whole or
in part, their obligations under this Contract, except with prior
written consent of the other party.
37. Export 37.1 Notwithstanding any obligation under the Contract to complete
Restriction all export formalities, any export restrictions attributable to the
Purchaser, to the country of the Purchaser, or to the use of the
products/goods, systems or services to be supplied, which arise
from trade regulations from a country supplying those
products/goods, systems or services, and which substantially
impede the Supplier from meeting its obligations under the
Contract, shall release the Supplier from the obligation to
provide deliveries or services, always provided, however, that
the Supplier can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the

Purchaser and of the Bank that it has completed all formalities
in a timely manner, including applying for permits,
authorizations and licenses necessary for the export of the
products/goods, systems or services under the terms of the
Contract. Termination of the Contract on this basis shall be for
the Purchaser’s convenience pursuant to Sub-Clause 35.3.
241
APPENDIX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS

Bank’s Policy- Corrupt and Fraudulent Practices
Guidelines for Procurement of Goods, Works, and Non-Consulting Services under
IBRD Loans and IDA Credits & Grants by World Bank Borrowers, dated January
2011:
“Fraud and Corruption:
1.16 It is the Bank’s policy to require that Borrowers (including beneficiaries of Bank
loans), bidders, suppliers, contractors and their agents (whether declared or not), sub-
contractors, sub-consultants, service providers or suppliers, and any personnel thereof,
observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of Bank-
financed contracts.9 In pursuance of this policy, the Bank:
(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:
(i) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting, directly
or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of
another party;10;
(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation,
that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to
obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation;11
(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or more parties
designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence
improperly the actions of another party;12
(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair or
harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to
influence improperly the actions of a party;13
9
In this context, any action to influence the procurement process or contract execution for undue advantage
is improper.
10
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the
procurement process or contract execution. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and
employees of other organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions.
11
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and
“obligation” relate to the procurement process or contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended
to influence the procurement process or contract execution.
12
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including
public officials) attempting either themselves, or through another person or entity not participating in the
procurement or selection process, to simulate competition or to establish bid prices at artificial, non-
competitive levels, or are privy to each other’s bid prices or other conditions.
3-242 Section VIII – General Conditions of Contract
(v) "obstructive practice" is:

(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering, or concealing of
evidence material to the investigation or making false statements to
investigators in order to materially impede a Bank investigation
into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive
practice; and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party to
prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to the
investigation or from pursuing the investigation, or
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s
inspection and audit rights provided for under paragraph 1.16(e)
below.
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the bidder recommended for
award, or any of its personnel, or its agents, or its sub-consultants, sub-
contractors, service providers, suppliers and/or their employees, has, directly or
indirectly, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive
practices in competing for the contract in question;
(c) will declare misprocurement and cancel the portion of the loan allocated to a
contract if it determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or of a
recipient of any part of the proceeds of the loan engaged in corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices during the procurement or the
implementation of the contract in question, without the Borrower having taken
timely and appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to address such practices
when they occur, including by failing to inform the Bank in a timely manner at
the time they knew of the practices;
(d) will sanction a firm or individual, at any time, in accordance with the prevailing
Bank’s sanctions procedures,14 including by publicly declaring such firm or
individual ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time: (i) to be
awarded a Bank-financed contract; and (ii) to be a nominated15;
13
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract
execution.
14
A firm or individual may be declared ineligible to be awarded a Bank financed contract upon: (i)
completion of the Bank’s sanctions proceedings as per its sanctions procedures, including, inter alia, cross-
debarment as agreed with other International Financial Institutions, including Multilateral Development
Banks, and through the application the World Bank Group corporate administrative procurement sanctions
procedures for fraud and corruption; and (ii) as a result of temporary suspension or early temporary
suspension in connection with an ongoing sanctions proceeding. See footnote 14 and paragraph 8 of
Appendix 1 of these Guidelines.
15
A nominated sub-contractor, consultant, manufacturer or supplier, or service provider (different names are
used depending on the particular bidding document) is one which has either been: (i) included by the bidder
in its pre-qualification application or bid because it brings specific and critical experience and know-how
that allow the bidder to meet the qualification requirements for the particular bid; or (ii) appointed by the
Borrower.
Section VIII – General Conditions of Contract 3-243
(e) will require that a clause be included in bidding documents and in contracts
financed by a Bank loan, requiring bidders, suppliers and contractors, and their
sub-contractors, agents, personnel, consultants, service providers, or suppliers, to
permit the Bank to inspect all accounts, records, and other documents relating to
the submission of bids and contract performance, and to have them audited by
auditors appointed by the Bank.”
.
245
Section IX. Special Conditions of Contract

The following Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) shall supplement and / or amend the
General Conditions of Contract (GCC). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein
shall prevail over those in the GCC.
GCC 1.1(i) The Purchaser’s country is: Uganda
GCC 1.1(j) The Purchaser is: Uganda Electricity Transmission Company

(UETCL)
GCC 1.1 (o) The Project Site(s)/Final Destination(s) is/are: Kampala & Gulu as
indicated in Section VII of this Bidding Document.
GCC 4.2 (b) The version edition of Incoterms shall be: Incoterms 2010.
GCC 5.1 The language shall be: English
GCC 8.1 For notices, the Purchaser’s address shall be:

Attention: Managing Director/CEO
Uganda Electricity Transmission Co. Ltd
Street Address: Plot 10 Hannington Road – Opposite Serena Hotel
Floor/Room number: 5th Floor
Town/City: Kampala
Postal Code/PO Box: 7625
Country: Uganda
Telephone: +256 414 233433/4
Facsimile number: +256 414 341789
Electronic mail address: Transco@uetcl.com
For notices, the Provider’s address shall be: (To be inserted)

Attention:
Street Address:
Floor/Room number
GCC 9.1 The governing law shall be the law of: Uganda
GCC 10.2 The rules of procedure for arbitration proceedings pursuant to GCC
Clause 10.2 shall be as follows:
Contracts with foreign suppliers
246 Invitation for Bids
GCC 10.2 (a)—Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or

relating to this Contract, or breach, termination or invalidity thereof, shall
be settled by arbitration in accordance with the UNCITRAL Arbitration
Rules as at present in force.
(b) Contracts with Supplier national of the Purchaser’s country:

In the case of a dispute between the Purchaser and a Supplier who is a
national of the Purchaser’s country, the dispute shall be referred to
adjudication or arbitration in accordance with the Laws of Uganda.
GCC 12 In addition to the supply of Mandatory Spare Parts included in the

Contract, the Supplier agrees to supply spare parts required for the
operation and maintenance of the Facilities for a period of at least ten (10)
years. However, the identity, specifications and quantities of such spare
parts and the terms and conditions relating to the supply thereof are to be
agreed between the Purchaser and the Supplier at the time of order.
The Supplier shall carry sufficient inventories to ensure an ex-stock
supply of consumable spares for the Plant. Other spare parts and
components shall be supplied as promptly as possible, but at the most
within six (6) months of placing the order. In addition, in the event of
termination of the production of spare parts, advance notification will be
made to the Purchaser of the pending termination, with sufficient time to
permit the Purchaser to procure the needed requirement. Following such
termination, the Supplier will furnish to the extent possible and at no cost
to the Purchaser the blueprints, drawings and specifications of the spare
parts, if requested.
GCC 13.1 Details of Shipping and other Documents to be furnished by the Supplier
are:
a) Bill of lading
b) Insurance certificate
c) Suppliers warranty certificate as per the terms of reference
and technical specifications
d) Air way bill
e) Pre-Shipment Inspection Certificate
f) Certificate of Origin
The above documents shall be received by the Purchaser before arrival of
the Goods and, if not received, the Supplier will be responsible for any
consequent expenses.
GCC 15.1 The prices charged for the Goods supplied and the related Services
performed shall not be adjustable.
GCC 16.1 Payment for Goods supplied from abroad:
Payment of foreign currency portion shall be made in currency of the

Contract price in the following manner:
(i) Advance Payment: Ten (10) percent of contract price

against receipt of invoice and an irrevocable advance
payment bank guarantee for the equivalent amount made
out in favor of the Purchaser
(ii) Upon Shipment: Seventy (70) percent of the

contract price on shipment of complete goods. This shall be
evidenced by submission of the documentation specified
below:
a) Letter of notification to the Purchaser and the

Insurance Company giving full details of the
shipment
b) Original and 3 copies of a negotiable, clean, on-
board bill of lading marked “freight pre-paid” and
3 copies of non-negotiable bill of lading
c) Copies of the packing lists identifying contents of
each package
d) Insurance certificate
e) Manufacturer’s Warranty Certificate
f) The Supplier’s factory inspection report and
g) Certificate of origin
(iii) On Acceptance: Twenty (20) percent of the Contract

Price of Goods received shall be paid upon acceptance by
the Purchaser.
Payment for Goods and Services supplied from within the

Purchaser’s country:
(i) Advance Payment: Ten (10) percent of contract price

against receipt of invoice and an irrevocable advance
payment bank guarantee for the equivalent amount made
out in favor of the Purchaser
(ii) Upon Shipment: Seventy (70) percent of the contract

price on delivery of complete goods to site. This shall be
evidenced by certification by the Purchaser.
(iii) On Acceptance: Twenty (20) percent of the Contract

Price shall be paid upon receipt & acceptance of the
complete goods by the Purchaser.
GCC 16.5 The payment delay period after which the Purchaser shall pay interest to
the supplier shall be 90 days
The interest rate that shall be applied is 1%
GCC 18.1 A Performance Security shall be required.

The amount of the Performance Security shall be 10% of the Contract
price.
GCC 18.3 The Performance Security shall be in the form of a Bank Guarantee and
shall be denominated in the currencies of payment of the Contract, in
accordance with their portions of the Contract Price.
GCC 18.4 Discharge of the Performance Security shall be not later than twenty-eight
(28) days following the date of Completion of the Supplier’s performance
obligations under the Contract, which includes the warranty period of 24
months following acceptance of the goods.
GCC 23.2 The packing, marking and documentation within and outside the packages
shall be fit for purpose; 1. Project Name, 2. Contract Number, 3.
Country of Origin of goods, 4. Supplier’s Name and 5. Packaging List
Reference Number.
GCC 24.1 The insurance coverage shall be as specified in the Incoterms.
GCC 25.1 Responsibility for transportation of the Goods shall be as follows:

The Supplier is required under the Contract to transport the Goods
to a specified place of final destination within the Purchaser’s
country, defined as the Project Site, transport to such place of
destination in the Purchaser’s country, including insurance and
storage, as shall be specified in the Contract, shall be arranged by the
Supplier, and related costs shall be included in the Contract Price.
GCC 25.2 Incidental services to be provided are as stated in the GCC and the price
quoted in the bid price or agreed with the selected Supplier shall be
included in the Contract Price.
GCC 26.1 The inspections and tests shall be as stated under Section VII (Schedule of
Requirements, Inspections and Tests.)
GCC 26.2 The Inspections and tests shall be conducted at: Gulu but for Factory
Acceptance Tests shall be done at Manufacturers premises.
GCC 27.1 The liquidated damage shall be: 0.05% per week.
GCC 27.1 The maximum amount of liquidated damages shall be: 10% of contract
price.
GCC 28.3 The period of validity of the Warranty shall be: Twenty-four (24) Months.
For purposes of the Warranty, the place(s) of final destination(s) shall be:
Gulu Substation
GCC 28.5 The period for repair or replacement shall be: 2 months from date of
notification by Purchaser.
Section X. Contract Forms
This Section contains forms which, once completed, will form part of the Contract. The
forms for Performance Security and Advance Payment Security, when required, shall only be
completed by the successful Bidder after contract award.
Table of Forms
Letter of Acceptance ............................................................................................................. 251
1. Contract Agreement .......................................................................................................... 252
2. Performance Security ........................................................................................................ 254
3. Advance Payment Security ............................................................................................... 256

Letter of Acceptance
[letterhead paper of the Purchaser]
[date]
To: [name and address of the Supplier]
Subject: Notification of Award Contract No. . . . . . . . . . .
This is to notify you that your Bid dated . . . . [insert date] . . . . for execution of the . . .
. . . . . . .[insert name of the contract and identification number, as given in the SCC] .
. . . . . . . . . for the Accepted Contract Amount of . . . . . . . . .[insert amount in numbers
and words and name of currency], as corrected and modified in accordance with the
Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted by our Agency.
You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 28 days in accordance
with the Conditions of Contract, using for that purpose the of the Performance Security
Form included in Section X, Contract Forms, of the Bidding Document.
Authorized Signature:
Name and Title of Signatory:
Name of Agency:
Attachment: Contract Agreement

Contract Agreement
[The successful Bidder shall fill in this form in accordance with the instructions indicated]
THIS AGREEMENT made

the [ insert: number ] day of [ insert: month ], [ insert: year ].
BETWEEN
(1) [ insert complete name of Purchaser ], a [ insert description of type of legal
entity, for example, an agency of the Ministry of .... of the Government of
{ insert name of Country of Purchaser }, or corporation incorporated under
the laws of { insert name of Country of Purchaser } ] and having its principal
place of business at [ insert address of Purchaser ] (hereinafter called “the
Purchaser”), of the one part, and
(2) [ insert name of Supplier ], a corporation incorporated under the laws of
[ insert: country of Supplier ] and having its principal place of business at
[ insert: address of Supplier ] (hereinafter called “the Supplier”), of the other
part :
WHEREAS the Purchaser invited bids for certain Goods and ancillary services, viz., [insert
brief description of Goods and Services] and has accepted a Bid by the Supplier for the
supply of those Goods and Services
The Purchaser and the Supplier agree as follows:
1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the Contract documents referred to.
2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of
this Agreement. This Agreement shall prevail over all other contract documents.
(a) the Letter of Acceptance

(b) the Letter of Bid
(c) the Addenda Nos._____ (if any)
(d) Special Conditions of Contract
(e) General Conditions of Contract
(f) the Specification (including Schedule of Requirements and Technical
Specifications)
(g) the completed Schedules (including Price Schedules)

(h) any other document listed in GCC as forming part of the Contract
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Purchaser to the Supplier as

specified in this Agreement, the Supplier hereby covenants with the Purchaser to
provide the Goods and Services and to remedy defects therein in conformity in all
respects with the provisions of the Contract.
4. The Purchaser hereby covenants to pay the Supplier in consideration of the provision of
the Goods and Services and the remedying of defects therein, the Contract Price or such
other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and
in the manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed in
accordance with the laws of [insert the name of the Contract governing law country] on the
day, month and year indicated above.
For and on behalf of the Purchaser
Signed: [insert signature]

in the capacity of [ insert title or other appropriate designation ]
in the presence of [insert identification of official witness]
For and on behalf of the Supplier
Signed: [insert signature of authorized representative(s) of the Supplier]

in the capacity of [ insert title or other appropriate designation ]
in the presence of [ insert identification of official witness]
Performance Security
Bank Guarantee
[The bank, as requested by the successful Bidder, shall fill in this form in accordance with
the instructions indicated]
Beneficiary: [insert name and Address of Purchaser ]
Date: _ [Insert date of issue]
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
We have been informed that _ [insert name of Supplier, which in the case of a joint venture shall be the
name of the joint venture] (hereinafter called "the Applicant") has entered into Contract No. [insert
reference number of the contract] dated [insert date] with the Beneficiary, for the supply of _
[insert name of contract and brief description of Goods and related Services] (hereinafter called "the
Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a performance

guarantee is required.
At the request of the Applicant, we as Guarantor, hereby irrevocably undertake to pay the
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [insert amount in figures]
( ) [insert amount in words] ,1 such sum being payable in the types and proportions of
currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s
complying demand supported by the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself or
in a separate signed document accompanying or identifying the demand, stating that the
Applicant is in breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract, without the Beneficiary needing
to prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum specified therein.
This guarantee shall expire, no later than the …. Day of ……, 2… 2, and any demand for
payment under it must be received by us at this office indicated above on or before that date.
1
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the percentage of the Accepted Contract Amount
specified in the Letter of Acceptance, and denominated either in the currency(ies) of the Contract or a
freely convertible currency acceptable to the Beneficiary.
2
Insert the date twenty-eight days after the expected completion date as described in GC Clause 18.4. The
Purchaser should note that in the event of an extension of this date for completion of the Contract, the
Purchaser would need to request an extension of this guarantee from the Guarantor. Such request must be
in writing and must be made prior to the expiration date established in the guarantee. In preparing this
Revision, ICC Publication No. 758, except that the supporting statement under Article 15(a)
is hereby excluded.
_____________________
[signature(s)]
Note: All italicized text (including footnotes) is for use in preparing this form and shall be
deleted from the final product.
guarantee, the Purchaser might consider adding the following text to the form, at the end of the penultimate
paragraph: “The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed
[six months][one year], in response to the Beneficiary’s written request for such extension, such request to
be presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.”
Advance Payment Security
Beneficiary: [Insert name and Address of Purchaser]
Date: [Insert date of issue]
ADVANCE PAYMENT GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
We have been informed that [insert name of Supplier, which in the case of a joint venture
shall be the name of the joint venture] (hereinafter called “the Applicant”) has entered into
Contract No. [insert reference number of the contract] dated [insert date] with the
Beneficiary, for the execution of [insert name of contract and brief description of Goods and
related Services] (hereinafter called "the Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, an advance

payment in the sum [insert amount in figures] () [insert amount in words] is to be made
against an advance payment guarantee.
At the request of the Applicant, we as Guarantor, hereby irrevocably undertake to pay the
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [insert amount in figures]
( ) [insert amount in words] 1 upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s complying
demand supported by the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself or in a
separate signed document accompanying or identifying the demand, stating either that the
Applicant:
(a) has used the advance payment for purposes other than toward delivery of Goods;
or
(b) has failed to repay the advance payment in accordance with the Contract
conditions, specifying the amount which the Applicant has failed to repay.
1
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the amount of the advance payment and denominated
either in the currency(ies) of the advance payment as specified in the Contract, or in a freely convertible
currency acceptable to the Purchaser.
A demand under this guarantee may be presented as from the presentation to the Guarantor
of a certificate from the Beneficiary’s bank stating that the advance payment referred to
above has been credited to the Applicant on its account number [insert number] at [insert
name and address of Applicant’s bank].
The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount of the
advance payment repaid by the Applicant as specified in copies of interim statements or
payment certificates which shall be presented to us. This guarantee shall expire, at the latest,
upon our receipt of a copy of the interim payment certificate indicating that ninety (90)
percent of the Accepted Contract Amount, has been certified for payment, or on the [insert
day] day of [insert month], 2 [insert year], whichever is earlier. Consequently, any demand
for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this office on or before that date.
Revision, ICC Publication No.758, except that the supporting statement under Article 15(a)
is hereby excluded.
____________________
[signature(s)]

MS Bidding Document WB Final Ver 18-02-22

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MS Bidding Document WB Final Ver 18-02-22

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MS Bidding Document WB Final Ver 18-02-22

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

i

UGANDA ELECTRICITY TRANSMISSION COMPANY

GRID EXPANSION AND REINFORCEMENT

SUPPLY, DELIVERY, TESTING AND

ISSUED: AUGUST 2022

SPECIFIC PROCUREMENT NOTICE

Project: GRID EXPANSION AND REINFORCEMENT PROJECT (CREDIT NO:

PROCUREMENT REFERENCE NO: UETCL/SUPLS/2020-2021/00036/1

a) 25MVA multi-ratio mobile substations (Qty 2 complete units- 2x25MVA

b) Robust Plant Maintenance Laptop with software for Protection Relays,

c) Multifunctional diagnostic testing solution for Power Transformers and

3. Bidding will be conducted through the International Competitive Bidding procedures as

Bank Branch Account Number Currency

8. The addresses referred to above are:

Attn : Managing Director/CEO

Copy: Manager Procurement and Disposal Department,

9. The planned procurement schedule (subject to changes) is as follows:

UETCL IS NOT BOUND TO ACCEPT THE LOWEST BID OR ANY BID

PART 1 – Bidding Procedures ............................................................................................... 1

PART 2 – Supply Requirements ........................................................................................ 614

PART 3 - Contract .............................................................................................................. 219

PART 1 – Bidding Procedures

Section I. Instructions to Bidders

B. Contents of Bidding Document ......................................................................................... 9

C. Preparation of Bids .......................................................................................................... 10

D. Submission and Opening of Bids .................................................................................... 18

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ............................................................................... 21

28. Deviations, Reservations, and Omissions ..........................................................................22

F. Award of Contract ............................................................................................................ 26

Section I. Instructions to Bidders

Practices corrupt and fraudulent practices as set forth in Section VI.

(a) directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by or is under

preparation of the design or technical specifications of the

4.5 Bidders that are Government-owned enterprises or institutions in

4.6 A Bidder shall not be under suspension from bidding by the

4.7 Firms and individuals may be ineligible if so indicated in Section V

4.8 A Bidder shall provide such evidence of eligibility satisfactory to

insurance, installation, training, and initial maintenance.

B. Contents of Bidding Document

PART 1 Bidding Procedures

 Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

 Section VII. Schedule of Requirements

 Section VIII. General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

its Bid all information or documentation as is required by the

interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall govern.

way limit the Purchaser’s right to contract on any of the terms

the technical specification, and if applicable, a statement of

18.2. In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid

18.3. If the award is delayed by a period exceeding fifty-six (56) days

(b) an irrevocable letter of credit;

(c) a cashier’s or certified check; or

(d) another security specified in the BDS,

from a reputable source from an eligible country. If the

19.5. If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the Bid

19.6. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder shall be returned as

19.7. The Bid Security may be forfeited or the Bid Securing

(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid

(b) if the successful Bidder fails to:

(i) sign the Contract in accordance with ITB41; or

(ii) furnish a performance security in accordance with